AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer

Instructions for Use
AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer
A98352AC
September 2015
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
250 S. Kraemer Blvd.
Brea, CA 92821 U.S.A.
Instructions for Use
AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer
PN A98352AC (September 2015)
© 2015 Beckman Coulter, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Trademarks
The following Beckman Coulter trademarks are registered in the
USPTO and may be used in this manual:
• Beckman Coulter and the Beckman Coulter logo
• AU
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Find us on the World Wide Web at:

www.beckmancoulter.com
EC REP
Beckman Coulter Ireland Inc.
Lismeehan, O’Callaghan’s Mills,
Co. Clare, Ireland
Phone: +353-65-683-1100
FAX: +353-65-683-1122
Beckman Coulter do Brasil Com e Imp de Prod de Lab Ltda

Calçada Aldebarã, 39, Centro De Apoio 2 - Alphaville,
Cep 06541-055 - Santana De Parnaíba, Sp, Brasil
CNPJ: 42.160.812/0001-44
製造販売業者: ベックマン･コールター株式会社
〒 135-0063
東京都江東区有明三丁目 5 番 7 号
TOC 有明ウエストタワー
贝克曼库尔特有限公司，
美国加利福尼亚州，Brea 市，S. Kraemer 大街 250 号，
邮编：92821 电话：(001) 714-993-5321
Beckman Coulter KK
贝克曼库尔特株式会社
东京都江东区有明三丁目 5 番 7 号
邮编：135-0063
Rx Only
Original Instructions
Revision History
This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent
software version changes the information in this document, a new issue will be released.
A98352AC, July 2015
Software version 5.0
This document was created to:

• Replace the current User's Guide with the Instructions for Use and Reference Manual.
• Improve the content and usability of the instructions.
• Change the humidity condition from 40% RH to 20% RH.
• Add 66039 to the parts list.
• Update the Hazards section.
• Update the Fluorocarbon Label section.
• Add the IVD symbol.
• Change caution from Class 3R Laser Radiation to Class 2 Laser Radiation.
• Change part number MU858000 to Drain Tube 3.
• Add the 180 mL bottle.
• Add the following tables:
— Cup or Tube Available for Racks.
— Cup Nested (Inserted) in Tube Available for Racks.
• Move the Replace the Photometer Lamp procedure to As Needed Maintenance.
• Add the reagent adapter part numbers.
• Add Japan part numbers to the maintenance sections.
• Update the following screens:
— Figure 4.14 Sample: Test Requisition Tab
— Figure 4.18 Add On Dialog
— Figure 4.19 Confirm Add On Order (Requisition)
— Figure 4.21 Delete Requisition Dialog
— Figure 4.26 Search Dialog
— Figure 5.5 Rack Data Dialog
• Update the Replace the Wash Syringe procedure.
• Add the following maintenance procedures to As Needed Maintenance:
— Clean the Rack
— Clean the Rack Tray
— Clean the Rack Transfer Lanes
— Save Parameters
— Reset the System from Stop to Standby Mode
— Replace the ISE Mix Bar
A98352AC iii
Revision History
A98352AB, October 2012
This document was created to:

• Incorporate AU5800 RTWB rev AB part number B04129.
• Incorporate AU5800 LIH document rev AB part number B16531.
• Add a new procedure on how to install a new wash syringe.
• Add a new option to set periodic cleaning for the ISE sample probe in Parameters >
Misc. > Contamination Parameters > Periodic Cleaning (Sample Probe).
• Add a new option for TCP/IP online connection to LIS.
• Change the corporate address.
Initial Issue, A98352AA, October 2010
This document was created to provide instructions on how to use the AU5800® Chemistry
Analyzer.
iv A98352AC
Warranty
The system is covered by and subject to the provisions of the warranty included in your
contractual agreement for the system or its reagents.
The customer is responsible for routine preventive maintenance procedures. Repairs

arising from the failure to perform these maintenance procedures at the indicated time
intervals are made at the discretion of Beckman Coulter, and at the customer's expense.
A98352AC v
Warranty
vi A98352AC
Safety Notice
Read all product manuals and consult with Beckman Coulter trained personnel before you
operate the system. Do not perform any procedure before you carefully read all
instructions. Always follow the product labels and the recommendation from the
manufacturer. For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Alerts for Warning, Caution, Important, Note, and Tip
WARNING
Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

cause death or serious injury. Warning can indicate the possibility of erroneous data
that could cause an incorrect diagnosis.
CAUTION
Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can cause
minor or moderate injury. Caution can also alert against unsafe practices, or indicate
the possibility of erroneous data that could cause an incorrect diagnosis.
IMPORTANT
Important indicates important information to follow.
NOTE
Note indicates notable information to follow.
TIP
Tip indicates information to consider.
Summary of Hazards
This section describes the possible hazards of the system. The hazards of individual
procedures in this manual are included in the warnings or cautions within the instructions.
Read this section before you operate this system.
Follow the power requirements in the system specifications. Follow the procedures and
safety warnings throughout this manual.
A98352AC vii
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
If you use the system in a manner not specified by Beckman Coulter, the protection
provided by the system can be impaired and incorrect results or system failure can occur.
Bar Code Reader

Do not adjust or remove the housing of any bar code reader. The bar code readers use
lasers and looking directly at the laser light can be hazardous. Assume that the laser is
always on.
Use of control or adjustments or performance of procedures other than these specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Biohazardous and Chemical Materials

Observe all biohazard precautions when doing maintenance, service, or troubleshooting on
the system. Biohazard precautions include, but are not limited to, wearing gloves, eye
shields, and lab coats, and washing hands after working on contaminated portions of the
system.
Follow all laboratory procedures and policies for handling infectious and pathogenic
materials.
Avoid skin contact with reagents and other chemical preparations. Wear Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) to work with reagents and other chemical preparations used
with the system. For more information, refer to the related SDS (Safety Data Sheet).
Clean spills of biohazardous or other potentially hazardous substances on the system

immediately. If the system must be decontaminated, contact Beckman Coulter.
Follow your laboratory procedure for biohazardous and hazardous material disposal.
Electric Shock
Do not replace or service any components where you can contact hazardous parts that
could cause electric shock. Beckman Coulter must perform this maintenance.
Electrical Ground
Never operate the system until the power cord is connected correctly to an electrical
ground.
Use a three-pronged (grounded) power cord to connect the system to a matching three-
wire grounded outlet. Do not use an adapter to connect the power plug to a two-pronged
outlet.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The system generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the system is not
installed and operated correctly, this energy can cause interference with other equipment.
In addition, other equipment can radiate radio frequency energy to which the system is
viii A98352AC
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
sensitive. If you suspect interference between the system and other equipment, Beckman
Coulter recommends the following actions to correct the interference:
1. This IVD medical equipment complies with the emission and immunity requirements
described in this part of the EN/IEC 61326 series.
2. As to emission, this equipment has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, so in
a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference, in which case, you may need
to take measures to mitigate the interference.
3. It is recommended to evaluate electromagnetic environment prior to operation of the
device.
4. Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation
(for example, unshielded intentional RF sources), as these can interfere with the proper
operation.
5. Confirm that the equipment is operating from a different power service connector than
the power service connector for the system.
6. Do not use medical equipment that can be susceptible to malfunctions caused by
Electric Magnetic Field (EMF) near the system.
Flammable Materials
Do not use this system near flammable materials.
Moving Parts
While the system is in operation, do not touch or go close to any moving parts. Close
protective guards and covers during operation. Failure to close covers correctly can cause
injury or incorrect results.
Liquid Waste
Handle all liquid waste as potentially infectious.
Some liquid waste can require special treatment before disposal. Follow your laboratory
procedure.
Some substances in the reagents, control materials, calibrators, and wash solutions have
disposal regulations. Follow your laboratory procedure.
Solid Waste
Handle all solid waste as potentially infectious.
Some solid waste can require special treatment before disposal. Follow your laboratory
procedure.
Handle any used or replaced parts (such as tubes, mix bars, probes, cuvettes, and wash
nozzles) as infectious waste materials. Follow your laboratory procedure.
A98352AC ix
Safety Notice
AU5800 Hazards
AU5800 Hazards
• A Beckman Coulter representative installs the system. If the system installation needs
modification, contact Beckman Coulter.
• If the system malfunctions, power off the system completely using the main breaker
located on the left side of the analyzer before any repair service.
• If fluid is spilled on the system, turn off the main breaker located on the left side of the
analyzer immediately. Wipe up the spill only after turning off the main system breaker.
If fluid enters the system after a spill, contact Beckman Coulter before restarting the
analyzer.
• After transferring the analysis results to a laboratory information system, confirm that
the sample numbers and sample IDs are correct.
• Substances such as Lipemia, Icterus, and Hemolysis can interfere with results. Refer to
the reagent IFU for specific substance interference information.
• To be sure the analytical data is accurate:
— Confirm the quality of deionized (DI) water is within specifications.
— Confirm that all tests have passed calibration, and calibration is not expired.
— Inspect the quality control data.
• Use the correct reagent, calibrator, and control to analyze samples.
• Avoid excessive reagent agitation, which can cause bubbles. If bubbles are visible on
the surface of the reagent, remove them. Confirm that the reagent bottles are placed
securely on the reagent tray with the correct adapters and partitions. If the bottles are
tilted, incorrect results can occur, or you can damage the reagent probe.
• Prepare reagents, wash solutions, calibrators, and QC samples according to the
Instructions for Use (IFU), paying particular attention to any reconstitution, mixing,
and pretreatment instructions.
• Handling samples:
— Sample to sample carryover is one potential source of analytical error in the
clinical laboratory. Do not use the same sample run on an AU Chemistry system
for analysis of analytes for which a small quantity of carryover could cause
problems with the results.
— This system analyzes serum, urine, plasma, and other sample types. Other refers
to other body fluids such as cerebrospinal fluid (CSF). Some samples cannot be
analyzed depending on the analysis test, reagent, and sample tubes used. For
questions regarding reagent and sample tube type, contact Beckman Coulter.
— Use serum or plasma that is clot free, or urine that is free from suspended matter.
If serum or urine contains clots or suspended matter, the probe can clog and cause
problems with the analysis results.
— Chemicals present in the sample (medicine, anticoagulant, preservative, and so
on) can significantly interfere with the results.
— Highly viscous samples can interfere with the testing of the samples and the
reliability of data.
— Refer to the Instructions for Use (IFU) for each test for correct sample collection
and storage. Incorrect storage of samples can alter the analyte in a sample.
— Use only sample containers and sample tubes specified by Beckman Coulter.
— To reduce the risk of interference, centrifuge and then separate serum and plasma
samples adequately from blood cells immediately. Before analysis, confirm that
samples are free from suspended matter, such as fibrin. While the system has a
x A98352AC
Safety Notice
AU5800 Hardware Labels
sophisticated clot detection mechanism, this mechanism is not able to detect all
clots. Carefully inspect the samples.
— Collect urine samples using correct preservatives and remove any suspended
matter using centrifugation before analysis (CLSI GP16-A2).
— Confirm that any anticoagulants or collection devices that employ a barrier are
compatible with the test reagent being used. Refer to the Instruction for Use for
suitable and validated sample types. Use caution when using sample tubes
containing barriers or gels. Confirm the suitability of all collection devices in use.
— For information about whether a serum separating agent is correct or not, contact
the chemical reagent manufacturer or distributor.
— When using sample containers or tubes containing a separating medium, confirm
that there is enough serum to avoid contaminating or blocking the sample probes
with the separating medium.
— Confirm that there is enough sample for correct sampling to occur. The small
amount of wash water left on the sample probe can dilute the volume of sample
left in the sample tube.
• To prevent water leaks, confirm that Beckman Coulter has fitted water supply and
drainage hoses according to local guidelines.
• To confirm system performance, maintain and inspect the system periodically by
replacing the parts according to the instructions in this guide.
— Have and follow a maintenance schedule for this system.
— Create a maintenance routine for the computer software and hardware, including
frequent backing up of data containing analysis settings, results history, and the
alarm log list file.
— Do not store backups onsite. Keep one copy on-site for reference and one copy
offsite.
• Before using the system for the first time, set parameters for the reagent and sample
quantity, measurement wavelength, calibrator values, and so on. Enter test specific
parameters from the chemistry setting sheet to have optimum system performance.
Enter any updates to these settings into the system immediately.
• Dedicate the computer hardware to only running the system software. Do not connect
the computer hardware to the Internet, unless instructed to do so by Beckman Coulter.
• Keep the analyzer covers closed except for startup procedures and maintenance. If the
covers are open for extended periods of time, excess condensation can be generated in
the reagent refrigerators and cause errors.

The following hardware labels are attached to the AU5800. Use caution, observe, and
follow all warning labels. Do not cover or remove these labels. If the labels peel off or
become illegible, contact Beckman Coulter to replace the labels. Orange labels indicate that
there is a risk of Serious Injury. Yellow labels indicate that there is a risk of Personal Injury,
Fire, or Damage.
Safety Electric Shock Label
A98352AC xi
Safety Notice
This symbol indicates an area of the system that should not be accessed under any
circumstances, due to risk of electrical shock. (Labeling Position: From the back view of the
rack feeder unit, on the lower right side near the inlet of the power cable.)
High Temperature Danger Label
This symbol indicates the risk of burning by touching the hot photometer lamp directly
when replacing it. (Labeling Position: near the light source lamp.)
Biohazard Label
This symbol indicates the use of biohazardous material. Wear protective clothing and
follow universal precautions as dictated by local or national regulations (CLSI GP17-A2,
ISO15190 or 29CFR 1910.1030).
Risk of biohazardous materials such as sample probes, mix bars, sample rack, wash nozzle
component, cuvette, sample probe wash well, condensed waste liquid drain hole, ISE
sample pot, ISE roller pump tubing, drain hole, and so forth. (Labeling Position: On the
front and rear surface (analyzer units), near the water outlet (rack feeder unit), and on the
front and rear surface (ISE unit).)
Laser Radiation Label
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT complies with IEC60825-1. (Labeling Position: near the inlet of
the power cable on the rear side of the rack feeder unit.)
CAUTION-CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM.
(Labeling Position: near the sample ID bar code reader of the rack feeder unit.)
Personal Injury Label
This symbol indicates areas where a risk of injury due to system movement is possible.
Fingers or other body parts should be kept clear of these areas during system operation.
• Danger of injury by moving parts of the sample probes, reagent probes, mix bars, wash
nozzle component, and so forth. (Labeling Position: on the front and rear surface of
each analyzer and ISE unit.)
xii A98352AC
Safety Notice
• Danger of injury by operation parts of syringe. (Labeling Position: near the sample
syringes, wash syringes, and reagent syringes (analyzer unit), and sample syringe,
wash syringe, and buffer syringe (ISE unit).)
• Danger of injury by moving parts on the rack feeder unit. (Labeling Position: near the
rack input component, rack output component, priority rack input component, and
central surface of the rack feeder unit.)
• Danger of injury by moving parts, for example the ISE roller pump, and so forth.
(Labeling Position: back of the ISE cover.)
Danger Label
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in operator’s
injury and/or serious physical damage.
• Danger of leak from water supply and discharge component. (Labeling Position: near
the water outlet)
• To avoid electrical shock, do not remove the cover connector screws to access the
water supply component. (Labeling Position: near the power outlet of water supply
component (option).)
• Do not lean against the monitor, which could result in it falling down. (Labeling
Position: near the monitor arm.)
Recycling Label
This label is required in accordance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) Directive of the European Union. The presence of this label indicates that:
1. the device was put on the European Market after August 13, 2005 and
2. the device is not to be disposed of via the municipal waste collection system of any
member state of the European Union
Customers must understand and follow all laws regarding the correct decontamination and
safe disposal of electrical equipment. For Beckman Coulter products bearing this label,
contact your dealer or local Beckman Coulter office for details on the take-back program
that facilitates the correct collection, treatment, recovery, recycling and safe disposal of
these products.
For the Japan Market:
This system is considered an industrial waste, subject to special controls for infectious
waste. Prior to disposal of the system, refer to the "Waste Disposal and Public Cleaning
Law" for compliance procedures.
A98352AC xiii
Safety Notice
C-Tick Mark Label
The C-Tick mark is intended for use on products that comply with the applicable
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards in the Australian or New Zealand market.
Fluorocarbon Label
This system uses a HFC (hydro fluorocarbon) cooling medium.
HFC chemicals cannot be discharged indiscriminately. When the system is discarded,

recover HFC chemicals.
The type and volume of the HFC chemicals are described on the label.
Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Labels

These labels and materials declaration table (the Table of Hazardous Substance's Name and
Concentration) meet People's Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/
T11364-2006 "Marking for Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information
Products" requirements.
RoHS Caution Label
This logo indicates that this electronic information product contains certain toxic or
hazardous elements, and can be used safely during its environmental protection use period.
The number in the middle of the logo indicates the environmental protection use period (in
years) for the product. The outer circle indicates that the product can be recycled. The logo
also signifies that the product should be recycled immediately after its environmental
protection use period has expired. The date on the label indicates the date of manufacture.
xiv A98352AC
Safety Notice
RoHS Environmental Label
This logo indicates that the product does not contain any toxic or hazardous substances or
elements. The “e” stands for electrical, electronic and environmental electronic information
products. This logo indicates that this electronic information product does not contain any
toxic or hazardous substances or elements, and is green and is environmental. The outer
circle indicates that the product can be recycled. The logo also signifies that the product can
be recycled after being discarded, and should not be casually discarded.
For In Vitro Diagnostic Use Label
This symbol is for an in vitro diagnostic medical device.
AU5800 System Display and Labels
Figure 1 On Switch
Figure 2 Off Switch
Figure 3 Ground Terminal
Labels
• Stripes - Orange stripes affixed to the system surface indicate the movement areas of
the hardware components. Avoid these areas during operation.
• Warning Labels - Identify areas of the system where hazards exist and where caution
should be taken to avoid serious injury or death.
• Instruction Labels - Instruction labels are affixed on the system at relevant locations to
alert the operator to operate the system correctly.
A98352AC xv
Safety Notice
Figure 4 AU5800 Labels
1. Placed inside the cover

2. CAUTION-CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
3. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT complies with IEC60825-1
xvi A98352AC
Contents
Revision History, iii

Warranty, v
Safety Notice, vii
Introduction, xxix
CHAPTER 1: System Overview, 1-1
Hardware Overview, 1-1
Hardware Component Overview, 1-1
Breakers and Fuses, 1-2
Operation Buttons, 1-4
LEDs and RACK SET/DIAG Buttons (Rack Feeder Unit and
Priority Rack Input Component), 1-5
STOP/STANDBY Switch and DIAG Buttons (Analyzer Units), 1-8
STOP/STANDBY Switch and DIAG Buttons (ISE Unit), 1-9
Rack Feeder Unit, 1-10
Rack Transfer Flow, 1-13
Sample Transfer Component, 1-14
Reagent Transfer Component, 1-15
Mix Bar Component, 1-15
Cuvette Wheel Component, 1-16
Photometry Component, 1-17
Wash Nozzle Component, 1-17
Reagent Refrigerator Component, 1-19
Syringe Component, 1-20
Tank Storage (Rack Feeder Unit), 1-22
Tank Storage (Analyzer Unit), 1-23
ISE Unit (Optional), 1-23
Data Processing Module (DPR), 1-27
Touch Screen, Mouse, and Keyboard, 1-28
Software Overview, 1-29
Organization of Operation Screen, 1-29
Main Button Area, 1-29
Using the System Help and Alarm List, 1-30
Home Outline, 1-32
Analyzer Modes, 1-33
CHAPTER 2: Daily Startup, 2-1
Introduction, 2-1
A98352AC xvii
Contents
Startup Procedure, 2-1

Turn on the System, 2-1
Set a New Index, 2-2
Perform Analyzer Daily Maintenance, 2-4
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks, 2-4
Inspect the Stability of the Upper Cover, 2-9
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes,
and Mix Bars, 2-9
Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution
Bottles, 2-13
Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions, 2-13
Inspect the Printer and Paper, 2-16
Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in
the Open Position, 2-16
Inspect the Analyzer Status, 2-17
Perform the ISE Startup (Option), 2-19
Inspect the ISE Reagents, 2-20
Replace the ISE Reagents, 2-21
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option),
2-23
Clean the ISE (ISE Option), 2-25
Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option), 2-26
Monitor the Reagent Status, 2-29
Monitor the Reagent Status, 2-29
Replace the Reagents, 2-36
Calibrate Tests, 2-39
Order (Requisition) and Perform Calibration, 2-40
Process Quality Control (QC), 2-42
Order (Requisition) and Perform Quality Control (QC), 2-43
Start Analysis, 2-45
CHAPTER 3: System Setup, 3-1
Program a New Test, 3-1
Create a Profile, 3-6
Create a Sample Profile, 3-7
Create a Reagent Blank or Calibration Profile, 3-7
Create a QC Profile, 3-9
Program Calibrator Concentrations and a New Calibrator Lot Number,
3-10
Program Preset QC Mean and Range, 3-11
Program a User Menu, 3-12
Edit the User Menu, 3-12
xviii A98352AC
Contents
CHAPTER 4: Sample Programming and Processing, 4-1

Sample Preparation, 4-1
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in the Rack, 4-2
Place Samples into each Rack Type, 4-4
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in a Rack, 4-7
Prepare Racks for Analysis, 4-8
Multi-rack ID Option, 4-8
Placing a Rack on the Rack Input Tray, 4-12
Place a Rack Input Tray or Rack Output Tray on the Rack
Feeder Unit, 4-14
Adding Racks Directly to the Trays on the Rack Input
Component, 4-17
Adding Racks to the Priority Rack Input Component, 4-19
Order (Requisition) for Routine and Emergency Samples, 4-20
Enter Manual Orders (Requisitions) for Routine and
Emergency Samples, 4-20
Enter Batch Orders (Requisitions), 4-22
Add On a Test for Rerun, 4-24
Delete an Order (Requisition), 4-26
Download Orders (Requisitions) from a Laboratory
Information System, 4-28
Processing Emergency Samples, 4-29
Performing a Repeat Run, 4-29
Auto Repeat, 4-29
Repeat Orders (Requisitions) for Manual Repeat, 4-30
Perform a Manual Repeat in an Orange Rack, 4-32
Print Results, 4-33
Print Sample Data Reports, 4-33
Print Reagent Blank, Calibration, and QC Results, 4-35
Batch Transfer Data to the Laboratory Information System, 4-36
Sample Data, 4-36
Reagent Blank, Calibration, and QC Data, 4-37
CHAPTER 5: System Monitoring and Results, 5-1
Monitoring Analysis, 5-1
Monitor Results, 5-1
Identifying Sample Kinds and Types by Sample Data Prefix, 5-1
Sample Status Screen, 5-2
Inspect the Analyzer Status, 5-4
Confirm the ISE Status, 5-13
Disable a Test, 5-16
Review Results for Flags and Alarms, 5-17
Review Results for Flags, 5-17
A98352AC xix
Contents
Review Alarms, 5-17

Interpreting Lipemia, Icterus, and Hemolysis (LIH) Results, 5-19
Reagent Management, 5-20
Reagents, 5-20
Add Adapters to the Reagent Tray, 5-23
Remove Adapters from the Reagent Tray, 5-24
Assign a Reagent Position, 5-25
Edit a Reagent ID, 5-27
System Shutdown (End Process), 5-28
Pause Analysis, 5-29
Resuming Analysis from Pause Mode, 5-30
Rack Feeder Stop, 5-31
Stop the Rack Feeder, 5-31
Restart Analysis After Rack Feeder Stop, 5-31
Stop Analysis, 5-31
Return to Standby Mode from Stop Mode, 5-32
Perform an Emergency Stop, 5-32
Return to Standby Mode After an Emergency Stop, 5-32
Using Beckman Coulter PROService (Option), 5-33
Transmitting files with PROService, 5-33
Identifying and Reanalyzing Samples after a Cuvette Overflow, 5-34
Output the List to Media, 5-39
Print the List, 5-39
CHAPTER 6: Maintenance, 6-1
Maintenance Introduction, 6-1
Maintenance Warnings and Cautions, 6-1
Maintenance Schedule, 6-3
Maintenance Log, 6-16
Confirm the Maintenance Schedule, 6-16
Add a Maintenance, 6-17
Delete a Maintenance, 6-18
Update the Maintenance Log, 6-18
View Maintenance History, 6-19
Accessing Maintenance Operations, 6-20
Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance, 6-22
Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions, 6-28
Daily Maintenance, 6-28
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks, 6-28
Inspect the Stability of the Upper Cover, 6-33
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes,
and Mix Bars, 6-33
xx A98352AC
Contents
Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution

Bottles, 6-37
Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions, 6-37
Inspect the Printer and Paper, 6-40
Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in
the Open Position, 6-40
Weekly Maintenance, 6-41
Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars, 6-41
Perform a W2, 6-45
Perform a Photocal, 6-49
Clean the Pre-dilution Bottles, 6-53
Monthly Maintenance, 6-54
Clean the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Wells, 6-54
Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells, 6-56
Clean the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube
Mounting Joints, 6-58
Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Sample Probe Filter, 6-62
Quarterly Maintenance, 6-68
Clean the Air Filters, 6-68
Inspect and, if Needed, Replace the Deionized Water Filter,
Sample Probe Filter, and Replace the O-ring, 6-70
Six-Month Maintenance, 6-72
Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wedges, 6-72
Yearly Maintenance, 6-77
Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting
Joints, 6-77
As Needed Maintenance, 6-80
Replenish the Wash Solution, 6-81
Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes, 6-83
Replace a Sample Probe, 6-84
Replace a Reagent Probe, 6-86
Replace the Mix Bars, 6-88
Replace the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints,
6-90
Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE Sample, or ISE Buffer
Syringe, 6-93
Replace the Wash Syringe Type 1, 6-101
Replace the Wash Syringe Type 2, 6-107
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators, 6-111
Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes, 6-113
Replace the Sample or Reagent Probe Tubing, 6-114
Perform a W1, 6-116
Replace Rack ID Labels, 6-116
A98352AC xxi
Contents
Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes, 6-118

Clean the Cuvettes, Cuvette Wedges, and Cuvette Wheel after
an Overflow, 6-121
Replace the Photometer Lamp, 6-127
Clean the Rack, 6-131
Clean the Rack Tray, 6-132
Clean the Rack Transfer Lanes, 6-133
Save Parameters, 6-137
Reset the System from Stop to Standby Mode, 6-138
ISE Maintenance for All Markets Except Japan, 6-138
ISE Tubing Block Diagram, 6-138
ISE Solution Position Area, 6-139
Parts List for ISE Maintenance, 6-140
ISE Daily Maintenance, 6-143
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option), 6-143
Clean the ISE (ISE Option), 6-145
Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option), 6-146
ISE Weekly Maintenance, 6-149
Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes, 6-149
Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line, 6-151
ISE Maintenance Every Other Week or Every 3,000 Samples, 6-152
Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Sample
Pot, and Sample Pot Tubing, 6-153
ISE Maintenance Every Month, 6-158
ISE Maintenance Every Other Month or Every 20,000 Samples, 6-158
Inspect and Add ISE Internal Reference Solution, 6-159
ISE Quarterly Maintenance or Maintenance Every 20,000 Samples, 6-160
Replace the Mixture Aspiration and MID Standard Roller
Pump Tubing, 6-160
Replace the Tubing between the Sample Pot Electrode Block
and T-Connector, 6-163
Replace the REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and Pinch
Valve Tubing, 6-166
Manually Clean the Drain Well and, if Needed, Replace the
Drain Tube, 6-169
Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual), 6-172
ISE Six-Month Maintenance or Every 40,000 Samples, 6-175
Replace the Na K or Cl Electrode, 6-175
ISE Maintenance Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples, 6-179
Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing, 6-179
ISE As Needed Maintenance, 6-184
Replace the Sample Pot, 6-184
Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side), 6-186
xxii A98352AC
Contents
Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode, 6-189

Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block, 6-193
Replace the ISE Mix Bar, 6-197
Replace the ISE Reagents, 6-200
CHAPTER 7: Flags, 7-1
Flags, 7-1
Error Flags - Alphabetical Order, 7-1
Summary of Flags (Priority Order), 7-3
Flag Details, 7-5
d: QC result is excluded (deleted) by the operator, 7-5
e: Data edited by the operator, 7-6
(: Shortage of cleaning solution for contamination parameters,
7-6
Wa: Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette, 7-6
R: Insufficient reagent detected, 7-7
#: Insufficient sample detected, 7-8
%: Clot detected, 7-8
?: Unable to calculate a result, 7-9
M: A sample ID is read that is the same as a sample ID
currently in process on the track line or AU5800 when the
AU5800 is connected to the Beckman Coulter laboratory
automation system, 7-9
n: LIH test not performed, 7-9
l: Result can be affected by lipemia, 7-10
i: Result can be affected by icterus, 7-10
h: Result can be affected by hemolysis, 7-10
Y: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last
photometric read point, 7-10
U: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last
photometric read point, 7-11
y: Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric
point high, 7-11
u: Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric
point low, 7-11
@: OD is higher than 3.0, 7-12
$: Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction, 7-12
D: OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range, 7-13
B: OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range, 7-14
*: Linearity error in rate method, 7-15
&: Prozone test data is abnormal, 7-15
Z: Prozone error, 7-16
E: Overreaction in a rate assay detected, 7-16
Fx: Result (OD) is higher than the dynamic range, 7-16
Gx: Result (OD) is lower than the dynamic range, 7-16
A98352AC xxiii
Contents
!: Unable to calculate concentration, 7-17

): Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different
from the lot number used for RB/ Calibration, 7-18
a: Reagent expired, 7-18
ba: No calibration data or expired, 7-18
bh: Results are calculated with previous successful, saved
calibration or reagent blank data because the most recent
calibration or reagent blank failed., 7-18
bn: Mastercurve used, 7-19
bz: Calibration curve for Prozone data used, 7-19
F: Result is higher than the dynamic range, 7-19
G: Result is lower than the dynamic range, 7-19
ph: Result is higher than the upper panic value, 7-20
pl: Result is lower than the low panic value, 7-20
T: Abnormality found in the optional calculated test check
programmed in the Checked Tests Menu, 7-20
P: Positive, 7-20
N: Negative, 7-20
H: Result is higher than reference range, 7-21
L: Result is lower than reference range, 7-21
J: Result is higher than the repeat decision range, 7-21
K: Result is lower than the repeat decision range, 7-21
fh: Result is higher than the repeat run reflex range, 7-21
fl: Result is lower than the repeat run reflex range, 7-22
Va: Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range,
7-22
xQ: Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other QC sample,
7-22
1Q: QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level
field, 7-23
2Q: QC data exceeds 13s control range, 7-23
4Q: QC data exceeds R4s control range, 7-24
6Q: A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side
of the mean, 7-24
7Q: Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or
decreasing values, 7-25
S: Sample repeated and original results replaced by repeat
result, 7-25
/: Test pending or not analyzed, 7-25
r: Result has been transferred to laboratory information
system through online communication, 7-25
c: Result corrected by the operator, 7-26
xxiv A98352AC
Contents
Application of Flags (F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N) During Calculation of

Final Result Flowchart, 7-26
CHAPTER 8: Error Messages, 8-1
Error Messages, 8-1
CHAPTER 9: Troubleshooting, 9-1
Introduction, 9-1
Reagent Blank Data, 9-1
Calibration Data, 9-1
QC Data, 9-2
Troubleshooting Reagents, Calibrators, Quality Control, and Samples., 9-2
Reagent Blank Issues and Corrective Actions, 9-2
Calibration Issues and Corrective Actions, 9-3
QC Related Issues and Corrective Actions, 9-4
Sample Related Issues, 9-4
Wash Solution Related Issues, 9-5
Deionized Water Related Issues, 9-5
Items in Common on the AU5800 that can Aid in
Troubleshooting, 9-6
Mechanical Problems, 9-6
Syringe Problems, 9-6
Probe Problems, 9-7
Abnormal Data Caused by Cuvette Wheel (Cuvette Wedge) or
Wash Nozzles, 9-8
Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or Photometer
Component, 9-8
Mixing Problems, 9-9
Deionized Water Tank Problems, 9-9
Deionized Water or Filter Problems, 9-9
Incubation Temperature Problems, 9-10
Tubing and Pump Problems, 9-10
Reagent Refrigerator Problems, 9-10
Rack Problems, 9-10
System Problems, 9-11
Alarm for Reagent Refrigerator Temp, 9-12
Abnormal Sound from Inside the System, 9-12
Alarm for Deionized Water, 9-12
Bar Code Label Errors, 9-13
Leaks from the Bottom of the System, 9-13
No Wash Solution to Mix Bar Wash Wells, 9-13
Reagent Alarm when Sufficient Reagent Remains in Bottles, 9-13
Sample Alarm when Sufficient Sample Remains, 9-14
No Sample Cup Alarm when Sample Cup is in the Rack, 9-14
A98352AC xxv
Contents
Liquid Leaking from the Reagent Probe or Sample Probe, 9-14

Reagent Probe or Sample Probe not Aligned over the Cuvette,
9-14
Flag [#] (Sample Level Detection Error) Generated during the
Sample Dispense Operation, 9-14
TEMP DIL Alarm for the Wash Water Heater, 9-15
Rack Jams, 9-15
Printer Problems, 9-15
Data Processor Problems, 9-15
Menu Cannot be Selected, 9-15
Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work, 9-16
Keyboard Not Responding, 9-16
Results Do Not Print Automatically, 9-16
Online Auto-Output by Laboratory Information System Not
Executed, 9-16
Recovering from an Emergency Stop or Power Loss, 9-17
Perform an Emergency Stop, 9-17
Return to Standby Mode After an Emergency Stop, 9-17
RTWB Troubleshooting Overview Flowchart, 9-18
Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Alarm, 9-20
Inspect the Cuvettes to Determine if an Overflow Occurred, 9-20
Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow, 9-21
Overflow Causes, 9-21
Recognizing an Overflow, 9-21
Items to Confirm when Recovering from an Overflow, 9-22
After the Overflow is Corrected, 9-22
Recovering from an Unstable Photometry Error, 9-22
Inspect the Cuvette Placement, 9-22
Inspect the Cuvette Condition, 9-23
Inspect the Lamp, 9-25
Troubleshooting the Beckman Coulter Laboratory Automation System
Connection, 9-25
Recovering from Rack Jams at the Rack Loader and Rack
Unloader Units, 9-25
Recovering from Mechanical Errors, 9-26
Operating the AU5800 when the Beckman Coulter Laboratory
Automation System is Down, 9-26
APPENDIX A: System Specifications, A-1
System Specifications, A-1
General Specifications, A-10
Cups or Tubes Specifications, A-11
Sampling Specifications, A-13
xxvi A98352AC
Contents
Reagent Specifications, A-14

Reaction System Specifications, A-15
Analytical Method Specifications, A-16
Optical System Specifications, A-16
Data Processing Specifications, A-17
Calculation Processing Specifications, A-17
Input and Output Specifications, A-18
ISE Specifications, A-19
Glossary
A98352AC xxvii
Contents
xxviii A98352AC
Introduction
Intended Use
The AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer measures analytes in samples, in combination with
appropriate reagents, calibrators, quality control (QC) material, and other accessories. This
system is for in vitro diagnostic use only.
A98352AC xxix
Introduction
Intended Use
xxx A98352AC
CHAPTER 1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
This section provides a description and diagram with location of each hardware component
and unit.
Hardware Component Overview
Figure 1.1 Hardware Overview (Top and Front View)
1. Analyzer units 9. R1 refrigerator component

2. ISE unit (option) 10. Tank storage (analyzer unit)
3. Rack feeder unit 11. R2 refrigerator component
4. Rack input component 12. Syringe component
5. Rack buffer component 13. Operation buttons
6. Reagent transfer component 14. LEDs and RACK SET/DIAG button (rack
7. Cuvette wheel component feeder unit)
8. Photometry component 15. Tank storage (rack feeder unit)
A98352AC 1-1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
NOTE
For information on the hardware components when the AU5800 is connected to the
Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system, refer to AU5800 Laboratory
Automation Connecting Kit addendum.
Figure 1.2 Hardware Overview (Top and Back View)
1. Breaker and fuses 5. Sample transfer component

2. Power supply component 6. Syringe component
3. Water supply and drain connections 7. Wash nozzle component
4. Mix bar component 8. Rack transfer component
Breakers and Fuses

The back of the rack feeder unit has one main breaker, and subbreakers including REF, PC,
SMP1, and SMP2. Each unit has REF and ANL subbreakers.
To completely power off the system, turn off the main breaker.
The main system breaker circuit board allows the power in specific areas of the system to
be isolated. The main breaker (main power switch) automatically shuts down all the
breaker switches. In normal conditions, all of the breaker switches are in the on position.
Subbreakers located on the back of each unit are used for protection. In normal conditions,
the breakers are On.
1-2 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.3 Breakers on the Rack Feeder Unit
1. Subbreakers
2. Main breaker
Main breaker and subbreakers are on the back of the rack feeder unit.
Figure 1.4 Subbreakers on Back of Analyzer Unit
1. Subbreakers
A98352AC 1-3
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.5 Subbreaker on the Back of ISE Unit
1. Subbreaker
Operation Buttons
Figure 1.6 Operation Buttons
1. ON button (Green)
2. EM STOP button (Orange)
3. RESET button (White)
• On (sub power) button (ON) - The ON button turns on the analyzer and PC, and the
system initializes.
• Emergency Stop button (EM STOP)- The EM STOP button turns off all power to the
analyzer immediately. Use this button if there is an emergency, or to turn off the
system completely after an End Process. The power to the PC is not turned off by
pressing EM STOP.
• Reset button (RESET) - The RESET button supplies the main power to the system, and is
used after an emergency stop or power failure. To be sure there is correct
synchronization after an emergency stop, turn off the PC by performing an End
Process. In rare cases, an End Process takes a long time or cannot be performed
because there is no response from the analyzer. In these cases, select Ctrl + Alt +
Delete, then select Shutdown to turn off the PC. To reboot the system, press RESET, and
then press ON. After an emergency stop, wait 5 seconds before pressing RESET, then
wait 5 seconds before pressing ON. Reset also resets the power failure detection circuit
and generates the Power Failure Detected alarm.
1-4 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
LEDs and RACK SET/DIAG Buttons (Rack Feeder Unit and Priority Rack Input Component)
The rack input component, rack output component, and priority rack input component
each have LEDs to show the status of each area.
NOTE
For information on the LEDs and operation buttons when the AU5800 is connected to
the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system, refer to AU5800 Laboratory
Automation Connecting Kit addendum.
LED
Table 1.1 Rack Input Component
LED Description
Amber LED flashing Racks are in the process of loading onto the
system. Wait until the amber LED turns off before
loading or unloading a rack tray.
Green LED ON Racks on this tray are transferred first.
Table 1.2 Priority Rack Input Component

LED Description
Amber LED flashing Racks are in the process of loading onto the
system. If the cover is lifted, a Priority Rack
Cover Open alarm is generated. Wait until the
amber light turns off to load additional priority
racks.
Table 1.3 Rack Output Component

LED Description
Amber LED flashing Racks are in the process of unloading to the rack
output tray. Wait until the amber light turns off
before removing a rack output tray from the rack
output component.
A98352AC 1-5
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.7 Rack Input Component and Rack Output Component
1. Rack output component LED 4. Rack input tray 2 green LED

2. RACK SET/DIAG button 5. Rack input tray 1 amber LED
3. Rack input tray 2 amber LED 6. Rack input tray 1 green LED
Figure 1.8 Priority Rack Input Component
1. Priority rack input position 1 3. Priority rack input component LED

2. Priority rack input position 2
RACK SET/DIAG and DIAG Buttons

• RACK SET/DIAG button
1-6 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
— Use this button to load a rack(s) or tray when racks are moving on the rack input
component. The green RACK SET/DIAG button LED is On, and the amber LED
flashes when racks are moving on the rack input component. Press the RACK SET/
DIAG button to stop moving racks. The RACK SET/DIAG button flashes, the amber
LED stops flashing, and racks or a tray can be loaded. Press the RACK SET/DIAG
button again to resume rack movement on the rack input component. The RACK
SET/DIAG button LED is off when no racks are on the rack input component.
— The RACK SET/DIAG button is used to initiate functions in the Maintenance and
Diagnostics screens.
Figure 1.9 Front of Rack Feeder Unit
1. RACK SET/DIAG button

• DIAG button - Use this button to initiate functions in the Maintenance and Diagnostics
screens.
Figure 1.10 Back of Rack Feeder Unit
1. DIAG button
A98352AC 1-7
System Overview
Hardware Overview
STOP/STANDBY Switch and DIAG Buttons (Analyzer Units)
Figure 1.11 STOP/STANDBY Switch and DIAG Button
1. Top view of analyzer unit (back left) 3. Top view of analyzer unit (front central)
2. DIAG button 4. STOP/STANDBY switch
• STOP/STANDBY switch - Use this switch to change between Standby and Stop modes
on each unit. If STOP is selected during Measure mode, all results in progress on the
unit are lost. Press STANDBY to reset the unit and return to Standby mode. Follow your
laboratory procedure to rerun incomplete samples.
STOP/STANDBY LED:
— On: Standby mode
— Off: Stop mode
• DIAG button - Use this button to initiate functions in the Analyzer Maintenance and
Diagnostics screens. A DIAG button is on the front and back of each analyzer unit.
1-8 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
STOP/STANDBY Switch and DIAG Buttons (ISE Unit)
Figure 1.12 STOP/STANDBY Switch and DIAG Button
1. Top view of ISE unit (back left) 3. Top view of ISE unit (front left)
2. DIAG button 4. STOP/STANDBY switch
• STOP/STANDBY switch - Use this switch to change between Standby (ISE ready) and
Stop modes on the ISE unit. If STOP is selected during Measure mode, all results in
progress on the ISE unit are lost. Press STANDBY to reset the unit and return to
Standby (ISE ready) mode. Follow your laboratory procedure to re-run incomplete
samples.
STOP/STANDBY LED:
— On: Standby mode
— Off: Stop mode
• DIAG button - Use this button to initiate functions in the ISE Maintenance and
Diagnostics screens. A DIAG button is on the front and back of the ISE unit.
A98352AC 1-9
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Rack Feeder Unit
NOTE
For information on the rack feeder unit when the AU5800 is connected to the Beckman
Coulter laboratory automation system, refer to the AU5800 Laboratory Automation
Connecting Kit addendum.
This unit is for loading and unloading racks.
Racks are loaded on the rack input component or priority rack input component. A bar
code reader reads the rack ID and sample ID, and the information is automatically
transferred to the analyzer PC. Covers prevent dirt or dust from getting into samples during
analysis, and the main covers should be closed during normal operation.
Figure 1.13 Top View of Rack Feeder Unit
1-10 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
1. Rack input tray 1 10. Return lane

2. Rack ID bar code reader for rack input 11. Rack transfer component
3. Cup detector sensor 12. Bypass lane
4. Sample ID bar code reader 13. Rack ID bar code reader for rack output
5. Rack output tray 2 14. Rack buffer component
6. Rack output tray 1 15. Priority rack input component
7. Rack output lane 16. Vertical rack transfer component
8. Rack output component 17. Rack input component
9. Primary sample transport lane 18. Rack input tray 2
Table 1.4 Sample ID Bar Code Reader Specifications
Item Specification
Wave length 650 nm
Maximum output 85 μW
Beam divergence 60 degrees
Pulse width 112 μS
Scan rate 500 Hz
Class 2
A98352AC 1-11
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Table 1.5 Rack Feeder Unit Functions

Component Description
Rack input component Loads racks on the system. A maximum of 20 racks
can be loaded on rack input tray 1 or 2. The rack
input trays (1 and 2) are placed on the rack input
component, then racks are loaded on the system
when analysis is started.
Priority rack input component Loads racks on the system with a higher priority
than the rack input component. Two positions are
available to load priority racks. The rack in position
1 is loaded first.
When the priority rack input component LED is

flashing, additional racks cannot be loaded.
Racks are not processed from the priority input

component if three or more blue, yellow, or green
racks are on the rack input component until the
blue, yellow, and green racks move from the rack
input tray.
Rack buffer component Twenty-three positions to temporarily hold racks

before processing on the rack transfer component
for the initial or repeat run.
If Auto Repeat is On, the position the rack is

assigned to for the initial run is reserved for
holding the rack before the repeat run analysis or
the rack output tray.
Rack transfer component Three rack transportation belts include the

primary sample transport lane, the bypass lane,
and the return lane.
Rack output component Unloads racks from the system.
Collects a maximum of 20 racks on rack output

tray 1 and 20 racks on rack output tray 2. The rack
output trays can be removed and replaced on the
rack output component.
Rack Input to Rack Transport Flow

1. According to the parameters programmed before analysis, racks are transferred to the
rack buffer component. If the priority rack input component has a rack present, that
rack is processed first. If there is not an open location on the rack buffer component,
the vertical rack transfer component begins operating when an open location is
available.
2. Racks move from the rack input component or priority rack input component, the rack
ID is read, the rack type is detected, the presence and type of tube or cup is detected,
and the sample ID is read. Then the racks are transferred to the rack buffer component.
1-12 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
3. Racks are transferred to the primary sample transport lane or the bypass lane. Repeat
racks and emergency (red) racks are always transferred to the bypass lane. Reagent
blank (blue), calibration (yellow), QC (green), and routine (white) racks are transferred
in the order the racks are loaded on the rack input component or priority rack input
component. Reagent blank, calibration, and QC racks are always transferred to the
primary sample transport lane.
Rack Transfer Flow

Racks are transferred to the sample aspiration position on each unit by the primary sample
transport lane or the bypass lane.
• Primary sample transport lane: Moves routine racks to the sample aspiration position
on each unit.
• Bypass lane: Moves red racks and repeat racks to the sample aspiration position on
each unit. The lane is also used to bypass a unit if no tests were requisitioned on a unit,
or if a problem exists on the primary sample transport lane.
• Return lane: Moves racks to the rack output component when sample aspiration is
complete. If the Auto Repeat option is On, racks are first moved to the rack buffer
component.
• Lane changer: Moves racks between the primary sample transport lane, bypass lane,
and return lane from unit to unit.
Figure 1.15 Rack Transfer Flow
1. Rack input tray 6. Primary sample transport lane

2. Rack output tray 7. Bypass lane
3. Rack transfer component 8. Rack buffer component
4. Return lane 9. Priority rack input component
5. Lane changer
Rack Input to Rack Output Flow

Racks are loaded onto the rack input component and move to the rack transfer component.
Routine racks move on the primary sample transport lane to the sample aspiration
A98352AC 1-13
System Overview
Hardware Overview
position. When sample aspiration is complete, the rack moves to the next unit or the return
lane.
Emergency and repeat racks are moved to the bypass lane sample aspiration position. The
bypass lane sample aspiration position has priority over the primary sample transport lane
sample aspiration position. A rack moves to the bypass lane if it can bypass a unit because
no tests were ordered (requisitioned) on that unit. In this case, the lane changer moves it to
the primary sample transport lane for sample aspiration.
When sample aspiration is complete (all units) for the rack, the lane changer moves the
rack to the return lane.
Racks on the return lane are moved to the rack output component or the rack buffer
component. If Auto Repeat is enabled, racks move to the rack buffer component until
sample analysis is complete. Racks are then processed for repeat analysis, or move to the
rack output tray if there were no repeat orders (requisitions).
TIP
Racks can be transferred to other units if the ISE unit or an analyzer unit is in Stop mode
except for some mechanical errors on the rack transfer component.
Sample Transfer Component

The sample probes (S1 and S2) and liquid level detectors dispense sample or diluent, and
detect liquid level. Two sample probes (S1 and S2) are on each analyzer unit. The sample
probes have downward collision detection and clot detection. Sample is aspirated from the
tube or cup and dispensed into the inner cuvettes (S1 probe) or outer cuvettes (S2 probe).
The sample probe is rinsed with deionized water internally and externally in the sample
probe wash well between each sample dispense.
Figure 1.16 Sample Transfer Component
1. Sample transfer component (S2) 4. Sample probe wash well (S1)

2. Sample transfer component (S1) 5. Sample probe wash well (S2)
3. Sample probe (S1) 6. Sample probe (S2)
1-14 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Reagent Transfer Component

The reagent probes (R1-1, R1-2, R2-1, R2-2) and liquid level detectors dispense reagent or
diluent, and detect liquid level. Four reagent probes (R1-1, R1-2, R2-1, R2-2) are on each
analyzer unit. The reagent probes have downward collision detection. Reagent is aspirated
from the R1 and R2 refrigerators and dispensed into the inner cuvettes (R1-1 and R2-1
probes) or outer cuvettes (R1-2 and R2-2 probes). The probes are rinsed with deionized
water internally and externally in the reagent probe wash well between each reagent
dispense.
Figure 1.17 Reagent Transfer Component
1. Reagent transfer component (R2-2) 7. Reagent probe (R1-1)

2. Reagent transfer component (R2-1) 8. Reagent probe (R1-2)
3. Reagent probe (R2-2) 9. Reagent probe wash well (R2-2)
4. Reagent probe (R2-1) 10. Reagent probe wash well (R2-1)
5. Reagent transfer component (R1-1) 11. Reagent probe wash well (R1-1)
6. Reagent transfer component (R1-2) 12. Reagent probe wash well (R1-2)
Mix Bar Component

Mix bars are used to mix the reagent and sample in the cuvette. The R1/S mix bar
component contains 12 spiral-shaped mix bars identified by a blue top. A mix occurs after
R1 and sample dispense. The R2 mix bar component contains six L-shaped mix bars
identified by the yellow top. A third mix occurs after the R2 dispense. After mixing in the
cuvette, the mix bars are cleaned in diluted wash solution, then rinsed in deionized water in
the wash wells.
A98352AC 1-15
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.18 Mix Bar Component
1. R1/S mix bar component 2. R2 mix bar component
Cuvette Wheel Component

The incubator surrounds the cuvettes in the cuvette wheel component and the incubation
bath keeps the reaction temperature of the cuvettes at 37 °C. A cuvette is made from optical
glass with a light path of 5 mm.
• Minimum reaction volume: 80 μL.
• Maximum reaction volume: 287 μL.
Figure 1.19 Cuvette Wheel Component
1. Cuvette wheel component 3. Cuvette

2. Cuvette wedge
The cuvette wheel contains a total of 408 cuvettes, with 204 cuvettes each on the inner and
outer positions. The wheel is divided into 12 wedges. The wash nozzle component
automatically cleans the cuvettes. The weekly photocal maintenance procedure monitors
the cuvette integrity. From photocal results, clean and replace cuvettes as required.
1-16 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Cuvettes are continuously monitored in Measure mode by the real-time water blank check
method. The real-time water blank check method compares the water blank reading
obtained during analysis to the previous water blank reading. If the water blank reading
check fails the specification, the system generates a Photometry Error During
Cuvette Wash alarm. If the system detects a cuvette overflow or unstable photometry, the
system generates a Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash alarm. For more
information, refer to Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Alarm.
Photometry Component
The photometry component includes a halogen lamp, lenses, a diffraction grating, and a
photodetector to measure the amount of light transmitted through the reaction solution in
the cuvette. The diffraction grating splits the light into 13 wavelengths. Each analyzer unit
contains a photometry component.
Figure 1.20 Photometry Component
1. Photometer lamp
WARNING
Never touch the photometer lamp or look directly into the photometer lamp when
the lamp is illuminated. The lamp is hot when the system is on.
Wash Nozzle Component

The wash nozzle component cleans, rinses, and dries the cuvettes automatically. The wash
nozzle component includes six wash nozzles, one aspiration nozzle, and two dry nozzles for
the inner and outer cuvettes.
Each wash nozzle is a 3-way nozzle used to clean the cuvettes. The longest nozzle aspirates
liquid, the middle nozzle dispenses, and the shortest nozzle aspirates any overflow liquid.
A98352AC 1-17
System Overview
Hardware Overview
The aspiration nozzle aspirates any remaining liquid in the cuvette. The dry nozzle uses the
fluorocarbon polymer tip to bring any remaining moisture to the bottom of the cuvette,
then aspirates to dry the interior of the cuvette completely.
Figure 1.21 Wash Nozzle Component
1. Wash nozzle 3. Dry nozzle

2. Aspiration nozzle
The dispensing sequence of the wash nozzles, from left to right in the diagram:
• Nozzle 1 and 2 - Diluted wash solution
• Nozzle 3 to 6 - Warm deionized water
• Nozzle 7 - Aspiration
• Nozzle 8 and 9 - Drying
1-18 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.22 Wash Nozzle
1. Wash nozzle 5. Dry nozzle

2. Overflow nozzle 6. Drying tip
3. Liquid (wash solution and warm deionized 7. Aspiration nozzle
water) dispense nozzle
4. Liquid (reaction, wash solution, and warm
deionized water) aspirating nozzle
Reagent Refrigerator Component

The R1 refrigerator contains the first reagent (R1), and the R2 refrigerator contains the
second reagent (R2). Even when an End Process is performed, the temperature of the
refrigerators is maintained between 4°C (39.2 °F) and 12°C (53.6 °F).
Place the reagent bottle on the corresponding tray (R1 or R2) in the R1 refrigerator or R2
refrigerator.
Both R1 and R2 refrigerators have 54 positions. Each refrigerator uses applicable adapters
or partitions for various sizes of reagent bottles: 15 mL, 30 mL, 60 mL, and 180 mL.
Each bottle position can be designated as reagent ID (bar code labeled) or fixed (not bar
code labeled). During a reagent check, reagent bottles are detected, reagent IDs are read,
and reagent volume is calculated.
A98352AC 1-19
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.23 Refrigerators
1. R2 refrigerator 2. R1 refrigerator
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the reagent bottles are placed in the refrigerator with the reagent ID
facing outwards. Confirm that all reagent bottle caps are removed before placing them
in the refrigerator.
Syringe Component
Each analyzer unit has:
• Two sample syringes (S1 and S2)
• Four reagent syringes (R1-1, R1-2, R2-1, and R2-2)
• Two wash syringes (W1 and W2)
Sample and reagent syringes dispense the required volume of sample or reagent.
Wash syringes dispense deionized water for the internal sample probe wash.
On the front of each analyzer unit, behind the front door, are four reagent syringes. Two
syringes dispense reagent to the inner cuvettes (R1-1 and R2-1), and two syringes dispense
reagent to the outer cuvettes (R1-2 and R2-2).
The reagent syringes are in the following order from left to right:
• R2-2 (outer)
• R2-1 (inner)
• R1-1 (inner)
• R1-2 (outer)
1-20 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.24 Reagent Syringe Location
1. Front of the analyzer unit 4. R1-1 (inner)

2. R2-2 (outer) 5. R1-2 (outer)
3. R2-1 (inner)
On the back of each analyzer unit, behind the rear door, are two wash syringes and two
sample syringes. Sample syringe S1 dispenses sample to the inner cuvettes, and wash
syringe W1 rinses the interior of sample probe S1. Sample syringe S2 dispenses sample to
the outer cuvettes, and wash syringe W2 rinses the interior of sample probe S2.
The syringes are in the following order from left to right:

• Wash syringe W2 (outer)
• Wash syringe W1 (inner)
• Sample syringe S2 (outer)
• Sample syringe S1 (inner)
A98352AC 1-21
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.25 Wash and Sample Syringe Location
1. Back of the analyzer unit 4. Sample syringe S2 (outer)

2. Wash syringe W2 (outer) 5. Sample syringe S1 (inner)
3. Wash syringe W1 (inner)
Tank Storage (Rack Feeder Unit)

The rack feeder unit contains the master wash solution tank that supplies wash solution to
the wash solution tank located on each analyzer unit.
Figure 1.26 Master Wash Solution Tank
Master Wash Solution Tank

The master wash solution tank has a capacity of 20 liters. The master wash solution tank
supplies the wash solution to the wash solution tank located on each analyzer unit.
1-22 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Tank Storage (Analyzer Unit)

The system has a deionized water tank, a wash solution tank, and a diluted wash solution
tank on each analyzer unit.
The system uses diluted wash solution (1%) to clean the cuvettes and mix bars. The system
uses deionized water to dilute the wash solution, rinse analyzer components, and make
dilutions.
Figure 1.27 Tank Location on Analyzer Unit
1. Diluted wash solution tank 3. Deionized water tank

2. Wash solution tank
Diluted Wash Solution Tank
The diluted wash solution tank has a capacity of 5 liters. A float sensor indicates when the
volume in the tank is low. The tank automatically fills with wash solution and deionized
water to make the diluted wash solution (1%).
Wash Solution Tank
The wash solution tank has a capacity of 5 liters. A float sensor indicates when the volume
in the tank is low and opens a valve to fill the tank automatically from the master wash
solution tank located on the rack feeder unit.
Deionized Water Tank
The deionized water tank has a capacity of 10 liters. A float sensor indicates when the
volume in the tank is low and opens a valve to fill it automatically. For more information on
specifications, refer to Water Supply.
ISE Unit (Optional)

Diluted sample passes through the Na, K, and Cl ion selective electrodes to determine the
concentration by comparing the electrical potential difference to the REF electrode.
A98352AC 1-23
System Overview
Hardware Overview
The system has one or two sets of electrodes. The sets of electrodes are identified as Cell 1
and Cell 2 when a system has two sets of electrodes.
Figure 1.28 ISE Unit
1. Cell 1 9. Pinch valve

2. Cell 2 10. MID Standard roller pump for Cell 1
3. Mixing component 11. MID Standard roller pump tubing for Cell
4. Sample pot 1
5. Cl electrode 12. MID Standard roller pump for Cell 2
6. Na electrode 13. MID Standard roller pump tubing for Cell
7. K electrode 2
8. REF electrode 14. Mixture aspiration roller pump for Cell 1
1-24 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
15. Mixture aspiration roller pump tubing for 18. Inside ISE compartment with Cell 1 and
Cell 1 Cell 2
16. Mixture aspiration roller pump for Cell 2
17. Mixture aspiration roller pump tubing for
Cell 2
• Mixing component - The mixing component mixes sample and ISE Buffer Solution
dispensed into the sample pot. It has two liquid-level sensors to detect correct
drainage.
• Sample pot - Sample and ISE Buffer Solution are dispensed into the sample pot and
mixed. The volumes dispensed for serum and urine:
— ISE Buffer Solution: 618 µL (fixed)
— Sample: 20 µL (fixed)
— Deionized water: 10 µL (fixed)
• Cl electrode, Na electrode, and K electrode - These electrodes are used for measuring
the potential of Cl, Na, and K ions in the sample and ISE MID Standard Solution. The
concentrations of individual ions in the sample can be calculated from the potential
differences between each ion in the sample and in the ISE MID Standard Solution.
• REF electrode - This electrode is the reference electrode for the Cl, Na, and K
electrodes.
• Pinch valve - The pinch valve has two functions:
— Allows sample in the sample pot to enter the flowcell for measurement.
— Allows excess sample to pass through the bypass tubing to waste.
• Roller pump
There are two roller pumps for Cell 1 and Cell 2:
— Mixture Aspiration Roller Pump (inside the ISE compartment):
— Aspirates liquid from the sample pot through the flowcell or bypass tubing
and out to waste.
— Aspirates ISE Reference Solution from the ISE Reference Solution bottle past
the REF electrode and out to waste.
— MID Standard Roller Pump (behind the ISE reagent bottles):
— Aspirates ISE MID Standard Solution from the ISE MID Standard Solution
bottle to the sample pot.
• Roller pump tubing - The roller pump tubing is made of rubber and wraps around the
roller pump. As the roller pump rotates, the rollers on the pump squeeze the tubing,
and solution is supplied or removed.
ISE Reagent Bottles
The ISE has an ISE Buffer Solution bottle, ISE MID Standard Solution bottle, and ISE
Reference Solution bottle for each ISE Cell.
A98352AC 1-25
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.29 ISE Reagent Bottles
1. ISE MID Standard Solution bottle (for Cell 4. ISE Buffer Solution bottle (for Cell 2)
1) 5. ISE Reference Solution bottle (for Cell 1)
2. ISE Buffer Solution bottle (for Cell 1) 6. ISE Reference Solution bottle (for Cell 2)
3. ISE MID Standard Solution bottle (for Cell
2)
• ISE Buffer Solution bottle - This bottle stores the ISE Buffer Solution. The system uses
the ISE Buffer Solution for diluting the sample. The capacity of this container is 2 liters.
• ISE MID Standard Solution bottle - This bottle stores the ISE MID Standard Solution.
The system uses the ISE MID Standard Solution to condition the electrodes between
analysis. The capacity of this container is 2 liters.
• ISE Reference Solution bottle - This bottle stores the ISE Reference Solution. The
system uses the ISE Reference Solution as a reference point relative to the three
electrodes. The capacity of this container is 1 liter.
ISE Sample Dispensing Component
There is one sample probe and one wash well for washing the sample probe. Serum or
urine is aspirated by the sample probe and dispensed into the sample pot. The probe is
rinsed inside and out between each sample aspiration.
ISE Syringe Component
There is one sample syringe for dispensing serum or urine, one wash syringe for rinsing the
inside of the ISE sample probe when it is over the wash well between samples, and one
buffer syringe for dispensing buffer.
1-26 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Data Processing Module (DPR)
Figure 1.30 Data Processing Module (DPR)
1. Keyboard 3. Mouse
2. Monitor 4. Computer (behind door)
Monitor
The monitor displays the operating software, and the keyboard and mouse allow operator
input.
Computer
The system uses a personal computer as the data processing component to perform data
processing. The computer includes a hard disk to store programs, analysis parameters, an
analysis database, USB drives, and a DVD R/W component. An external hard disk option is
also available.
Printer (Optional)
You can output results in operator-defined reports or lists.
Hand Scanner (Optional)
The hand scanner reads bar code labels for input to the software. You can scan a sample ID
in the Sample ID field in Home > Rack Requisition.
Tests programmed with the Master Curve option require a 2-dimensional bar code label
that contains calibration information. Use the hand scanner to scan manually the 2-
dimensional bar code label located on the R1 bottle label of corresponding AU reagents.
A98352AC 1-27
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Table 1.6 Hand Scanner Specifications

Item Specification
Wavelength 630 to 680 nm
Output 1.0 mW
Class 2
Touch Screen, Mouse, and Keyboard

You can operate the system in any combination of the touch screen, mouse, or keyboard.
Figure 1.31 Operation Keys on the Keyboard
1. ESC key 9. Num Lock lamp

2. Function keys 10. Num Lock key
3. Start key 11. Stop or Stand-by key
4. Pause key 12. Home key
5. Feeder Stop key 13. End Process key
6. Print Screen key 14. Numeric key pad
7. Menu List key 15. ↑, ↓, ←, → Key
8. Alarm Clear key
1-28 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Software Overview
Organization of Operation Screen

The interface contains three areas, a main button bar, menu area, and alarm area.
Figure 1.32 Home Screen
1. Main button area - The display area for the main buttons (Home, Menu List, and User
Menu), Help, and operation area (Start, Pause, Feeder Stop, Stop, and End).
2. Menu area - The display and operation area for the selected menu or button.
3. Alarm area - The display area for the alarm messages generated during system
operation, and the Alarm Clear and Alarm List buttons.
Main Button Area

Table 1.7 Main Button Area
Button Name Description
Home The system displays the Home screen.
Menu List The system displays the Menu List screen.
A98352AC 1-29
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.7 Main Button Area (Continued)

Button Name Description
User The system displays the User Menu screen. For more information,
Menu refer to Program a User Menu.
Mode The system displays the current mode. The system displays the time
Display to completion for some maintenance procedures.
area
Start Starts analysis.
Pause Pauses analysis. The system pauses at the first test for which no R1
reagent was dispensed.
Feeder Stops the rack input component. The analysis of samples in racks that
Stop are loaded continues.
Stop/ Stops analysis. In Stop mode, select this button to return the system
Standby to Standby mode.
Help The system displays a menu for accessing the operator

documentation and maintenance video directory.
Logout Logs out and logs in an operator.
End Shuts down the system (End Process). Shutting down the system turns
off the auxiliary power supply, including the lamp and computer.
Time The system displays the current date and time.

Display
area
Using the System Help and Alarm List

To have the system display a menu for accessing the operator documentation and
maintenance video directory, select Help.
1-30 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Figure 1.33 Help, Alarm Clear, and Alarm List Buttons
1. Help 3. Alarm List

2. Alarm Clear
NOTE
Select Alarm Clear to stop the audible alarm. Select Alarm Clear a second time to clear
the alarm message from the screen.
Table 1.8 Types of Help

Option Description
Help Button The system displays the PDF version of the operator documentation and the
maintenance video directory.
Alarm List Button The system displays the Alarm List dialog. To display the alarm description and
the corrective actions, select an alarm to display, and then select Help on the
Alarm List dialog. The system displays an Alarm Help dialog.
NOTE
The alarm help information is only available in the Alarm List.

The AU5800 Instructions for Use and AU5800 Reference
Manual do not contain alarm descriptions and corrective
actions.
A98352AC 1-31
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.8 Types of Help (Continued)

Option Description
Input Help The system displays the allowable input information for text fields. Move the
cursor over the input area for the system to display the Input Help.
Button Help The system displays the name of the buttons. Move the cursor over the button
for the system to display the name of the button.
Home Outline
Use the Home screen to view system messages regarding sample status and analyzer
status. Shortcut buttons provide direct menu access to the most frequently used menus to
simplify software access.
Figure 1.34 Home Screen
1. Menu buttons 3. Shortcut buttons

2. Message area
Menu Buttons
Table 1.9 Menu Buttons
Button Description
Sample Status The system displays the sample status under analysis, estimated time of
completion, and results.
Analyzer Status The system displays the analyzer status and temperatures.
1-32 A98352AC
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Message Area
In the message area, the system displays messages regarding system conditions that can
affect analysis results. Colors indicate the level of the message.
Table 1.10 Message Area
Color Definition
Red You cannot start analysis on the unit until you address the message.
NOTE
A red message or highlight on the analyzer unit picture indicates

a condition that prevents you from starting any unit highlighted
in red.
Orange You can start analysis. Review the message carefully and take the corrective
action.
Yellow You can start analysis. Review the message carefully and take the corrective
action. The message can shift from yellow to orange status (more critical).
Green A notification of system status. The system has no operational problems.
If a message is selected, the system displays a dialog with information and the corrective
actions for the message. Select OK to close the dialog.
Shortcut Buttons
Shortcut buttons provide direct menu access to the most frequently used menus to simplify
software access.
Table 1.11 Shortcut Buttons
Button Description
Start Condition Sets a new data index, the group of tests in use, the operator name, and
start sample numbers.
Reagent Management The system displays the R1 and R2 reagent status and cleaning solution
status.
Analyzer Maintenance The system displays the analyzer and ISE maintenance schedules. Use this
menu to start some maintenance procedures and update the schedule
when you perform maintenance.
Rack Requisition The system displays sample information and test orders (requisitions) for
patient samples, calibration, and QC.
Sample Manager Views, prints, and batch transfers reagent blank, calibration, QC, and
sample data to the laboratory information system.
Analyzer Modes
The system displays the modes in the Mode Display Area.
A98352AC 1-33
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.12 Analyzer Modes

Mode Contents
Initial The system displays Initial after you press ON. The software loads and the hardware
initializes.
Warm up After the system initializes, the system changes the mode to Warm up for
approximately 20 minutes to allow the lamp to warm up and stabilize.
Standby When the system is ready to perform sample analysis, the operation mode changes
to Standby. You can start analysis.
Measure 1 Measure 1 mode occurs when you select Start. Racks are on the rack input
component, and the racks move to the sample aspiration position.
Measure 2 Measure 2 mode occurs when there are no more racks on the rack input
component. To start more racks, select Start.
Stop Stop mode occurs when there is a system error, or when the operator selects Stop/
Standby. You cannot start the analyzer from Stop mode. To return to Standby
mode, select Stop/Standby. The mode displays as Reset while the hardware is
initializing, then it goes to Standby. Repeat all tests that are in progress.
Pause Pause mode occurs when there is a system error or when the operator selects
Pause. You can restart analysis from Pause mode by selecting Start. The system
completes all tests that are in progress.
Processing Time
The analysis processing time is the time from aspiration of a sample by the sample probe
until the end of measurement. The necessary time for analysis is approximately 8 minutes
and 40 seconds.
CAUTION
If you perform a stop or emergency stop or a power loss occurs, sample can remain in
the sample probe, and reagents can remain in the cuvettes. Perform a W1 to clean
the sample probe and cuvettes after you restart the system. For more information,
refer to Perform a W1.
1-34 A98352AC
CHAPTER 2
Daily Startup
Introduction
These procedures confirm that your system has adequate supplies and calibrated reagent
for your patient run, and include maintenance steps and quality control procedures for
continued optimal performance.
Startup Procedure
1 Turn on the System.

2 Set a New Index.
3 Perform Analyzer Daily Maintenance.
4 Inspect the Analyzer Status.
5 Perform the ISE Startup (Option).
6 Monitor the Reagent Status.
7 Calibrate Tests.
8 Process Quality Control (QC).
Turn on the System

If the system is on, proceed to Set a New Index.
1 Press the green ON button on the front of the rack feeder unit.
The computer loads the software and initializes the system. The system goes to Warm
up mode for approximately 20 minutes, and then goes to Standby.
If the system was shut down without an End Process command, the system displays the
System Start dialog. Select OK.
If your laboratory requires an operator to login, the system displays the Login dialog.
A98352AC 2-1
Daily Startup
Set a New Index
Figure 2.1 Login Dialog
2 Enter the user name and password, and select OK.

The system displays the New Index dialog.
Figure 2.2 New Index Dialog
3 Select New Index, and then select the Group of Tests for processing. Select OK to close
the dialog.
Set a New Index
NOTE
If you set a new index in step 3 of Turn on the System, proceed to Perform Analyzer
Daily Maintenance.
If your system is on, use this procedure to create a new index, select a group of tests for
processing, and enter the operator name.
An index, used to retrieve reagent blank, calibration, QC, and patient results, is a data file
identified by the date and time. Create a new index daily, each shift, or as needed.
A maximum of 100,000 samples or 300 indexes can be saved on the hard drive. A maximum
of 9,999 samples can be processed in an index.
2-2 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Set a New Index
1 Select Home > Start Condition.

The system displays the Start Condition screen.
Figure 2.3 Start Condition Screen
2 Select Edit (F1).
3 Select New Index. The system displays the current date and time in the Index field.
NOTE
To set a new index by date and time:
1. Select Date Index (F8). The system displays the Date Index dialog.
Figure 2.4 Date Index Dialog
2. In Index, select the date and time.

3. Select OK.
4 In Group of Tests, select the group of tests for processing.
5 (Optional) Enter the operator name in Operator Name.
6 Confirm that the Start Sample No. is 0001, or the default start number for each sample
type and kind.
A98352AC 2-3
Daily Startup
Perform Analyzer Daily Maintenance
7 Select Confirm (F1).

The system displays the Start Condition dialog, with a confirmation message.
8 Select OK to confirm the selections.

Perform Analyzer Daily Maintenance to maintain system performance and safety.
WARNING
Maintenance procedures can expose you to biohazards. Wear appropriate Personal

Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats. Handle and
dispose of biohazards according to laboratory procedures.
1 Inspect the Syringes for Leaks.

2 Inspect the Stability of the Upper Cover.
3 Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars.
4 Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottles.
5 Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions.
6 Inspect the Printer and Paper.
7 Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in the Open Position.
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks

Each analyzer unit includes sample syringes, reagent syringes, and wash syringes. If your
system includes an ISE unit, the ISE unit includes a sample syringe, a wash syringe, and ISE
buffer syringes.
• Two sample syringes and two wash syringes are located on the back of each analyzer
unit behind the left door.
• The ISE sample syringe and wash syringe are located on the front of the ISE unit
behind the door.
• The ISE buffer syringes are located on the front of the ISE unit behind the ISE reagents.
The sample and reagent syringes measure the volume of sample or reagent to be used in a
reaction.
The wash syringes dispense only deionized water for cleaning the interior of the sample
probe.
The two types of wash syringes:
2-4 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
• Wash Syringe Type 1

Use either a Wash Syringe Type 1 or Wash Syringe Type 2 for the analyzer unit. For the ISE
unit, only use Wash Syringe Type 1. To view the shape of each type of syringe, refer to
Figure 2.8 Sample Syringe, Wash Syringe Type 1, Reagent Syringe, ISE Sample Syringe, ISE
Wash Syringe Type 1, and ISE Buffer Syringe Parts and Figure 2.9 Wash Syringe Type 2
Parts.
The ISE buffer syringe measures the correct volume of buffer for the ISE.
If a syringe leaks, the leak causes possible failures to the syringe, probe, and analytes being
tested.
Although the syringes are different sizes and serve different functions, you can inspect for
correct performance using the same methods.
Inspect all components of the syringes, including the syringe case head, the syringe case
body, the fixing nut, and the piston fixing screw for leaks and correct installation.
For more information on materials required, refer to Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance.
Materials Required:
• Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue
The procedure is identical for all syringes.
1 Confirm that the system is in Warm up, Standby, or Stop mode.

2 Open the front left door to access the reagent syringes and rear left door to access the
sample and wash syringes on the analyzer units. Open the top ISE reagent cover to
access the buffer syringes, or the front door of the ISE unit to access the ISE sample and
wash syringes.
CAUTION
Do not allow a strong alkali, such as the wash solution, to contact the syringe
case. If a strong alkali contacts the syringe case, cracks can occur.
If a strong alkali contacts the syringe case, remove the syringe case and rinse it
with water.
3 Visually inspect each syringe case head for any cracks or leaks. Use the clean, dry, lint-
free absorbent tissue to confirm that the top and bottom connections for the syringe
case head and the bottom fixing screw have no leaks. If you find a crack or a leak,
replace the syringe. For more information, refer to Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE
Sample, or ISE Buffer Syringe.
A98352AC 2-5
Daily Startup
1. Reagent syringe 3. Inner

2. Outer
Figure 2.6 Sample Syringe and Wash Syringe Locations
1. Wash syringes 4. Inner

2. Sample syringes 5. Rear of analyzer
3. Outer
2-6 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.7 ISE Syringe Location
1. ISE Buffer syringes 3. ISE Sample syringe

2. ISE Wash syringe 4. Front of ISE unit
A98352AC 2-7
Daily Startup
Wash Syringe Type 1, and ISE Buffer Syringe Parts
1. Fixing nut 4. Case body (Syringe case)

2. Case head (Syringe case) 5. Piston fixing screw
3. Fixing screws 6. Possible leakage locations
Figure 2.9 Wash Syringe Type 2 Parts
1. Piston 3. Wash syringe

2. Seal assembly 4. Possible leakage locations
4 Confirm that the fixing nuts and piston fixing screws are tight. If a leak persists after
you tighten the screws, replace the syringe.
2-8 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
CAUTION
If your skin, eyes, or mouth contact any liquid, immediately rinse the affected
area with water. Follow your laboratory procedure.
5 Close all doors and covers in the Analyzer unit and ISE unit.
6 Update the Maintenance Log. For more information, refer to Update the Maintenance
Log.
Inspect the Stability of the Upper Cover
Lift the upper cover of each analyzer unit and confirm that it is stable and remains in
the raised position. If the cover starts to descend, contact Beckman Coulter to have the
cover supports inspected and replaced.
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars
The probes deliver precise quantities of reagent or sample to the cuvettes.
The mix bars mix the contents in the cuvettes.
If the mix bars or probes are bent or damaged, or if the probes are clogged, you cannot
achieve correct analysis.
Before you begin analysis, inspect the sample probes, reagent probes, and mix bars for
damage or deterioration. Confirm that each probe operates correctly.
Materials Required:
• Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl alcohol)
A98352AC 2-9
Daily Startup
Inspect the Sample Probes and Reagent Probes
Figure 2.10 Sample Probes and Reagent Probes
1. Reagent probe 3. Probe wash position

2. Sample probe
1 Lift the upper covers of each analyzer unit.

2 Visually inspect that each probe is not bent or damaged. If a probe is bent or damaged,
replace the probe. For more information, refer to Replace a Sample Probe, or Replace a
Reagent Probe.
3 Inspect each probe for contaminants or crystallization. If a probe is dirty, wipe the
surface with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
IMPORTANT
Do not bend the probe when cleaning.
4 If a probe is incorrectly aligned, contact Beckman Coulter.
2-10 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Inspect the Mix bars
Figure 2.11 Mix bar wash wells
1. Mix bar wash wells 3. Mix bar component (R2)

2. Mix bar component (R1, S)
1 Inspect each mix bar. If a mix bar is bent, scratched, or has chips in the fluororesin
coating, replace the mix bar. For more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
2 Inspect each mix bar for contaminants or crystallization. If the mix bar is dirty, wipe the
mix bar with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
Confirm Operation of the Probes and Mix Bars

Prime the system to inspect the operation of the probes and mix bars.
1 Confirm that the system is in Warm up or Standby mode.

2 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the Analyzer
Maintenance: Maintenance tab.
A98352AC 2-11
Daily Startup
Figure 2.12 Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance tab
1. Analyzer Maintenance 2. Inspect Probe and Mixing Bar
3 Select the Analyzer Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
4 Select Inspect Probe & Mixing Bar. The system displays the Inspect Probe & Mixing Bar
dialog.
5 Select OK.
6 Press the DIAG button.

The system initializes the probes and mix bar components, then:
1. Dispenses deionized water from the two sample probes.

2. Dispenses deionized water from the R1 and R2 probes for inner cuvettes.
3. Dispenses deionized water from the R1 and R2 probes for outer cuvettes.
4. Activates the mix bar components.
7 As the system dispenses water, confirm that each probe dispenses a thin, straight
stream of water, and that water flows in the wash wells.
2-12 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.13 Sample and Reagent Probes
1. Correct Flow 2. Incorrect Flow

a. If the water is spraying or dispensing at an angle, clean the probe. For more
information, refer to Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars or Clean the R1 or R2
Reagent Probes.
b. If cleaning does not correct the problem, replace the probe. For more information,
refer to Replace a Sample Probe, or Replace a Reagent Probe.
8 As the system activates the mix bar component, confirm that the mix bars align
correctly in the wash wells. If a mix bar does not align correctly, contact Beckman
Coulter.
9 Repeat steps 6 to 8 as required to inspect all probes and mix bars.

10 Clear the Analyzer Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
Log.
Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottles
1 Discard the water or diluent in the pre-dilution bottles, indicated by the 55. Diluent/W2
and 56. Diluent/W2 label close to the R1 refrigerator on each analyzer unit.
2 Rinse the bottles twice with deionized water.

3 Fill the bottles with deionized water or diluent and replace the bottles on the analyzer
unit.
Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions

The sample probe wash solution bottles are located in the positions labeled 61. DET-1/W2,
62. DET-2, 63. DET-1/W2 and 64. DET-2 on each analyzer unit, and DET-1/W1 and DET-2
on the ISE unit.
A98352AC 2-13
Daily Startup
Materials Required:
• 2% Wash solution
• Sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%)
• 60 mL reagent bottles (4 for each analyzer unit and 2 for the ISE unit)
Figure 2.14 Location of Sample Probe Wash Solution for Analyzer Unit
1. Sample probe wash solution set position
Figure 2.15 Location of ISE sample Probe Wash Solution
1. ISE sample probe wash solution set

position
2-14 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
NOTE
Sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) is only required for laboratories using the AU5800
with high sample volume or dialysis patients.
If you have a normal volume of samples that are not highly viscous, fill the bottles with
approximately 50 mL, as follows:
• Position 61. DET-1/W2: 2% wash solution
• Position 62. DET-2: 2% wash solution
• (ISE) Position DET-1/W2: 2% wash solution
• (ISE) Position DET-2: 2% wash solution
If you have a high volume of samples or use the analyzer for dialysis patient samples, fill
the bottles with approximately 50 mL, as follows:
• Position 62. DET-2: sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%)
• (ISE) Position DET-2: sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%)
For more information, refer to Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions.
WARNING
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats,
to handle the solution. If the solution contacts skin or clothes, rinse the affected area
thoroughly with water. If the solution contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush
with water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more
information. Follow your laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
CAUTION
When using sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) as a sample probe wash solution,
follow these precautions:
• Prepare fresh sodium hypochlorite solution and completely replace the solution in the
bottle once a day.
• If you anticipate not using the analyzer for two days or longer, remove the solution from
the system and discard the solution to prevent analyzer corrosion.
• any solution spills on the analyzer, clean the area with an absorbent tissue, and wipe it
If
dry with a clean absorbent tissue.
A98352AC 2-15
Daily Startup
• Do not mix the solution with other chemicals. If the solution becomes contaminated,
follow your laboratory procedure to dispose of the solution.
NOTE
Follow your laboratory procedure for replacing the 2% wash solution in the bottles.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing the 2% wash solution daily.
1 Remove each wash solution bottle and inspect the level of solution.
2 As required, fill each bottle to approximately 50 mL of the solution used in your
laboratory.
3 Replace the bottle on the analyzer.

4 Close all analyzer doors and covers.
Inspect the Printer and Paper

The printer is an optional part. Before you begin daily analysis, confirm that the printer is
turned on and that there is enough paper in the printer.
For more information, refer to the manual supplied with the printer.
1 Confirm that the printer is on. The printer displays a ready message.
2 Confirm that there is enough paper in the printer.
Log.
Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in the Open Position
To be sure that the cuvettes and mix bars are cleaned correctly during analysis, inspect the
handle on the diluted wash solution tank is in the OPEN position.
1 Open the right front door of each analyzer unit.

2 Confirm that the handle of each diluted wash solution tank is in the OPEN position.
Turn the handle to the OPEN position if the handle is in the CLOSE position.
2-16 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Inspect the Analyzer Status
Figure 2.16 Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank in the Analyzer Unit
1. Diluted Wash Solution Tank 2. Handle: OPEN position
3 Close all the analyzer doors and covers.

The Analyzer Status screen displays a color-coded overview of the system. The system
monitors the status of the incubator, reagent refrigerators, rack feeder unit, deionized
water tanks, wash solution tanks, waste tanks, printer, and LIS communication.
The system monitors the ISE unit and reagents when the ISE unit is installed.
The colors of the system components indicate the status.
NOTE
For more information on the Analyzer Status screen when the AU5800 is connected to
a laboratory automation system, refer to the AU5800 Laboratory Automation
Table 2.1 System Status

Color Status
Blue No errors
A98352AC 2-17
Daily Startup
Table 2.1 System Status (Continued)

Color Status
Yellow or Orange Non-fatal error. You can start the ISE or analyzer
unit.
Red Fatal error. You cannot start the ISE or analyzer
unit.
1 Select Home > Analyzer Status.

The system displays the Analyzer Status screen.
Figure 2.17 Analyzer Status Screen
1. Lane status 4. ISE unit status

2. Analyzer unit top status 5. Rack feeder unit status
3. Analyzer unit front status
NOTE
The screen display changes with the number of connected analyzer units. The ISE
unit does not display if the ISE unit is not connected.
2 Select Rack Data (F1) to view the time a rack was detected on the rack input component
(Pre-Analysis), the time the rack moved to the rack output component (Post-Analysis),
the rack ID, and the rack entry location. Select a rack in the left table to view the sample
No. or sample ID of the samples on the rack in the right table.
2-18 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Perform the ISE Startup (Option)
NOTE
The system indicates a rack that includes a repeat run sample with an asterisk. If
you select Required a Repeat Run, the system displays only racks with an asterisk.
Figure 2.18 Rack Data Dialog
3 Confirm that the system components are within the acceptable limits (blue).
Investigate any yellow or red conditions.
1. Lane Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more information, refer
to Lane Status.
2. Analyzer Unit Top Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Analyzer Unit Front Status.
3. Analyzer Unit Front Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
4. ISE Unit Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more information,
refer to ISE Unit Status.
5. Rack Feeder Unit Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Rack Feeder Unit Status.

If your system includes an ISE unit, confirm that sufficient ISE reagent is available and
perform the ISE Daily Maintenance.
1 Inspect the ISE Reagents.

2 Replace the ISE Reagents.
3 Perform ISE Daily Maintenance.
a. Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option).
A98352AC 2-19
Daily Startup
b. Clean the ISE (ISE Option).

c. Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option).
Inspect the ISE Reagents
WARNING
If the ISE Buffer Solution, ISE MID Standard Solution, or ISE Reference Solution
becomes empty during ISE sample analysis, the system can generate incorrect results.
If a reagent becomes empty during Measure, it is necessary to stop the ISE unit. Place
the new reagent bottle on the ISE unit, prime the new reagent, and calibrate the ISE
for all the sample types in use.
NOTE
Confirm that the ISE reagent solution levels are sufficient for typical daily analysis
before you start the sample processing.
Do not replace the ISE reagent bottles when the ISE unit is in Measure status.
1 Open the front door of the ISE unit.

2 Confirm that the ISE reagents are within the 90-day onboard stability limit.
Figure 2.19 ISE Reagents
1. ISE MID Standard solution bottle 4. ISE Buffer solution bottle (for Cell 2)
(for Cell 1) 5. ISE Reference solution bottle (for
2. ISE Buffer solution bottle (for Cell 1) Cell 1)
3. ISE MID Standard solution bottle 6. ISE Reference solution bottle (for
(for Cell 2) Cell 2)
3 Confirm that the solution level is sufficient for typical daily analysis, or is above the ISE
Reagent Short notification level (5.2 cm above the bottom of the bottle).
2-20 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
NOTE
The number of samples the system can run after the alarm occurs for each reagent:
— ISE Buffer Solution - 240 samples
— ISE MID Standard Solution - 180 samples
— ISE Reference Solution - 600 samples
4 Replace reagents as required. For more information, refer to Replace the ISE Reagents.
5 Close all doors and covers of the ISE unit.
Replace the ISE Reagents

Replace the ISE reagents when the on-board stability expires, the reagent expires, or the
quantity of reagent is insufficient. The system displays an alarm message when an ISE
reagent reaches the ISE Reagent Short notification level (5.2 cm above the bottom of the
bottle). Replace the reagent before the bottle empties.
NOTE
These are the number of samples the system can run after the alarm occurs for each
reagent:
• ISE Buffer Solution - 240 samples
• ISE MID Standard Solution - 180 samples
• ISE Reference Solution - 600 samples
For on-board stability claims for the ISE, refer to the Chemistry Information Sheet.
NOTE
ISE Reference Solution is highly concentrated. Prevent contact between the ISE
Reference Solution (bottle, cap, and aspiration tube) with the ISE Buffer Solution and
ISE MID Standard Solution (bottle, cap, and aspiration tube).
NOTE
Do not add new reagent to existing bottles. Adding new reagent to existing bottles can
affect results.
Materials Required:
• ISE Buffer Solution
• ISE MID Standard Solution
• ISE Reference Solution
A98352AC 2-21
Daily Startup

2 Lift the ISE reagent cover to replace the ISE Buffer solution or ISE MID Standard
solution, or open the front door of the ISE unit to replace the ISE Reference solution.
1. ISE MID Standard Solution 3. ISE Reference Solution

2. ISE Buffer Solution
3 Place the new bottle of reagent next to the ISE unit and remove the cap.
4 Pull out the reagent bottle to replace it.
5 Loosen the cap of the reagent bottle and remove the aspiration tube.
NOTE
Do not touch the aspiration tube.
Dispose of the old solution according to your laboratory procedure.
6 Place the aspiration tube in the new bottle and tighten the cap.
7 Place the new bottle on the ISE unit and push the bottle into position.
2-22 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
8 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system
displays the ISE Maintenance: Maintenance tab.
9 Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
10 Select one of the following options. If all reagents are being replaced simultaneously,
replace the reagents in the following order:
1. To replace ISE Buffer Solution, select Buffer Prime

2. To replace ISE MID Standard Solution, select MID/REF Prime
3. To replace ISE Reference Solution, select MID/REF Prime
The system displays the dialog.
11 Select OK.
12 Press the DIAG button once. The system moves the ISE sample probe away.
13 Press the DIAG button again. The system primes the reagent for approximately 90
seconds.

15 Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
Log.
17 To confirm that the ISE is working correctly after the maintenance procedure, perform
a calibration.
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option)
The ISE sample probe is responsible for delivering precise quantities of sample to the ISE
sample pot.
You cannot achieve a correct analysis, if the probe is clogged, bent, or otherwise damaged.
Before you begin analysis, inspect the ISE sample probe for damage or deterioration and
confirm correct operation.
For more information on materials required, refer to Parts List for ISE Maintenance.
Inspect the Sample Probe for Damage or Deterioration
Materials Required:
1 Visually inspect that the probe is not bent or damaged. If the probe is bent or damaged,
replace the probe. Refer to Replace a Sample Probe.
A98352AC 2-23
Daily Startup
2 Confirm that the probe is free of debris. If any contaminants or crystallization adhere to
the probe, wipe the outside surface with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl Alcohol).
CAUTION
Confirm that the ISE sample probe is not bent during cleaning.
3 If there is a problem with the alignment of the probe, contact Beckman Coulter.
Figure 2.21 ISE Sample Probe
1. ISE sample probe wash well
Confirm Correct Operation of the ISE Sample Probe
1 Confirm that the analyzer is in Warm up or Standby mode.

buttons.
4 Select Replace Sample Probe. The system displays the Replace Sample Probe dialog.
5 For Times, enter 3, and then select OK.
6 Lift the back upper cover of the ISE unit.

7 Press the DIAG button. Deionized water is dispensed from the probe tip. Confirm that
the probe dispenses a thin, straight stream of water, and that water flows in the wash
well.
— If the water is spraying or dispensing at an angle, clean the probe. For more
information, refer to Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option).
— If cleaning does not correct the problem, replace the probe. For more information,
refer to Replace a Sample Probe.
2-24 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.22 Flow of DI water from the ISE Sample Probe Tip
1. Correct flow 2. Incorrect flow
Clean the ISE (ISE Option)

Clean the sample pot and the electrode lines daily to prevent contamination and inaccurate
results. This procedure requires approximately 6 minutes to complete.
WARNING
to handle ISE Cleaning Solution. If the ISE Cleaning Solution contacts skin or clothes,
rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the ISE Cleaning Solution contacts
the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with water. Seek medical attention. Refer to
the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more information. Follow your laboratory procedure
to wipe up spills immediately.
NOTE
If the analyzer does not run continuously, clean the ISE as part of the daily shutdown.
NOTE
The system defaults to clean Cell 1 and Cell 2. Always perform the cleaning procedure
on Cell 1 and Cell 2 unless performing corrective actions on Cell 1 or Cell 2.
Materials Required:
• ISE Cleaning Solution
• Hitachi Cup

2 Lift the front upper cover of the ISE unit.
A98352AC 2-25
Daily Startup
3 Fill the Hitachi cup with a minimum of 1 mL of ISE Cleaning Solution.

4 Place the Hitachi cup in the CLEAN position on the ISE solution position area.
Figure 2.23 ISE Solution Position Area
1. CLEAN position
CAUTION
Wipe up ISE Cleaning Solution spills immediately. Follow your laboratory

procedure.
6 Select Cleaning. The system displays the Cleaning dialog.
7 Select OK. The system starts the cleaning operation.
NOTE
If you need to stop the cleaning operation before completion, select STOP on the
STANDBY/STOP switch on the ISE unit. The ISE stops the cleaning and goes to STOP
mode. To return to Standby mode, select STANDBY on the STOP/STANDBY switch
on the ISE unit.
8 When the cleaning operation is complete, remove the Hitachi cup from the CLEAN
position and discard.
Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option)

Calibrate the ISE every 24 hours, following specific maintenance procedures, and when
replacing the ISE reagents.
2-26 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
NOTE
Calibrating only serum or urine requires approximately 4 minutes to complete.

Calibrating serum and urine together requires approximately 7 minutes to complete.
Materials Required:
• ISE High Serum Standard
• ISE Low Serum Standard
• ISE Low/High Urine Standard
• Hitachi Cup (4 cups)

2 Perform a total prime. A total prime is required to clear the lines of ISE Cleaning
Solution if you calibrate the ISE immediately after the Clean the ISE (ISE Option)
procedure.
a. Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system
b. Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
c. Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
d. Select OK.
e. Press the DIAG button. The ISE sample probe moves away.
f. Press the DIAG button to start the prime. The DIAG LED turns on after the priming is
complete.
g. Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.

4 Fill a Hitachi cup with approximately 500 µL of Standard Solution as required for
processing (determined by your laboratory processing serum, urine, or both sample
types).
— ISE High Serum Standard
— ISE Low Serum Standard
— ISE High Urine Standard
— ISE Low Urine Standard
5 Place the Hitachi cups into the corresponding positions on the ISE solution position
area.
A98352AC 2-27
Daily Startup
1. S-H: ISE High Serum Standard 3. U-H: ISE High Urine Standard
2. S-L: ISE Low Serum Standard 4. U-L: ISE Low Urine Standard
6 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Calibration. The system
displays the ISE Maintenance: Calibration tab.
Figure 2.25 ISE Maintenance: Calibration Tab
1. Calibration tab 2. Normal Range
7 Select Serum Start, Urine Start, or Serum/Urine Start depending on the sample types to
calibrate. The system displays the dialog.
8 Select OK. The system starts calibration.
9 When calibration is complete, confirm that the result for each electrode is within the
ranges for the calibrated sample types.
The system highlights acceptable results in blue and results that exceed the <Normal
Range> for the calibration slope in yellow.
To determine calibration quality, compare the current results with previous results for
consistency.
2-28 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Monitor the Reagent Status
10 If the ISE unit has two ISE cells, select Cell 2 to confirm the results for cell 2.
11 Remove the Hitachi cups from the ISE solution position area and discard.
12 Close the front upper cover of the ISE unit.

Monitor the reagent status to confirm the presence and status of reagents required for
typical daily analysis. Replace reagents as needed.
1 Select Home > Reagent Management > Main.

The system displays the Reagent Management: Main tab.
Figure 2.26 Reagent Management: Main Tab
1. Reagent status 2. Test status
2 Select Reagent Check (F5).

The system displays the Reagent Check dialog.
A98352AC 2-29
Daily Startup
Figure 2.27 Reagent Check Dialog
Table 2.2 Reagent Check Dialog Options

Option Description
Unit 1, Unit 2, Unit 3, Select each unit for the reagent check. The default is all units selected
Unit 4, ISE and the ISE selected if the ISE is not busy.
Check all positions Determines the remaining volume of reagent at all positions, including
the bottle positions outside of the reagent refrigerators, close to the
sample and reagent probes, and ISE unit sample probe. Select this option
as part of the daily startup, when changing any parameters, changing the
Group, and loading numerous reagents.
Check specified Determines the remaining volumes of reagent at the specified positions.
positions Select this option when replacing a reagent bottle. If the reagent is an
R1/R2, perform a reagent check for both the R1 and R2 reagent.
Check changed Determines the remaining reagent for any reagent ID that is new or has
positions been moved since the previous reagent check.
Reset Only Select this option when the reagent refrigerator cover was only opened
and closed without changing any reagent. The system resets to the latest
volumes (shots) in the system memory.
Read Reagent ID Select this option for the system to read the reagent bar code label.
NOTE
If contamination prevention parameters are programmed, the prevention

parameters are applied during a reagent check. If contamination parameters are
not programmed, CLN-1 and CLN-2 positions are yellow because the positions are
empty. No corrective action is required. Bottles with DI water can be placed in the
CLN-1 and CLN-2 positions to avoid the yellow error indicator. If bottles of DI water
are placed in these positions, they should be emptied and replaced with fresh DI
water daily, as the bottles are checked during the reagent check procedure.
NOTE
When turning on the system, all tests initially show fewer than 30 shots without a
volume indicator bar. Select Reagent Check (F5), and then select Check all
positions to determine the quantity of tests (shots) remaining.
2-30 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
3 The system defaults to select all units. If a reagent check is not required on a unit,
deselect the unit.
4 Select one of the reagent check options (refer to Figure 2.27 Reagent Check Dialog), and
then select Start.
The system starts the reagent check. As the system progresses in the reagent check, the
system indicates the status as Checking in the Reagent Status section (refer to Figure
2.26 Reagent Management: Main Tab), with the progress bar to indicate the progress.
When the reagent check is complete, the status changes to Checked.
NOTE
Select Check all positions once for daily startup to confirm all required reagents are
onboard with sufficient volume for processing.
5 Review the Reagent Status section. For more information, refer to Figure 2.26 Reagent
Management: Main Tab and Figure 2.28 Reagent Status. The colors on the screen
indicate the status of the reagent refrigerator and reagent check.
If the system displays the status as yellow, orange, or red, review the Comment column
in the Details tab.
Figure 2.28 Reagent Status
Table 2.3 Reagent Status

Status Color Description
1 Accessible Light blue Reagent bottles can be loaded
Inaccessible Gray Reagent bottles cannot be loaded.
2 Unchecked Red The status of the reagent check.
Checking Red
Checked Light blue
3 Progress bar - The system displays the progress of reagent check. The
progress bar displays only when the system is performing
the reagent check.
A98352AC 2-31
Daily Startup
Table 2.3 Reagent Status (Continued)

4 No Reagent Orange A reagent assigned to the Group is missing from the R1 or

R2 refrigerator, the on-board stability is expired, the
reagent is expired, or the bottle is empty.
Reagent short Yellow Reagent volume is short (low).
No display Light blue Necessary reagents are set.
5 R1 Status Orange The error level for reagents in the Reagent 1 refrigerator.
Yellow
Light blue
6 R2 Status Orange The error level for reagents in the Reagent 2 refrigerator.
Yellow
Light blue
6 Review the Test Status section. For more information, refer to Figure 2.26 Reagent
Management: Main Tab and Figure 2.29 Test Status. Confirm that required reagents are
available and that all reagents have sufficient volume. Identify reagents to load.
Figure 2.29 Test Status
Table 2.4 Test Status

Item Description
1 Test name 1 The system displays test names in the output order
programmed in the Group. ISE and non-dedicated LIH
reagents are not displayed.
2 Test name 2 If you program the same reagent for two tests, the system
displays the second test name.
3 Quantity of tests (shots) or The quantity of tests (shots) remaining or volume in mL.
volume remaining Select Shot/Vol. to change the display. Select Type to view
the shots or volume for the specified sample type.
2-32 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Table 2.4 Test Status (Continued)

Item Description
4 Indicator The remaining reagent volume. If more than one bottle is on

the system, the total reagent volume displays. The length of
the bar displays the maximum number of tests the system
calculates in the Reagent Inventory screen, and estimates the
reagent consumption required for the day.
Reagent quantity indicator bars: If Advanced Calibration is set

to No and the Multi-Reagent Switch is set to No, the R1
indicator bar displays on top of the R2 indicator bar. In a 3-
part reagent, the order of the bars is R1-1, R2-1, R1-2 from
top to bottom. If Advanced Calibration is set to Yes and
Multi-Reagent Switch is set to Yes, there is a single indicator
bar even for an R1 and R2 test. Beckman Coulter
recommends programming Multi-Reagent Switch to Yes.
5 Color
— Orange - A reagent assigned to the Group is missing
from the R1 or R2, the on-board stability is expired, the
reagent is expired, or the bottle is empty.
— Yellow - Reagent volume is short (low).
— Light Blue - Required reagents are set.
— Gray - The test operation is programmed to No for the
sample type displayed in Reagent Management >
Main. To change the sample type, select Type.
— Green - The remaining volume is less than the necessary
volume determined by Reagent Inventory
calculations.
7 Change the Type to view each sample type in use from the Main tab.
8 Select Details to review the Onboard Remaining, RB Stability Remaining, and Cal
Stability Remaining columns for each reagent. The time listed in these columns must be
sufficient for the expected processing volume. Identify reagents that are expired or low
in volume, and the associated position on the reagent tray. For more information, refer
to Replace the Reagents.
Review the Comment column and perform necessary corrective actions.
9 Select Unit No. to review the reagent status on each unit.
A98352AC 2-33
Daily Startup
Figure 2.30 Reagent Management: Details Tab
Table 2.5 Reagent Management: Details Tab

Item Description
Type Sample type: Serum, Urine, Other-1, Other-2.
Unit No. Displays a unit number for each analyzer unit on the system. Displays the
reagent status of the unit number selected in a blue background. Displays
the reagent status of the unit numbers not selected in a white background.
Reagent Display Displays test by test name (Test) or position (Position).
Content The display depends on Reagent Display selection:
— Test: All or a specific test

— Position: R1 or R2
Pos. R1 or R2 reagent position.
R1/R2 R1-1 and R2-1 are standard. R1-2 is for a 3-part reagent test.
Shots Quantity of tests remaining in the bottle. The blue indicator bar is
proportional to the level in the bottle (0 to 100%).
Onboard Remaining Hours (H) or Days (D) remaining until the reagent on-board stability expires.
RB Stability Hours (H) or Days (D) remaining until the reagent blank stability expires.
Remaining
Cal Stability Hours (H) or Days (D) remaining until the calibration stability expires.
Remaining
Expiration The expiration date of the reagent lot number.
Lot No. A 4-digit alpha-numeric reagent lot number.
Bottle No. (SN) A unique 4-digit number to identify each bottle of reagent.
2-34 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Table 2.5 Reagent Management: Details Tab (Continued)

Item Description
Seq. Sequence number 1 to 5 of the same reagent in the R1/R2.
Comment A caution or error message for the reagent.
Edit (F1) Edits the test name, lot number, bottle number, and bottle size for fixed
reagents.
Position Setting (F2) Assigns a position as Reagent ID or Fixed. The system indicates assigned
(fixed) positions with an asterisk highlighted in blue in the column to the left
of the Pos. column.
ID Edit (F3) Edits the 20-digit reagent ID. Use this option to edit the reagent ID after a
reagent ID read error.
Read Master Curve Scans the 2-dimensional reagent ID for master curve tests.
(F4)
Reagent Check (F5) Performs the reagent check.
Reagent History (F6) Displays the lot number, bottle number, position, and on-board stability
(hours) for 100 lines of data for R1 and R2 reagents.
Previous Setting (F7) Displays the most recent reagent bottle position. Available only in Pause
mode.
Print (F8) Prints all the Details tab information. For the sample type selected, change
Type to print for each of the sample types that is in use.
NOTE
The time remaining displays in hours (H) up to 72 hours, and days (D) over 72
hours.
If two tests are programmed to use one reagent, the RB Stability Remaining and Cal
Stability Remaining display as lower Test No./higher Test No.
Selecting Initialize Onboard Stability resets the onboard stability for fixed reagents
to the Onboard Stability Period programmed in Parameters > Specific Test
Parameters. Using Edit (F1), enter the Lot No. and Bottle No. (SN) before the
Initialize Onboard Stability function is operational.
10 In Reagent Display, select Test. In Content, select (All).
11 Scroll to R1 positions 55 to 64 and R2 positions 55 to 58 for each unit. Confirm that

there is sufficient volume of each solution required.
— R1-55 DIL-I1: Deionized water or diluent for a dilution cuvette on the inner
positions for Pre-Dilution or Repeat Dilution.
— R1-56 DIL-O1: Deionized water or diluent for a dilution cuvette on the outer
positions for Pre-Dilution or Repeat Dilution.
— R1-57 CLN-I1: If you program Contamination Parameters, the system uses cleaning
solution 1 for reagent probe (R1-1).
A98352AC 2-35
Daily Startup
— R1-59 CLN-O1: If you program Contamination Parameters, the system uses
cleaning solution 1 for reagent probe (R1-2).
— R1-61 DET-I1: 2% Wash Solution for automatic sample probe (S1) cleaning.
— R1-62 DET-I2: 2% Wash Solution or sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) for
automatic sample probe (S1) cleaning.
— R1-63 DET-O1: 2% Wash Solution for automatic sample probe (S2) cleaning.
— R1-64 DET-O2: 2% Wash Solution or sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) for
automatic sample probe (S2) cleaning.
12 Select Type from the Details tab to view any additional sample types in use.
13 If reagent or required solution is missing, low, or empty, continue to Replace the

Reagents.
Replace the Reagents

Replace any reagent meeting any of the following conditions:
• Insufficient volume for the processing that day
• Onboard stability time remaining less than your laboratory requirements
• Expired
Remove the old reagent bottles and replace with a new set.
If the analyzer is in Measure mode and more than one sequence of bottles is on-board, the
analyzer switches to the next bottle sequence when the current bottle sequence is empty,
and not when the calibration or reagent is expired.
CAUTION
Bubbles in the reagent bottle can interfere with analysis. Inspect the reagent bottles
for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a cotton-tipped applicator before loading the
reagent.
2-36 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
CAUTION
Do not add new reagent to existing bottles. Adding new reagent to existing bottles
can affect results.
IMPORTANT
Condensation can form on refrigerated reagent bottles. Inspect the reagent bottle
opening and the bar code label area for condensation. Remove condensation with a
clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue before loading the reagent.
If the bar code label is dirty or has moisture on it, the system cannot read the label.
Inspect the bar code label and wipe off any dirt or moisture. If the system still cannot
read the label, enter the reagent ID manually. For more information, refer to Edit a
Reagent ID.
IMPORTANT
Insert partitions as needed for 15 mL, 30 mL, 60 mL, and 180 mL bottles.
When placing 30 mL and 15 mL bottles on the reagent tray, use a partition and adapter
to secure the bottles correctly. Confirm that the partitions and adapters are correctly
inserted in the reagent tray. For more information, refer to Reagents and Add Adapters
to the Reagent Tray.
The 180 mL bottles occupy three positions in the reagent trays. Remove the two
adjacent partitions for the 180 mL bottle.
For two-part reagents, the reagent label indicates whether the reagent goes into the R1 or
R2 refrigerator.
1 Select Reagent Management > Details. Then select Unit No.
2 Lift the upper front of the analyzer unit.

3 Lift and remove the reagent refrigerator covers.
A98352AC 2-37
Daily Startup
Figure 2.31 Reagent Refrigerator
1. Reagent refrigerator 2 cover 2. Reagent refrigerator 1 cover
Figure 2.32 Reagent Refrigerator Top-down View
1. Removable partition 5. Reagent bottle (180 mL)

2. Reagent bottle (60 mL) 6. Fixed partition
3. Reagent bottle (15 mL) 7. Adapter for 15 mL bottle
4. Reagent bottle (30 mL) 8. Adapter for 30 mL bottle
4 Remove the on-board expired, expired, insufficient volume, and empty reagent bottles
from each refrigerator.
2-38 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Calibrate Tests
The system displays the reagent positions on the Details tab. The system indicates
assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk highlighted in blue in the column to the left
of the Pos. column. For more information, refer to Assign a Reagent Position.
5 Place the new bottles in the correct refrigerator. Use adapters and partitions as needed.
For more information, refer to Reagents.
CAUTION
Confirm that 15 mL reagent bottles are placed on the reagent tray with the bar
code label facing out. Incorrectly loaded bottles can damage the bottle or the
reagent probe.
NOTE
Place R1 bottles in the R1 refrigerator and R2 bottles in the R2 refrigerator.
If the bottle has a reagent ID, place the bottle in any available (not assigned)
position in the R1 or R2 refrigerator.
If the bottle does not have a reagent ID, place the bottle in the appropriate
assigned position. The system indicates assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk
highlighted in blue in the column to the left of the Pos. column. For more
information, refer to Assign a Reagent Position.
6 Replace the refrigerator covers.

7 Close the upper cover of the analyzer unit.
8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 for each analyzer unit.
9 After replacing reagents, select Reagent Check (F5), select each Unit with replaced
reagents, select the appropriate option, and then select Start. For more information,
refer to Figure 2.27 Reagent Check Dialog.
10 When the reagent check is complete, review the Main and Detail tabs to confirm that all
reagents are ready for processing.
Calibrate Tests
The system automatically orders (requisitions) reagent blank and calibration for all tests
with:
• Reagent blank or calibration expired
• Reagent blank or calibration expired soon.
• New bottle or lot number for the reagent (if you are using Advanced Calibration)
• Reagent blank or calibration failed
A98352AC 2-39
Daily Startup
Calibrate Tests
NOTE
The expired-soon period is an operator-defined quantity of hours programmed in

System Maintenance. The default setting is 180 minutes. For more information, contact
Beckman Coulter.
NOTE
The automatic reagent blank and calibration order (requisition) occurs after a reagent
check.
NOTE
After the system performs a reagent check, the QC order (requisition) occurs with the
Default QC Profile. Selecting Auto CAL/QC Requisition (F3) automatically orders
(requisitions) the same tests for QC that are ordered (requisitioned) for calibration.
NOTE
To determine the tests to calibrate, review the Comment column in Reagent

Management > Details.
Calibration includes a reagent blank and calibration. Perform calibration using the blue
and yellow racks.
NOTE
Before a profile is available to order (requisition), program calibration profiles in Menu

List > Parameters > Common Test Parameters > Profile > RB/Calibration. You can
program a maximum of 100 profiles (including daily, weekly, and monthly calibration
requirements). For more information, refer to Create a Reagent Blank or Calibration
Profile.
NOTE
Before a test is available to order (requisition) by bottle sequence number in Individual

Requisition (F3), program the test for Advanced Calibration in Menu List > Parameters
> Calibration Parameters > Calibration Specific. For more information, refer to the
AU5800 Reference Manual.
Order (Requisition) and Perform Calibration
1 Select Home > Rack Requisition > Calibration.

The system displays the Rack Requisition: Calibration screen.
2-40 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Calibrate Tests
Figure 2.33 Rack Requisition: Calibration Screen
2 In Type, select the sample type.

The system displays the tests automatically ordered (requisitioned) for calibration in
yellow and reagent blank in blue for the selected sample type.
NOTE
If you did not perform a reagent check, select Auto CAL/QC Requisition (F3) to
select the automatic reagent blank and calibration order (requisition). Selecting
Auto CAL/QC Requisition (F3) automatically orders (requisitions) the same tests for
QC that are ordered (requisitioned) for calibration.
3 Cuvette defaults to display All tests assigned to the inner and outer cuvettes. Select
Inner or Outer to display tests assigned only to the inner or outer cuvettes.
4 Unit No. defaults to display All analyzer units. Select the unit number 1, 2, 3, or 4 to
display tests assigned only to that unit number.
5 Confirm that the automatic order (requisition) is correct for the processing.
— If the order (requisition) is correct, continue to step 6.
— To change the order (requisition):
a. Select Start Entry (F1).
The system changes the screen to editing mode.
— To select a profile, select Profile. Select a profile, and then select OK.
— To select a specific test, select the test from the RB or CAL column.
A98352AC 2-41
Daily Startup
Process Quality Control (QC)
NOTE
Selecting from the RB column orders (requisitions) only a reagent blank.

Selecting from the CAL column orders (requisitions) a reagent blank and
calibration.
— To order (requisition) sequential bottles of the same test, select Individual
Requisition (F3).
— To select a specific test and bottle sequence, select the RB or CAL column.
— To order (requisition) all bottles for the selected test, select Select All by
Test.
— To order (requisition) all bottles for all tests, select Select All.
— To save the order (requisition), select Close.
— To cancel the order (requisition), select Cancel.
b. Select Entry (F1) to save the order (requisition). Select Exit (F2) to cancel the order
(requisition).
6 Select Display Cup Set (F5) to display the reagent blank, calibrators, racks, and positions
required for reagent blank and calibrators.
Load the reagent blanks and calibrators according to the list in the blue and yellow
racks. Select Close to close the dialog.
NOTE
In the Display CAL Racks dialog, the Volume (μL) is the sample volume determined
by the ordered (requisitioned) tests. The dead volume is not included.
NOTE
If calibrator Barcode Operation is enabled, the system does not display a rack ID for
the calibrator racks.
7 Load the racks on the rack input trays on the rack feeder unit. Load the blue rack first,
followed by the yellow racks.
8
Select Start .

Perform Quality Control on the schedule determined by your laboratory protocol. Run
control materials with each new calibration, with each new reagent lot, and after specific
maintenance or troubleshooting activities. If you find any trends or sudden shift in results,
review all operating settings. Follow your laboratory guidelines for corrective action if the
QC results do not recover within the specified limits.
• Order (Requisition) and Perform Quality Control (QC)
2-42 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
NOTE
After the system performs a reagent check, the system automatically orders
(requisitions) the default QC profile.
NOTE
Program a QC order (requisition) profile in Menu List > Parameters > Common Test
Parameters > Profile > QC. For more information, refer to Create a QC Profile. The
following specific profile numbers are designated as default QC profiles for each sample
type and Group.
Table 2.6 Default QC Order (Requisition) Profile Numbers

Profile Number Sample Type Group
87 Serum 1
88 Serum 2
89 Serum 3
90 Urine 1
91 Urine 2
92 Urine 3
93 Other-1 1
94 Other-1 2
95 Other-1 3
96 Other-2 1
97 Other-2 2
98 Other-2 3
Order (Requisition) and Perform Quality Control (QC)
1 Select Home > Rack Requisition > QC.

The system displays the Rack Requisition: QC screen.
A98352AC 2-43
Daily Startup
Figure 2.34 Rack Requisition: QC Screen

The system displays the tests automatically ordered (requisitioned) for QC in blue.
NOTE
Tests are automatically ordered (requisitioned) for QC after the following:

— You perform a reagent check. This orders (requisitions) the Default QC profile.
— You select Auto CAL/QC Requisition (F3) or QC Same Requisition (F4) in the
Calibration screen. This orders (requisitions) the same QC tests as were ordered
(requisitioned) for reagent blank or calibration.
3 Cuvette defaults to display All tests assigned to the inner and outer cuvettes. Select
Inner or Outer to display tests assigned only to the inner or outer cuvettes.
4 Unit No. defaults to display All analyzer units. Select the unit number 1, 2, 3, or 4 to
display tests assigned only to that unit number.
5 Confirm that the automatic QC order (requisition) is correct for the processing.
— If the order (requisition) is correct, continue to step 6.
— To change the order (requisition):
a. Select Start Entry (F1).
— To clear the tests for the default QC profile orders (requisitions), select
Deselect All Tests (F6).
— To select a profile, select Profile. Select a profile, and then select OK.
— To select a specific test, select the test.
2-44 A98352AC
2
Daily Startup
Start Analysis
— To order (requisition) sequential bottles of the same test, select Individual

Requisition (F3).
— To select a specific test and bottle sequence, select the test.
— To order (requisition) all bottles for the selected test, select Select All by
Test.
— To order (requisition) all bottles for all tests, select Select All.
— To save the order (requisition), select Close.
— To cancel the order (requisition), select Cancel.
b. Select Entry (F1) to save the order (requisition). Select Exit (F2) to cancel the order
(requisition).
6 Select Display Cup Set (F5) to display the required control materials, racks, and
positions.
7 Load the control materials in the green racks according to the list. Select Close.
NOTE
In the Display QC Racks dialog, the Volume (μL) is the required sample volume
determined by the ordered (requisitioned) tests. The dead volume is not included.
NOTE
If QC Barcode Operation is enabled, the system does not display a rack ID for the
QC racks.
8 Load the racks on the rack input trays on the rack feeder unit.
9
Select Start .
Start Analysis
The reaction time is approximately 8 minutes and 40 seconds for the first result to be
obtained after the sample is dispensed. The system can sample another two tests every 3.6
seconds. Each analyzer unit has a maximum throughput of 2,000 tests per hour.
You can print and view results on the monitor.
1 Load sample racks (white, red, or orange) on the rack input trays on the rack feeder
unit.
2 To display the Start dialog with an error list, select Start. Review any errors carefully
and perform necessary corrective actions before you start analysis. If an error is in red,
it is necessary to perform the corrective actions before you can start the analyzer unit.
A98352AC 2-45
Daily Startup
Start Analysis
NOTE
Select Edit Sample No. to edit the starting sample number. Editing the starting
sample number is only necessary in Sequential analysis.
3 Confirm that all units are selected. If the box is grayed out, review the error list and
perform necessary corrective actions before you start. Deselect the Unit that you do not
operate.
4 Select Start. If the system does not detect any errors, the system initializes and analysis
starts. The mode changes from Standby to Measure 1.
Figure 2.35 Start Dialog
2-46 A98352AC
CHAPTER 3
System Setup
Program a New Test

Program the new test using the chemistry setting sheet. For more information, refer to the
Test numbers 1 to 120 are pre-programmed as closed or open test numbers.

• Closed Test Numbers - Beckman Coulter test parameters are available on a validated
CD that a Beckman Coulter Representative loads during installation. The Beckman
Coulter tests are loaded onto closed test numbers. Closed test numbers reduce manual
programming time and possible programming errors.
• Open Test Numbers - The system supports the ability to add tests not from Beckman
Coulter. Open test numbers are available for reagents not from Beckman Coulter.
1 Select Menu List > Parameters > Common Test Parameters > Test Name.
a. Select Edit (F1).
b. In Test Name, enter the name (maximum of 6 characters).
Changing the test name affects all results associated with that test number. Any
previously reported results (with the old test name) are assigned the new test
name. Use caution when changing the test name.
Do not change the test name without noting the time and date that the change
occurred and then confirming any results printed before this time are reviewed and
correctly identified.
Tests are processed on a sample in the test number order (1 to 120) displayed, with
some exceptions. For information on contamination prevention, refer to the
c. (Optional) In Long Name, enter the name (maximum of 20 characters).
d. For all markets except Japan: In Reagent ID, enter the first 3 digits of the reagent ID,
or refer to the chemistry setting sheet for the reagent ID 3-digit code.
For the Japan market, the reagent ID includes the manufacturer ID and test code. In
Manufacturer ID, enter the first 3 digits of the reagent ID. In Test Code, enter the 2
digits of the reagent ID following the first 3 digits. Refer to the chemistry setting
sheet for the manufacturer ID and test code.
e. In Alarm Shots, enter the remaining test number to generate a Reagent Short
alarm. The default is 32.
f. In Multi Reagent Switch, select Yes. The Multi Reagent Switch allows the analyzer to
switch to a new sequence of R1 or R2 when either the R1 or R2 of a sequence
becomes empty.
A98352AC 3-1
System Setup
Program a New Test
g. In Cuvette, select Inner, Outer, or Both.

h. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
2 Select Group of Tests.

a. In Group, select Group 1, 2, or 3.
b. Select Edit (F1).
c. Select Test Setting (F5). Select Unit No. to add the test. The default is Unit No. 1.
d. Select the test to add to the Group. The system displays the test name in blue. Select
Close.
e. To change the print order:
1. Select a test to enable Forward (F2) and Backward (F3).

2. Move the test in the Group to change the print order.
f. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
3 (Optional) Select Profile.

b. Select Sample, RB/Calibration, and QC to add the test to any required profile.
c. In Type, select the sample type.
Confirm the sample type for each profile.
NOTE
In the Sample tab, you can program an operator-defined default profile

(number 0) for each sample type. The system uses the sample default profile
when there is no order (requisition) available for a sample, for example with a
sample ID read error. In the QC tab, you can program default QC profiles
(numbers 87 to 98) for each sample type and Group. The default QC profile is
the automatic QC order (requisition) made after a reagent check.
d. In Profile Name, select a profile.
e. Select the test. The system displays the selected tests in blue.
4 Select Menu List > Parameters > Specific Test Parameters > General.
b. In Test Name, select the test name.
d. In Operation, confirm that Yes is selected for the sample type.
e. Enter the specific test parameters from the chemistry setting sheet.
3-2 A98352AC
3
System Setup
Program a New Test
NOTE
The system can display the parameters for a maximum of 6 tests at a time for
verification. Select List Display (F7). In Type, select the sample type. Select a
maximum of 6 tests from the test list, and then select Display. The parameters
for the selected tests display. Clear the tests in blue in the List Display dialog to
select and display other tests.
5 Select Range.
a. In Test Name, select the test name.
b. In Type, select the sample type.
c. Select Edit (F1).
d. Select Set Decimal Places (F5), and then select 0 to 4 for the decimal place for the
results.
e. Select Close.
f. In Value/Flag:
— Select Value to access Specific Ranges to set the high (H flag) and low ranges (L
flag).
— Select Flag to access Level to set a positive limit (P flag) or negative limit (N
flag). This setting is typically used for drugs of abuse testing.
g. Use Specific Ranges to set a reference range to generate high (H) and low (L) flags.
— In 1 to 6, enter a range determined by sex and age.
— In 7, Standard demographics, enter a generic reference range. The system uses
the generic reference range for samples without patient demographic
information (age and sex).
— In 8, Not within expected values, the system uses the Not within expected values
reference range for a sample with patient demographic information (age or
sex), but the age or sex information did not meet the age and sex defined in the
specific range 1 to 6.
h. (Optional) Use Panic Value to set a range to generate a panic alarm and pl or ph
flags.
i. In Unit, enter the units. If the units are formatted on the report, the system prints
the units.
j. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
6 Select Menu List > Parameters > Calibration Parameters > Calibrators.
— If it is not necessary to program a new calibrator, continue to step 7.
— If it is necessary to program a new calibrator:
b. Select an available No. or Cup Position by Type.
c. Enter the Calibrator Name, Calibrator ID, Lot No., Expiration and Multi Rack.
A98352AC 3-3
System Setup
Program a New Test
NOTE
Multi Rack is an option for the systems with multiple analyzer units. Refer to
Multi-rack ID Option.
NOTE
If Barcode Operation is not enabled, enter the Calibrator Name. If Barcode

Operation is enabled, enter the Calibrator Name and Calibrator ID. The Lot
No., Expiration, and Multi Rack are optional fields.
d. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
7 Select Calibration Specific.

b. In Type, select the sample type.
c. Select Edit (F1).
d. Refer to the chemistry setting sheet to determine if the Calibration Type is AB or MB,
and enter calibration-specific parameters.
— If the Calibration Type is AB:
— Refer to the chemistry setting sheet for the parameters for Formula, Slope
Check, Factor Range, Allowable Range Check, Advanced Calibration, Lot
Calibration, and Stability.
— For Counts (replicates), enter a number from 1 to 4. For more information,
refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
— Select the calibrator from Calibrator.
— For Conc, enter the calibrator concentration from the calibrator insert
(available in the calibrator kit).
IMPORTANT
Program Slope Check according to the chemistry setting sheet for all
tests with multi-point calibrations. For more information, refer to
Calibration Specific Menu in the AU5800 Reference Manual.
— If the Calibration Type is MB:
— Refer to the chemistry setting sheet for the settings for Formula, Allowable
Range Check, Advanced Calibration, MB Type Factor, and Stability.
— For Counts (replicates), enter a number from 1 to 4. For more information,
refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
— The MB Type Factor is specific to the unit number and cuvette positions
(inner or outer) on the cuvette wheel. For Unit No., select 1, 2, 3, or 4. For
Cuvette, select Inner or Outer.
e. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
8 Select Menu List > Parameters > QC Parameters > Controls.

— If it is not necessary to program a new QC sample, continue to step 9.
3-4 A98352AC
3
System Setup
Program a New Test
— If it is necessary to program a new QC sample:

b. Select an available No. or Cup Position by Type.
c. Enter the Control Name, ID, Lot No., Expiration, and Multi Rack.
NOTE
If Barcode Operation is not enabled, enter the Control Name. If Barcode

Operation is enabled, enter the Control Name and Control ID. The Lot No.,
Expiration, and Multi Rack are optional fields.
d. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
9 Select QC Specific.
a. Select Preset.
b. In Test Name, select the test name.
d. Select Edit (F1).
e. In Control, select the QC sample.
f. In Multi/Single, select Multi or Single.
g. Use the QC package insert or known values to enter the Mean, SD, and Range. The
system determines that QC is in or out of these preset ranges when the QC Mode is
set to Preset (on the Check tab).
1. In Mean, enter the QC mean.

2. In SD, enter a 1 SD value.
3. In Range, enter the value of the range. The range is the high value minus the low
value.
h. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
10 Select Menu List > System > Format > List Format.
IMPORTANT
Do not change any parameters for items in Basic Condition, Print Information, or
Layout. These parameters affect the format of the printout.
11 Select Printed Test.

b. In List Name, select the required report or list. Select the test to add it to the report
or list. When the test is selected, the system displays the test in blue.
NOTE
Before the tests print on the printout, add the new test to any required real-
time printouts (reagent blank, calibration, QC, and samples).
A98352AC 3-5
System Setup
Create a Profile
c. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
12 Select Menu List > Parameters > Misc. > Contamination Parameters.
Contact Beckman Coulter for test-specific contamination parameters information.
b. Program the Contamination Avoidance Parameters as required for the Preceding
Test Name, Following Test Name, Reagent Probe Cleaner Kind, Wash Count, Effective
of Water Cleaning, Mixer, and Cuvette.
13 If the system is using online communication with a laboratory information system,

program an online test number. Select Menu List > System > Online > Online Test No.
b. Enter the Online Test No. The combination of the online test number and test must
be the same as the laboratory information system. Set the number as a blank when
online communication is not required.
IMPORTANT
When the test number on the laboratory information system and the online
test number are different, the data cannot transmit correctly.
14 Run the test to confirm the programming.

a. Load the reagent and any required cleaning solution on the analyzer.
b. Perform a reagent check.
c. Confirm that the system orders (requisitions) calibration for the new test.
d. If the test is not added to the default QC order (requisition), order (requisition) QC
on the new test.
e. Perform a reagent blank, calibration, and QC on the new test.
f. Review the printout and confirm that the reagent blank, calibration, and QC data are
correct.
Create a Profile
A profile is a group of tests that are typically ordered (requisitioned) at the same time.
Using a profile reduces the quantity of selections needed, as a single profile is selected
instead of multiple tests. A maximum of 100 profiles (Number 0 to Number 99) can be
programmed for samples, reagent blank, calibration, and QC. A maximum of 120 tests can
be programmed in a profile. The quantity of sample blank tests, LIH, sample type, and
number of analyzer units limits the quantity of tests that can be programmed in a profile.
Each profile is assigned a profile name.
You cannot select unavailable tests.
3-6 A98352AC
3
System Setup
Create a Profile
Create a Sample Profile

Profile 0 is the default profile in the Sample tab. Profile 0 is automatically performed in the
following situations:
• A bar code label read error occurs.
• No order (requisition) found for a sample.
• Online errors.
You can only select ISE tests when the sample type is Serum or Urine.
1 Select Menu List > Parameters > Common Test Parameters > Profile > Sample.
Figure 3.1 Profile: Sample Tab
1. Select a Profile Number 2. Enter a Profile Name
2 Select Edit (F1).
4 In Profile Name, select a profile number from 0 to 99.
5 For Profile Name, enter a profile name with a maximum of 20 characters.
6 Select the tests to include in the profile. The system displays selected tests in blue.
7 Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Confirm (F1).
Create a Reagent Blank or Calibration Profile

You can select ISE tests when the ISE calibration type is ACAL.
A98352AC 3-7
System Setup
Create a Profile
1 Select Menu List > Parameters > Common Test Parameters > Profile > RB/Calibration.
Figure 3.2 Profile: RB/Calibration Tab
2 Select Edit (F1).
6 Select the tests to include in the profile. The system displays the test in blue (RB Only),
yellow (ACAL + RB), or green (One Point) determined by programming in the
Calibration Specific screen. Select Calibration Options (F5) to change between the
available options.
NOTE
The programming in the Calibration Specific screen determines the calibration

options available in Calibration Options (F5).
3-8 A98352AC
3
System Setup
Create a Profile
Create a QC Profile
QC profiles 87 to 98 are the default QC profiles that are automatically ordered
(requisitioned) in Home > Rack Requisition > QC. The QC profile numbers 87 to 98
correspond to a specific Group and sample type:
• Number 87: Serum: For Group 1
• Number 90: Urine: For Group 1
• Number 93: Other-1: For Group 1
You can only select ISE tests when the sample type is Serum or Urine.
1 Select Menu List > Parameters > Common Test Parameters > Profile > QC.
Figure 3.3 Profile: QC Tab
2 Select Edit (F1).

A98352AC 3-9
System Setup
Program Calibrator Concentrations and a New Calibrator Lot Number
6 Select the tests to include in the profile. The system displays selected tests in blue.
Program Calibrator Concentrations and a New Calibrator Lot Number

Use this function to review or change calibrator concentrations for all tests ordered for a
calibrator in a single dialog. Use this function to change all concentrations when the
calibrator lot number changes.
IMPORTANT
Confirm the calibrator concentration value in the Calibration Specific screen. It is critical
that all calibrator values are entered correctly.
For more information, refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
1 Select Menu List > Parameters > Calibration Parameters > Calibrators.
2 Select Edit (F1).
3 Select the calibrator name to edit from Calibrator.
4 Enter the calibrator Name, ID, Lot No., and Expiration.
NOTE
You can only enter a new lot number for an existing calibrator.
5 Select Set Conc Value (F5).

The system displays the concentration values of the selected calibrator.
3-10 A98352AC
3
System Setup
Program Preset QC Mean and Range
Figure 3.4 Set Conc Value Dialog
6 To display or edit a different calibrator, select the calibrator name from Calibrator.
7 Enter the concentration values (Conc) for each test (Test Name) for the calibrator. You
can only enter concentration values for tests programmed to the calibrator in the
Calibration Specific screen.
8 Select Close.
9 To change the concentration for any other calibrator, repeat steps 3 to 8.

10 If a calibrator concentration changes, the system displays a confirmation message.
Select OK.
Program Preset QC Mean and Range

Use this procedure to review and change the QC mean, standard deviation, and range. For
detailed information, refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
1 Select QC > QC Setup > Preset.
2 In Test Name, select the test name.
4 Select Edit (F1).
5 In Control, select the QC sample.
6 In Multi/Single, select Multi or Single.
A98352AC 3-11
System Setup
Program a User Menu
7 Use the QC package insert or known values to enter the Mean, SD, and Range. The
system determines that QC is in or out of these preset ranges when the QC Mode is set
to Preset (on the Check tab).
a. In Mean, enter the QC mean.
b. In SD, enter a 1 SD value.
c. In Range, enter the value of the range. The range is the high value minus the low
value.
Program a User Menu

The User Menu function allows the selection of up to 16 menus most frequently used by the
operator. Operator-defined menu names can be programmed. Menus selected from the
User Menu button have direct access to the menu to save time.
The system displays the original menu name below the main button bar even when you
access menus using the User Menu button.
Edit the User Menu
1 Select Menu List > System > User Menu.
2 Select Edit (F1).

The system changes the next available menu from a gray box to a blue button.
Figure 3.5 User Menu Screen
1. Blue button
3-12 A98352AC
3
System Setup
Program a User Menu
3 Select the blue button.
Figure 3.6 User Menu Dialog
4 In Select Screen, select the menu to place in the User Menu list.
5 In Display Data, enter the operator-defined menu name. You can enter up to 28
characters on each line.
6 Select Entry.
A98352AC 3-13
System Setup
Program a User Menu
3-14 A98352AC
CHAPTER 4
Sample Programming and Processing
Sample Preparation
Confirm that there is sufficient sample for analysis along with the dead volume. To display
the volume needed for the required tests, select Home > Rack Requisition > Sample. The
system displays the sample volume required for ordered (requisitioned) tests at the
bottom right-hand side of the screen. The sample volume does not include the dead
volume.
The minimum dead volume required for sample detection varies depending on the sample
cup or tube.
After centrifuging sample tubes, confirm that there is sufficient volume of serum or plasma.
If the serum or plasma level is too low, transfer it to a smaller cup or cup nested (inserted)
in a tube. For more information, refer to Cups or Tubes Specifications for validated cups
and nested cups.
Follow your laboratory procedure to dispense the sample into the center of the cup or tube.
Confirm that the sample surface is level without bubbles present before analysis.
Prevent sample evaporation and contamination before analysis.
WARNING
If the following requirements are not met, results are affected and system errors
occur.
• Do not have fibrous material or fibrin in the sample.
• Confirm that no air bubbles are in the samples, including samples transferred to the
AU5800 from a laboratory automation system.
• Dispense sample volume in the quantity required for analysis and the dead volume. For
information about dead volumes for tubes and cups, refer to Cups or Tubes
Specifications.
• In Specific Test Parameters, you can set the sample volume dilution to 0 μL (default) or
10 μL. When you set the Dilution to 0 μL, the system adds an extra 5 μL per test to the
sample volume to ensure dispensing accuracy. For example, if the sample volume of a
test is 3 μL, the system aspirates 8 μL per test. If 10 tests are ordered (requisitioned) on a
sample, the system adds a total of 50 μL to the sample volume. When you set the
Dilution to 10 μL, the system does not add any extra sample volume per test.
• After sample aspiration, the sample probe is rinsed in the wash well, and a small amount
of water is transferred to the sample when the sample probe aspirates sample for the
next test. If the initial sample volume is small, and 20 tests or more are analyzed on the
sample, add an extra 200 μL to the required sample volume to avoid diluting the sample.
A98352AC 4-1
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in the Rack
• Confirm that a volume of serum or plasma sufficient for analysis plus the needed dead
volume is in a primary tube. For information about dead volumes for tubes and cups,
refer to Cups or Tubes Specifications.
• When the serum quantity is small, perform analysis after transferring the sample to a
smaller cup or cup nested (inserted) in a tube. For more information, refer to Cups or
Tubes Specifications.
• When the serum quantity is small, the system can aspirate blood cells below the serum
and results can be affected.
WARNING
Assays with a sample volume of less than 1.8 µL should use a 10 or higher pre-dilution
rate for the automatic repeat with pre-dilution option.
CAUTION
Beckman Coulter adjusts the sample probes for optimal dispensing with the cup or
tubes selected for use by each laboratory at installation. If you change the cup or
tubes in use on the system, contact Beckman Coulter to make any required
adjustments.
IMPORTANT
• Do not fill the cup or tube completely to the top with sample. The sample surface in the
cup or tube should be lower than 15 mm from the top of the cup or tube.
• Carefully place the cups or tubes filled with sample into the racks to avoid sample spilling
from the cup or tube onto the rack.
• Carefully place the racks containing the sample cups or tubes onto the rack tray to avoid
sample spilling from the cup or tube onto the rack tray.
• Carefully place the rack trays on the rack input component and remove the racks from the
rack output component to avoid sample spilling from the cup or tube onto the rack input
component or rack output component.
If there is a height difference between tubes processed on a laboratory automation system,

use the tube with the bottom that is furthest from the surface of the track to define the
maximum probe stroke. This tube difference causes tubes with bottoms closer to the track
surface to require a higher dead volume to have correct operation with the shallowest tube.
Rack Preparation
Before you start analysis, dispense a sample into sample cups or tubes and set these cups
or tubes in the correct rack. The racks come in six different colors. Each rack color has a
specified purpose or application. Racks are placed on the rack input trays. A maximum of
20 racks, or 200 samples can be placed on a rack input tray. Two rack input trays for a
maximum of 40 racks can be placed on the rack input component.
4-2 A98352AC
4
CAUTION
Confirm that racks are clean. If the rack is dirty or sticky, clean the rack. Refer to
Clean the Rack.
Rack Types
The system identifies the rack type from the combination of magnets set into the rack
bottom. The rack colors, applications, and magnet combinations are shown in the following
table.
Table 4.1 Rack Color, Application, and Magnet Position
Color Rack Application Magnet
1, 2, 3
White Used to analyze routine samples and Auto Repeat run samples.
White + Used to analyze routine and emergency samples from the

Light Blue Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system.
Adapter
Blue Used to calculate reagent blanks for creating calibration curves.
Yellow Used to create calibration curves.
Green Used to analyze QC samples.
A98352AC 4-3
Table 4.1 Rack Color, Application, and Magnet Position (Continued)

Color Rack Application Magnet
1, 2, 3
Orange Used to analyze Manual Repeat run samples.
Red Used to analyze emergency samples.
The rack positions are numbered 1 to 10. The magnets are located on the bottom of the
rack at the position number 1 end.
Adapter
Adapters are necessary to hold smaller diameter tubes (approximately 11.5 to 13.5 mm)
firmly in position in the racks. Larger diameter tubes (approximately 13.6 to 16 mm) do
not require adapters. To confirm that a tube fits correctly, place the tube into a rack with
and without an adapter and determine which option holds the tube most securely.
For more information on adapters, refer to Use Adapters on Sample Racks in the AU5800
Reference Manual.
CAUTION
Supply only the white racks with the light blue adapters to the Beckman Coulter
laboratory automation system. Rack jam errors can occur if the white racks with the
black adapters are supplied to the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system.
Place Samples into each Rack Type

The system designates white, red, and orange racks for Serum, Urine, Other-1, or Other-2
sample types in Menu List > System > System Condition > Analysis Mode. Place samples in
the correct rack for sample type.
White Rack (Routine Analysis)
NOTE
• Bar coded calibrators and QC can be programmed for analysis in white racks.
• Different sample types (serum, urine, other) can be programmed for analysis in the same
white rack.
4-4 A98352AC
4
For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Set the sample cups or tubes according to the analysis mode.

• Barcode analysis - Samples can be placed in any order.
• Sequential analysis - Place cups or tubes in numeric order according to the order
(requisition) without leaving empty spaces in the rack.
• Rack No. analysis - Place samples in sample number order according to the rack ID and
sample position (1 to 10) in the rack. The sample number equals (rack ID -1) x 10 +
position. For example:
Table 4.2 Sample Number according to the Rack ID and Position
Sample Number Rack ID Position
1 1 1
12 2 2
25 3 5
WARNING
In sequential analysis, place samples in numeric sample number order according to

the requisitioned order without leaving any empty positions in the racks. If there are
empty positions in the racks, the ordered (requisitioned) sample number and the
sample number determined during analysis do not coincide, and concordance errors
can occur. Beckman Coulter does not recommend running patient samples in
sequential mode as positive patient identification cannot be maintained.
IMPORTANT
In Rack No. analysis mode, the maximum Rack ID of White Rack is up to 999. If the rack
ID is used over 999, the samples on the white rack are not analyzed.
Blue Rack (Reagent Blank)

Place a sample cup or tube filled with deionized water or diluent in position 1 or 2 in the
blue rack.
Assign deionized water or diluent to position 1 or 2 in the blue reagent blank rack in RB
Sample Information for each sample type in Parameters > Calibration Parameters >
Calibrators. For more information, refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
Yellow Rack (Calibrators)

In Calibration Parameters, calibrator material is programmed to a calibrator number (1 to
200).
The system identifies calibrator numbers 1 to 200 by the rack ID and position. For example,
calibrator numbers 1 to 10 are placed in rack ID 0001, calibrator numbers 11 to 20 are
placed in rack ID 0002, and so on.
A98352AC 4-5
If you enable calibrator Barcode Operation, assign a calibrator ID to the calibrator material.
Place calibrators with bar code labels in any position in the yellow racks.
Green Rack (Quality Control)

In QC Parameters, a control material is programmed to a QC number (1 to 100).
The system identifies control numbers 1 to 100 by the rack ID and position. For example,
control numbers 1 to 10 are placed in rack ID 0001, control numbers 11 to 20 are placed in
rack ID 0002, and so on.
If you enable QC Barcode Operation, assign a QC ID to the control material. Place controls
with bar code labels in any position in the green racks.
Orange Rack (Manual Repeats)

For sequential analysis, place samples in numeric sample number order according to the
repeat run order (requisition) without leaving empty positions in the racks. Use a rack that
is programmed for the correct sample type.
For barcode analysis, place samples in any position in the rack programmed for the correct
sample type.
Red Rack (Emergency Analysis)

For sequential analysis, place samples in sequential order by their order (requisition)
number. The system automatically assigns sample numbers from the tubes or cups
detected, so you can leave empty spaces in the rack.
For example, if you order (requisition) three samples and place the samples in positions 1,
3, and 5, the system assigns E001 to the sample in position 1, E002 to the sample in
position 3, and E003 to the sample in position 5.
Use a rack programmed for the correct sample type.
For barcode analysis, place samples in any position in the rack programmed for the correct
sample type.
WARNING
When you use red racks for sequential analysis, use a worklist to confirm that the
results correspond to the samples as processed in the rack.
WARNING
Beckman Coulter recommends using bar code labels for samples to guarantee
positive patient identification.
4-6 A98352AC
4
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in a Rack
1 Place each sample in the correct rack.

Racks are color-coded. Each rack color indicates a different type of analysis. If you
program racks for different sample types (serum, urine, other-1, other-2), place the
sample in the correct rack for the sample type.
WARNING
Insert the sample tubes or cups correctly into the rack. If the tube or cup is not
pushed down to the bottom of the rack, cup detection does not work correctly
and rack jams can occur.
2 Look at each opening in the rack and confirm that you align the bar code label in the
center. The bar code label can only deviate 2 mm from the center. If the bar code label is
not aligned with the opening in the rack, lift it out and place it in correctly.
WARNING
For sample tubes with bar code labels, do not rotate the tube while it is in the
rack. Rotating can cause bar code label contamination or damage, resulting in bar
code label read errors. Rotate sample tubes after they have been removed from
the racks.
Figure 4.1 Placing a Sample Cup or Tube in a Rack
1. Direction that rack moves 5. Sample cup

2. NE rack 6. Center
3. The rack ID label is applied to this 7. Bar code label
surface. 8. Correct
4. Bar code label 9. Incorrect
A98352AC 4-7
Prepare Racks for Analysis
WARNING
Use only NE racks. An NE rack has a window on the side to facilitate setting
different sample cup types in the rack and not compromise bar code label
readability.
Figure 4.2 Examples of Tubes and Cups Correctly Placed in Racks
1. Small diameter tube with ID 4. Large diameter tube with ID and

2. Large diameter tube with ID Hitachi cup
3. Hitachi cup
Multi-rack ID Option
Multi-rack ID is a rack ID label that identifies the analyzer unit by the first digit of the rack
ID label. Multi-rack ID labels can be used for reagent blank, calibrator, and QC racks.
When using multi-rack ID, reagent blank, calibration, and QC analysis takes place on
multiple analyzer units at the same time which can decrease the time for completion of
results.
To use the multi-rack ID option, it is necessary to pour multiple sample cups of calibrator
and QC for analysis in the multiple calibration and QC racks.
Racks with the multi-rack ID label and regular rack ID label can be processed at the same
time.
4-8 A98352AC
4
Figure 4.3 Example of Multi-rack ID Analysis with Four Analyzer Units
1. Rack 6. ISE unit (option)

2. Bypass lane 7. Analyzer unit
3. Primary sample transport lane 8. Reagent blank, calibration, or QC rack
4. Return lane with multi-rack ID label
5. Rack feeder unit
Figure 4.4 Example of Normal ID Rack Analysis (Rack ID 0001) with Four Analyzer Units
1. Rack 7. Analyzer unit

2. Bypass lane 8. Routine, Reagent blank, calibration, or QC
3. Primary sample transport lane Rack with normal rack ID label (Rack ID
4. Return lane 0001) progresses sequentially through
5. Rack feeder unit analyzer units 1, 2, 3, and 4
6. ISE unit (option)
Label Racks
Apply the multi-rack ID label that identifies the analyzer unit number with the first digit to
reagent blank (blue), calibration (yellow), or QC (green) racks.
A98352AC 4-9
Place Multi-ID Labeled Racks on the Rack Input Trays
1 Place the racks on the rack input tray in the sequence shown in Figure 4.5, so that the
rack IDs are in ascending order.
Figure 4.5 Reagent Blank Racks with Multi-rack ID
1. Rack feed direction 5. Blue rack with rack ID 4001 for

2. Blue rack with rack ID 1001 for analyzer unit 4
analyzer unit 1 6. Place a cup filled with deionized
3. Blue rack with rack ID 2001 for water or diluent in position 1 of
analyzer unit 2 each blue rack
4. Blue rack with rack ID 3001 for
analyzer unit 3
TIP
If the rack ID starts with 0, it is not a multi-rack ID. Place these racks after multi-
racks when loading both types of racks on the rack input tray.
Assign deionized water or diluent to position 1 or 2 in the blue reagent blank rack in
RB Sample Information for each sample type in Parameters > Calibration
Parameters > Calibrators.
2 Place the multi-racks on the rack input tray.
4-10 A98352AC
4
Figure 4.6 Rack Input Trays on Rack Feeder Unit
1. Rack input tray
WARNING
If the racks are placed in an incorrect sequence, the intended analysis results
cannot be obtained. If analysis is started when the racks are placed in an incorrect
sequence, place the racks in the correct sequence, and repeat the calibration or
QC analysis.
TIP
The sequence that the racks are placed and the positions of the sample cups can be
confirmed by selecting Display Cup Set (F5) in Home > Start Condition and Home >
Rack Requisition > Calibration.
A98352AC 4-11
If reagent blank is not required on a specific analyzer unit, it is not necessary to

place a multi-rack ID blue rack for that analyzer unit.
For example, when reagent blank analysis is not required on analyzer unit 2, place a
blue rack with label 1001 followed by a blue rack with label 3001 on the rack input
tray.
Placing a Rack on the Rack Input Tray

Four identical trays are provided with the system. Use two trays on the rack input
component as a rack input tray, and use the other two trays on the rack output component
as a rack output tray.
You can place up to 20 racks on the rack input tray.
Use the following procedure to place a rack on the rack input tray.
1 Grasp the rack stabilizing bar and slide it to the back of the tray.
Figure 4.7 Rack Input Tray
1. Rack stabilizing bar
2 Place the racks in color order.
4-12 A98352AC
4
Figure 4.8 Place Racks on the Rack Input Trays
1. Place a cup filled with deionized 4. Place in any order

water or diluent in position 1 or 2 5. Direction that racks move on the
2. Place in any order rack input trays
3. Place in any order
Assign deionized water or diluent to position 1 or 2 in the blue reagent blank rack in RB
Sample Information for each sample type in Parameters > Calibration Parameters >
Calibrators.
IMPORTANT
— When several yellow racks are required for creation of calibration curves, set the
yellow racks one after the other.
— When several green racks are required for QC analysis, set the green racks one after
the other.
NOTE
In Barcode and Rack Number analysis, white and red racks can be processed from
the priority input component and rack input component.
In Sequential analysis:
— White racks can only be processed from the rack input component.
A98352AC 4-13
— Red racks can be processed from the priority input component (default), or the rack
input component. For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
For more information, refer to Multi-rack ID Option.
3 Slide the rack stabilizing bar forward to the rack.
WARNING
— Secure the rack with the rack stabilizing bar. If the tray is set when the rack
stabilizing bar is loose, the rack might topple over.
— Place the rack in the direction indicated on the rack input tray. The rack does not fit
(one end of the rack is not in contact with the tray) if placed in the incorrect
direction. This can cause the rack to topple over, or a rack jam error if the rack is
started. In addition, the rack type cannot be identified, and the rack supply pauses
until the error is corrected.
— Set the rack stabilizing bar towards the front of the rack input tray.
Place a Rack Input Tray or Rack Output Tray on the Rack Feeder Unit
You can place two trays on the rack input component and two trays on the rack output
component.
TIP
For information on placing a rack input tray on the rack input component when the
AU5800 is connected to the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system, refer to
the AU5800 Laboratory Automation Connecting Kit addendum.
1 Confirm that the amber LEDs on the rack feeder unit are not blinking.
4-14 A98352AC
4
Figure 4.9 LEDs on Rack Feeder Unit
1. Rack output component amber LED 3. Rack input tray 2 amber LED
2. Rack input tray 1 amber LED
WARNING
Before removing a tray from the rack output component during operation,
confirm that the amber LED is off. If the tray is removed while the amber LED is
blinking, an injury can result, or the rack can topple over.
For details of LED functions, refer to LEDs and RACK SET/DIAG Buttons (Rack
Feeder Unit and Priority Rack Input Component).
2 Place the rack input trays with racks on the rack input component, and the empty rack
output trays on the rack output component. Slide the rack stabilizing bar forward on
the rack output trays.
A98352AC 4-15
Figure 4.10 Placing a Rack Input Tray or Rack Output Tray
1. Rack stabilizing bar 4. Rack input tray 1

2. Rack output tray 1 5. Rack input tray 2
3. Slide the rack stabilizing bar forward 6. Rack output tray 2
(present location) on the output
tray
3 Confirm that the tray set indicator is in the correct position. Refer to Figure 4.11.
Figure 4.11 Tray Set Indicator
1. Tray set indicator. 3. Incorrect tray set indicator position:

2. Correct tray set indicator position: A An orange square at an angle
flat orange square indicates the indicates the orange switch is not
orange switch is completely up and completely up, and the tray is not
the tray is flat on the rack input flat on the rack input component or
component or rack output rack output component.
component.
4-16 A98352AC
4
Adding Racks Directly to the Trays on the Rack Input Component
TIP
For information on adding racks directly to the trays on the rack input component
when the AU5800 is connected to the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system,
refer to the AU5800 Laboratory Automation Connecting Kit addendum.
When adding racks directly to the system, set them using the following procedure. Confirm
that the racks are set in the correct direction.
WARNING
Never look directly into the bar code readers. The laser light can cause serious eye
damage.
A98352AC 4-17
Figure 4.12 Placing a Rack on the Rack Input Tray on the Rack Input Component
1. Rack output component amber LED 7. Rack input tray 2 green LED
2. Sample ID bar code reader for rack input 8. Rack input tray 2 amber LED
3. Rack ID bar code reader for rack input 9. Rack input tray
4. Rack input tray 1 green LED 10. Priority rack input component LED
5. Rack input tray 1 amber LED 11. Rack ID bar code reader for rack output
6. RACK SET/DIAG button
1 Add racks to the rack input tray when the green LED is on.
2 If the rack input tray amber LED is blinking, press the RACK SET/DIAG button to stop
moving existing racks. You can load new racks when the amber LED is off (the RACK
SET/DIAG button is blinking).
3 Press the RACK SET/DIAG button again to start racks moving.
4-18 A98352AC
4
Adding Racks to the Priority Rack Input Component

Racks placed on the priority rack input component are analyzed at a higher priority than
racks placed on the rack input component.
In Barcode and Rack Number analysis, white and red racks can be processed from the
priority rack input component and rack input component.
In Sequential analysis:
• White racks can only be processed from the rack input component.
• Red racks can be processed from the priority input component (default), or the rack
input component. For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
If an error occurs, and the rack cannot be processed, remove the rack by opening the small
door on the left side of the rack input component.
CAUTION
Do not process calibration or QC racks from the priority rack input component if three
or more yellow or green racks are required. Calibration and QC errors can result
because only two racks can be processed from the priority rack input component at
one time, which causes an interruption of calibration or QC analysis that requires
three or more yellow or green racks.
WARNING
• Place the rack according to the rack direction label below position 2 on the priority rack
input component.
• When the priority rack input component LED is flashing, more racks cannot be processed
from the priority rack input component. Wait until the LED stops flashing.
1 Confirm that the amber LED on the priority rack input component is not flashing. The
flashing indicates that racks are in progress. Wait until the LED stops flashing.
Figure 4.13 Priority Rack Input Component
1. Priority rack input component 2. Rack direction label

amber LED
2 Open the cover of the priority rack input component.
A98352AC 4-19
Order (Requisition) for Routine and Emergency Samples
3 Place prepared rack(s) in positions 1 and/or 2 according to the rack direction label. If
racks are placed in positions 1 and 2, the rack in position 1 is processed first.
4 Close the cover.

5 Select Start to begin processing the rack.

For each sample to analyze, enter the sample information and the order (requisition).
The system uses these orders to process each sample.
To run an emergency sample, order (requisition) the sample as Emergency, and place the
sample in a red rack. These samples are processed with a higher priority than routine
samples by moving to the sample aspiration positions on the analyzer units on the bypass
lane. Racks can also be loaded on the priority rack input component to be processed faster
than if loaded on the rack input component.
Enter Manual Orders (Requisitions) for Routine and Emergency Samples
NOTE
The following operations are not necessary when LIS programming is available. When
the AU5800 connects to a laboratory automation system, create orders from the
laboratory information system.
1 Select Home > Rack Requisition > Sample > Test Requisition. The system displays the
group of tests from the selected Group in the Start Condition screen.
4-20 A98352AC
4
Figure 4.14 Sample: Test Requisition Tab
2 In Sample Kind, select Switch to select Routine or Emergency.

— Routine - Analysis in a white rack
— Emergency - Analysis in a red rack
4 Select Start Entry (F1).

The system changes the tab to editing mode.
NOTE
When a test that you want to select is not available in the current Group, select the
Change Group Display. The system displays tests for all Groups in the list.
5 In Sample ID, enter the sample bar code number.
6 If a manual dilution was made on the sample, select Sample Dilution (F7) and enter the
sample dilution rate.
7 Select the tests to run on the sample. The system displays the tests in blue when it is
ordered (requisitioned). Select the test again to cancel the order (requisition). The
system displays tests in gray that are not available for the selected sample type.
When selecting a profile, either:
— Select Profile to open the profile dialog and select a profile (or multiple profiles).
— Use the keyboard to enter a profile number in Profile, and then select Enter.
A98352AC 4-21
NOTE
Before a profile is available to order (requisition), it is necessary to program profiles

in Menu List > Parameters > Common Test Parameters > Profile > Sample. You can
create a maximum of 99 profiles for each sample type. For more information, refer
to Create a Sample Profile.
Each time you select a test, the system updates the Selected Tests and Sample Volume
fields.
CAUTION
The Sample Volume (μL) indicates the sample dispensing volume that the system
uses for analysis. The Sample Volume (μL) does not include the dead volume.
8 Select the Demographics tab to enter any required patient demographic information.
9 Select Entry (F2).
10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 to requisition more samples in the same Sample Kind and Type. To
change the Sample Kind or Type, select Exit (F1) and repeat steps 2 to 9.
11 Select Exit (F1).
NOTE
Select Pending List (F4) to view a list of samples that have been ordered
(requisitioned), but not yet processed on the analyzer. Select a Sample No. or
Sample ID number, then select Go to view the specific sample order (requisition).
Enter Batch Orders (Requisitions)

To perform the same tests on a group of samples, enter the orders (requisitions) in a single
batch.
If you order tests for one sample, the system orders the tests for all of the samples in the
batch. If you enter patient information for a single sample in the Demographics tab, the
system orders (requisitions) the patient information for all samples in the batch. If using
bar code analysis, the Sample ID entered for the first sample automatically increases by one
digit for subsequent samples.
1 Select Home > Rack Requisition > Sample > Test Requisition. The system displays the
group of tests from the selected Group in the Start Condition screen.
4-22 A98352AC
4

— Routine - Analysis in a white rack
— Emergency - Analysis in a red rack

5 Select the tests or profile for batch order (requisition) for one sample.
NOTE
If bar code analysis is in use, enter the first sample ID in the batch.
6 Select Batch Entry (F3).
Figure 4.16 Batch Entry Dialog
7 Select Number of Samples to enter the number of samples required in the batch, or
select Last Sample No. to enter the last sample number in the batch.
A98352AC 4-23
8 Select OK.
9 Select Exit (F1).
Add On a Test for Rerun

To add on one or more tests or rerun a test on a previously processed sample in a white or
red rack, use the Add On (F5) button.
Depending on the laboratory information system options programmed, the system

generates a Measure Completed for Read Sample ID alarm when the system reads a
duplicate sample ID in the same index after adding on a test. This alarm is for information
only. Confirm the sample is processing from the Sample Status screen.
1 Select Home > Rack Requisition > Sample > Test Requisition.
2 Select the Sample Kind, Sample No. and Type to reanalyze.
3 Select Add On (F5).
4-24 A98352AC
4
Figure 4.18 Add On Dialog
4 Confirm that the displayed Sample Kind and Type are for the sample being reanalyzed. If
necessary, select Switch for Sample Kind to select Routine or Emergency samples, and
select the sample type from Type.
5 In Sample No., enter the sample number (not the sample ID) or the starting and ending
sample numbers to add on a test. To add on a test to one sample, enter the same sample
number in the starting and ending Sample No. fields. If the starting and ending sample
numbers are entered in the Sample No. fields, the system programs the same test order
(requisition) for all sample numbers within the specified range.
6 Select the tests to add on. You can select tests whether they are processed in the
original run or not.
NOTE
To delete all tests ordered (requisitioned) in the Add On dialog, select Delete all
Repeat Tests for this sample.
7 Select OK.
8 Confirm the order (requisition) by entering the sample number in Sample No. The
system displays previously processed tests in blue font. The system displays add on test
orders (requisitions) in black font with an asterisk. The system displays the rerun test
orders (requisitions) in blue font with an asterisk. The system only processes the tests
with an asterisk.
CAUTION
If you select the processed test in the original run for reanalysis, the system
automatically overwrites the result.
A98352AC 4-25
CAUTION
Figure 4.19 Confirm Add On Order (Requisition)
Delete an Order (Requisition)

You can delete an order (requisition) before the system processes the sample.
4-26 A98352AC
4
2 Select Delete Requisition (F6).
Figure 4.21 Delete Requisition Dialog
3 To delete orders (requisitions), select the Sample Kind. Enter the Search Sample No.,
Search Sample ID, or leave the asterisk to delete all orders (requisitions) for the selected
sample kind.
NOTE
If a processed sample is included in the Search Sample No. or Search Sample ID,
the system does not delete the order (requisition) for that Sample Kind. If the
system does not delete the order (requisition), the system generates a Failed to
delete sample alarm.
4 Select Delete.
A98352AC 4-27
Download Orders (Requisitions) from a Laboratory Information System

You can download orders (requisitions) from a laboratory information system.
Downloading can be:
• Realtime - The system downloads and executes orders (requisitions) automatically.
• Batch - The system waits for an operator to instruct it to download and execute orders
(requisitions).
2 Select Batch Req. from Host (F7).
Figure 4.23 Batch Req. from Host Dialog
3 In Sample Kind, select the sample kind and type to download from the laboratory
information system.
4 In Sample No., enter the starting and ending sample numbers to download from the
laboratory information system.
4-28 A98352AC
4
Processing Emergency Samples
5 Select OK.
A message displays while the system downloads the orders (requisitions). When the
download is complete, the system closes the message dialog.
Processing Emergency Samples

The system uses red racks for analysis of emergency samples. Red racks are processed on
the bypass lane for priority over routine samples. An E sample number prefix in the order
(requisition) and sample results identifies an emergency sample.
• Place a red rack on position 1 or 2 of the priority rack input component and press
Start. For more information, refer to Adding Racks to the Priority Rack Input
Component.
• Place a red rack on the rack input tray on the rack input component and press Start.
For more information, refer to Placing a Rack on the Rack Input Tray.
Performing a Repeat Run

You can perform a repeat for samples using two methods:
• Manual - Program repeat run criteria in Parameters > Repeat Parameters > Repeat
Common and Repeat Specific to generate repeat run orders (requisitions). View or
print a repeat run worklist, and place the samples to repeat in the orange racks.
• Automatic - Program repeat run criteria in Parameters > Repeat Parameters > Repeat
Common and Repeat Specific to generate repeat run orders (requisitions). The system
performs the repeat run automatically on samples in white or red racks.
The operator is allowed to program whether the system rewrites the original data
automatically with the result data of the repeat test.
Auto Repeat
The Auto Repeat feature is enabled in Menu List > System > System Condition > Analysis
Mode. For more information, refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
The routine or emergency rack moves back to the rack buffer component until original test
analysis is complete. If any tests generated a repeat order (requisition), the rack moves to
the bypass lane for repeat analysis, then to the rack output tray. The system only performs
the tests that generated a repeat order (requisition). If no repeat orders (requisitions) were
generated, the rack moves directly to the rack output tray.
CAUTION
Do not use labels with the same rack ID on more than one rack. Using duplicate rack
IDs can cause concordance errors between samples.
A98352AC 4-29
You cannot modify the repeat orders (requisitions). Repeats are automatic.
Repeat Orders (Requisitions) for Manual Repeat

The system generates repeat run orders (requisitions) automatically from the repeat
criteria programmed in Parameters > Repeat Parameters > Repeat Common and Repeat
Specific. Confirm the samples to repeat using a repeat run worklist. Make changes to the
worklist in the Repeat Order screen as required.
Modify a Repeat Order (Requisition)
1 Select Menu List > Routine > Repeat Run > Repeat Order.
Figure 4.24 Repeat Order Screen
Table 4.3 Repeat Order (Requisition) Options

Option Description
Search Sample ID Search for samples using the sample ID.
Test Total The system displays the test total for repeat runs.
Re-number Repeat If you delete repeat samples from the worklist , the repeat sample
Samples numbers are not sequential. Select Re-number Repeat Sample to
renumber the repeat samples sequentially.
Repeat List The system displays the repeat run candidate samples for which the
system performed repeat run batch extraction. Repeat run candidate
samples are samples for which the system has not established a repeat
run sample number. If programmed in System Maintenance, the system
automatically generates repeat run sample numbers. If the system is not
automatically generating repeat sample numbers, contact Beckman
Coulter.
4-30 A98352AC
4
Table 4.3 Repeat Order (Requisition) Options (Continued)

Option Description
Regenerate Repeat Req. The system manually generates the repeat orders (requisitions) from the
(F2) flags programmed in Repeat Parameters > Repeat Common > Data
Flag. Use this option if you did not turn on the Auto Repeat
Requisition option in Repeat Parameters > Repeat Common > Data
Flag.
Initialize Repeat Data The system deletes all repeat order (requisition) information.
(F3)
Pending List (F4) The system displays a list of pending repeat samples. Place the samples in
an orange rack for repeat analysis.
3 Enter the sample number of the sample to perform the repeat test.

6 If the sample is manually diluted, select Sample Dilution (F7). The system displays the
Sample Dilution Rate dialog. Enter the dilution rate (1 to 999), and make a manual
dilution of the sample. The system calculates the result according to the dilution rate.
Select OK. The system changes the sample dilution rate.
7 To repeat specific tests in the sample, select a test. Select Test Dilution (F8) to change
from normal (blue), diluted (green), or concentrated (yellow) analysis, according to the
settings in the Repeat Specific screen.
8 Select Entry (F2). After the settings have been entered, the system displays the order
(requisition) for the next sample number.
9 To modify more repeat sample orders (requisitions) of the same sample kind or type,
repeat steps 6 to 8.
10 Select Exit (F1).
11 To modify more repeat sample orders (requisitions) with a different sample kind or
type, repeat steps 2 to 10.
12 If you changed the repeat order (requisition), select Pending List (F4) or print a repeat
worklist. For more information, refer to Print and Confirm the Repeat Run Worklist.
Delete a Repeat Order (Requisition)
2 Select Delete Requisition (F6).

A98352AC 4-31
3 In Sample Kind, select the sample kind and type to delete.
4 Enter a specific sample number or Sample ID to delete. To delete all sample numbers,
leave the asterisk.
5 Select Delete.
6 To renumber the repeat sample numbers sequentially, select Re-number Repeat

Samples.
7 Print a repeat worklist. For more information, refer to Print and Confirm the Repeat
Run Worklist.
Print and Confirm the Repeat Run Worklist
CAUTION
3 Select Print (F8). The system displays the Print dialog.
4 In Print Type, select any print worklist. Before the list is available to print, format the list
as a Repeat List in System > Format > List Format.
5 In List Format, select the list format to print.

In Reporter, the system displays the Operator Name entered in the Start Condition
screen. If necessary, enter a new name or use Select to enter a pre-programmed
comment. Reporter is an option that can be added to a list format, and only prints if it is
formatted.
6 Select Print. The system prints the repeat run worklist.
7 Confirm the contents of the printed repeat run worklist. Process the repeat run samples
from the worklist contents.
Perform a Manual Repeat in an Orange Rack

Orange racks are defined for sample type (serum, urine, other-1, or other-2) and sample
kind (routine or emergency) in System > System Condition > Analysis Mode.
1 Obtain the samples for the repeat run using the repeat run worklist.
2 Place the repeat samples in the correct orange rack for sample type and kind according
to the repeat run order (requisition) in the worklist.
4-32 A98352AC
4
Print Results
3 Place the orange racks on the rack input component.

4 To start repeat analysis, select Start.
Print Results
Print results in a report or data log list.
NOTE
Reports and lists are formatted for your laboratory during installation and as needed.
For additional help with formatting a new or existing report or list, contact Beckman
Coulter.
For more information on format and print options, refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
Print Sample Data Reports
1 Select Home > Sample Manager > Sample > Main.
Figure 4.25 Sample: Main Tab
2 The system displays the data from the current index with all samples selected
(highlighted in blue).
— Select Deselect All Samples to clear the selection of all samples from the list. You
can then select specific samples to print from the list.
— Select Select All Samples to select all samples the system displays in the list.
— Select Abnormal to select only samples with a flag.
A98352AC 4-33
Print Results
Continue to step 4 to print the selected data from the current index. If the system does
not display the desired sample data to print on the list, continue to step 3.
3 Select Search (F3) to search for data by an index range, sample numbers, sample ID,
patient demographics, data not transferred to LIS, or data not printed.
— To search for data in a specific index or index range, for Index, enter the starting
and ending index, and then select OK.
— To search for data by more criteria in the index range, select Search Sample, enter
the additional criteria, and then select OK.
Figure 4.26 Search Dialog
4 Select Print (F8). The system displays the Print dialog.
5 In List Format, select the report to print.

formatted.
TIP
Operators can select and print any available predefined report.
6 Select OK. The system prints the report.
NOTE
To cancel printing, select Cancel Print (F8).
4-34 A98352AC
4
Print Results
Print Reagent Blank, Calibration, and QC Results
1 Select Home > Sample Manager > RB/CAL/QC.
Figure 4.27 Sample Manager: RB/CAL/QC Screen
2 In Index, select the index of the reagent blank, calibration, or QC data to search.
3 Select the Sample Kind to print.

— In Search Sample No., enter the sample number range to print. To print all samples,
leave the asterisk.
NOTE
If Search Sample No. is empty, the system does not use search criteria for the
search.
— In QC/Cal No., enter the QC number (1 to 100) or the calibrator number (1 to 200).
To print all QC and calibrator numbers, leave the asterisk.
— To print samples with a specific QC or calibrator ID, in Search Control/Calibrator ID,
enter the QC or calibrator bar code number.
— To print only the reagent blank, calibrator, and QC samples that the system has not
transferred to the laboratory information system, select Data Not Transferred to
Host. To print only the reagent blank, calibrator, and QC samples that the system
has not printed, select Data Not Printed.
4 Select Print (F8).
5 In List Format, select the report to print.

A98352AC 4-35
Batch Transfer Data to the Laboratory Information System
formatted.
6 Select OK. The system prints the report.
NOTE
To cancel printing, select Cancel Print (F8).
IMPORTANT
Before transferring data to the laboratory information system, confirm that the
AU5800 is online and connected to a laboratory information system.
Sample Data
If the data does not automatically transfer to the laboratory information system, you can
manually batch transfer the sample data to the laboratory information system.
The Transfer to Online (F7) option is only available when Realtime or Batch for Results
Transfer is programmed in Menu List > System > Online. If the system is programmed to
Realtime, you can only transfer data in Standby mode.
1 Select Home > Sample Manager > Sample > Main.
Figure 4.28 Sample: Main Tab
4-36 A98352AC
4
2 The system displays the data from the current index with all samples selected
(highlighted in blue).
— Select Deselect All Samples to clear the selection of all samples from the list. You
can then select specific samples to transfer from the list.
— Select Select All Samples to select all samples the system displays on the list.
— Select Abnormal to select only samples with a flag.
Continue to step 4 to transfer the selected data from the current index. If the system
does not display the desired sample data to transfer on the list, continue to step 3.
3 Select Search (F3) to search for data by an index range, sample numbers, sample ID,
patient demographics, data not transferred to LIS, or data not printed.
— To search for data in a specific index or index range, for Index, enter the starting
and ending index, and then select OK.
— To search for data by additional criteria in the index range, select Search Sample,
enter the additional criteria, and then select OK.
4 Select Transfer to Online (F7). The system opens the Online Transfer dialog.
5 Select OK. The system transfers the data.

The system attaches an r flag to data that was transferred to the laboratory information
system.
Reagent Blank, Calibration, and QC Data

You can transfer reagent blank, calibration, and QC data to a laboratory information
system.
The Online Transfer (F7) option is only available when Realtime or Batch for Results Transfer
is programmed in Menu List > System > Online. If the system is programmed to Realtime,
you can only transfer data in Standby mode.
1 Select Home > Sample Manager > RB/CAL/QC.
A98352AC 4-37
Figure 4.29 Sample Manager: RB/CAL/QC Screen
2 In Index, select the index of the reagent blank, calibration, or QC data to search.
3 Select Sample Kind to transfer.

— In Search Sample No., enter the sample number range to transfer. To transfer all
samples, leave the asterisk.
NOTE
If Search Sample No. is empty, the system does not use search criteria for the
search.
— In QC/Cal No., enter the QC number (1 to 100) or the calibrator number (1 to 200).
To transfer all QC and calibrator numbers, leave the asterisk.
— To transfer samples with a specific QC or calibrator ID, in Search Control/Calibrator
ID, enter the QC or calibrator bar code number.
— To transfer only the reagent blank, calibrator, and QC samples that the system has
not transferred to the laboratory information system, select Data Not Transferred
to Host. To transfer only the reagent blank, calibrator, and QC samples that the
system has not printed, select Data Not Printed.
4 Select Transfer to Online (F7).
5 Select OK. The system performs the online transfer.
NOTE
To stop the transfer, select Online Transfer Stop (F7).
4-38 A98352AC
CHAPTER 5
System Monitoring and Results
Monitoring Analysis
The system status is continuously updated while the system is operating. Progress is
constantly monitored.
Monitor Results
Confirm that daily reagent blank, calibration, and QC results are acceptable before
reporting sample results. Review all results including reagent blank, calibration, QC, and
samples for flags. Take corrective actions before reporting any results with flags. Review
the Alarm List and take corrective actions for any generated alarms.
For more information on monitoring the results, refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
For more information on troubleshooting and corrective actions, refer to Troubleshooting

Reagents, Calibrators, Quality Control, and Samples.
Identifying Sample Kinds and Types by Sample Data Prefix
NOTE
The system displays the sample data prefix in front of the sample number.
Table 5.1 Sample Data Prefix

Type Normal Run Repeat Run
Routine Serum (None) H
Urine U HU
Other-1 X HX
Other-2 Y HY
Emergency Sample Serum E HE
Urine UE HUE
Other-1 XE HXE
Other-2 YE HYE
QC Q
CAL A
RB R
A98352AC 5-1
Monitoring Analysis
Sample Status Screen

Select Sample Status to view sample information, estimated time of completion, and results.
1 Select Home > Sample Status > Status.

The system displays the Status screen.
Figure 5.1 Sample Status: Status Screen
1. Program operator-defined patient

demographics
Table 5.2 Status Screen Description
Item Description
Sample No. The sample number highlighted in the rack color.
Cup Position The rack ID and cup position highlighted in the rack color.
Sample ID The sample ID (number on the bar code label).
Order The time the cup in the rack passed the cup detector on the rack input
component.
Status In Process during sample analysis, or Done after analysis is complete.
Results The estimated completion time during sample analysis, or Error if the
results have a flag.
Search (F2) Enter a sample ID to search and display sample status.
5-2 A98352AC
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.2 Status Screen Description (Continued)

Item Description
Switch to Static View Changes the View mode from Realtime to Static to prevent the display
(F4) from automatically scrolling the results. Select Switch to Realtime View
(F4) to return to realtime display.
Sample Manager (F5) Goes to the Sample Manager screen.
Reaction Monitor Goes to the Reaction Monitor screen.

(F6)
ISE Maintenance (F7) Goes to the ISE Maintenance screen.
NOTE
You can program two operator-defined patient demographic items. For more
information, refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
2 Select a sample, and then select Detail to view detailed sample information. The system
displays the test name with the result or the test result time to completion. If the result
does not have any flags, the test is highlighted in green, or if the result has a flag, the
test is highlighted in red. Select a test with a flag to view the flag description in
<Contents of Error>.
Figure 5.2 Sample Status: Detail Screen
3 Select Realtime Display to view the sample results. The system displays tests without
flags in black, and tests with flags in red. The All tab displays the samples in completion
order when all tests ordered (requisitioned) on the sample are complete. The Quick tab
displays results from the red racks only. The Quick tab displays the ISE tests, and tests
with only an R1 reagent with read points before P10, when the tests are complete. The
ISE tab displays the ISE tests when the ISE tests are complete.
A98352AC 5-3
Monitoring Analysis
Figure 5.3 Sample Status: Realtime Display Screen

The Analyzer Status screen displays a color-coded overview of the system. The system
monitors the status of the incubator, reagent refrigerators, rack feeder unit, deionized
water tanks, wash solution tanks, waste tanks, printer, and LIS communication.
The system monitors the ISE unit and reagents when the ISE unit is installed.
The colors of the system components indicate the status.
NOTE
Table 5.3 System Status

Color Status
Blue No errors
Yellow or Orange Non-fatal error. You can start the ISE or analyzer
unit.
Red Fatal error. You cannot start the ISE or analyzer
unit.
1 Select Home > Analyzer Status.

The system displays the Analyzer Status screen.
5-4 A98352AC
5
Monitoring Analysis
Figure 5.4 Analyzer Status Screen
1. Lane status 4. ISE unit status

2. Analyzer unit top status 5. Rack feeder unit status
3. Analyzer unit front status
NOTE
The screen display changes with the number of connected analyzer units. The ISE
unit does not display if the ISE unit is not connected.
2 Select Rack Data (F1) to view the time a rack was detected on the rack input component
(Pre-Analysis), the time the rack moved to the rack output component (Post-Analysis),
the rack ID, and the rack entry location. Select a rack in the left table to view the sample
No. or sample ID of the samples on the rack in the right table.
NOTE
The system indicates a rack that includes a repeat run sample with an asterisk. If
you select Required a Repeat Run, the system displays only racks with an asterisk.
A98352AC 5-5
Monitoring Analysis
Figure 5.5 Rack Data Dialog
3 Confirm that the system components are within the acceptable limits (blue).
Investigate any yellow or red conditions.
1. Lane Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more information, refer
to Lane Status.
2. Analyzer Unit Top Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
3. Analyzer Unit Front Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
4. ISE Unit Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more information,
refer to ISE Unit Status.
5. Rack Feeder Unit Status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Rack Feeder Unit Status.
Lane Status
Table 5.4 Lane Status
Color Status
Blue Normal
Red An error has occurred
Table 5.5 Rack Information that Displays on Screen

Rack Information
Position Display the position of the rack on the rack feeder unit or transport lanes.
Color Display the sample kind of the rack. Refer to Table 5.6.
Number Display the rack ID.
* Racks loaded from the priority rack input component.
5-6 A98352AC
5
Monitoring Analysis
NOTE
Select a rack to display Sample Status.
Table 5.6 Sample Kind and Rack Color

Sample Kind Rack Color Comment
Original run Routine White
Emergency Red
Manual Repeat Routine Orange
Emergency Orange
Auto Repeat Routine White
Emergency Red
Calibrator Yellow
White Enabling the white rack
for calibration requires
settings by Beckman
Coulter. For more
information, contact
Beckman Coulter.
Reagent blank Blue
QC Green
White Enabling the white rack
for QC requires settings
by Beckman Coulter. For
more information,
contact Beckman
Coulter.
A98352AC 5-7
Monitoring Analysis
Analyzer Unit Top Status
Figure 5.6 Analyzer Unit Top Status
1. Unit Status 3. R1 Reagent Refrigerator Status

2. R2 Reagent Refrigerator Status 4. Incubator Status
• When you select R1 or R2, the system displays Reagent Management.
• When you select Incubator, the system displays Analyzer Maintenance > Photocal
Monitor.
Table 5.7 Unit Status
Color Status
Blue Measure, Standby, Pause
Yellow Initialize, Warm Up
Red Stop, W1, W2, Photocal
Gray Not connected
Table 5.8 Incubator Status

Color Status
Blue Normal
Red or Orange A cuvette or lamp error exists. For more information, refer to Perform a
Photocal. The red or orange status is determined by system programming
by Beckman Coulter at installation. Contact Beckman Coulter for more
information.
Reagent Refrigerator (R1, R2):

Table 5.9 R1 and R2 Reagent Refrigerator Status
Color Status
Blue Normal
5-8 A98352AC
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.9 R1 and R2 Reagent Refrigerator Status (Continued)

Color Status
Yellow A caution exists in the Reagent Management screen. For example:

Calibration Expires Soon.
Orange A warning exists in the Reagent Management screen. For example:

Calibration Expired.
Red The reagent refrigerator cover has been opened, a reagent check is in
progress, or a reagent check has not been performed.
Bath Temp. (displays the temperature of the incubator)

Table 5.10 Incubator Temperature Status
Color Status
Blue Normal
Red Exceeds temperature specification
Coolant Temp. (displays the temperature of the reagent refrigerator)

Table 5.11 R1 and R2 Refrigerator Temperature Status
Color Status
Blue Normal
Orange Exceeds temperature specification
Analyzer Unit Front Status
Figure 5.7 Analyzer Unit Front Status
Deionized (DI) water, Diluted Wash Solution (Det.), and Wash Solution (Master Det.):
The status of the liquid quantity in the deionized water tank (D.I. Water), diluted wash
solution tank (Det.), and wash solution (Master Det.) for each analyzer unit.
Table 5.12 Deionized Water, Diluted Wash Solution, and Wash Solution Tank Status
Color Status
Blue Normal
A98352AC 5-9
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.12 Deionized Water, Diluted Wash Solution, and Wash Solution Tank Status
(Continued)
Color Status
Yellow Over-full
Red Insufficient
NOTE
The status becomes over-full when the top float sensor in the tank moves to the
maximum up position. The status becomes Insufficient when the bottom float sensor in
the tank moves to the maximum down position.
The status of the vacuum tank, concentrated waste tank, and waste tank for each analyzer
unit.
Table 5.13 Vacuum Tank, Concentrated Waste Tank, and Waste Tank Status
Color Status
Blue Normal
Red Full
ISE Unit Status
Figure 5.8 ISE Unit Status
1. ISE cover is open
ISE Unit (Option)
5-10 A98352AC
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.14 Cell 1 and Cell 2 Status

Color Status
Blue Ready or Measure
Yellow Stop or Initialize
Red Busy
Gray Not connected
ISE Reagents
Table 5.15 ISE Reference Solution (REF), ISE MID Standard Solution (MID), and ISE Buffer
Solution (BUF) Status
Color Status
Blue Normal
Yellow Insufficient
ISE Cover
Table 5.16 ISE Cover Status
Color Status
Red ISE cover is open
NOTE
The ISE cover status only displays when the ISE cover is open.
Rack Feeder Unit Status
NOTE
A98352AC 5-11
Monitoring Analysis
Figure 5.9 Rack Feeder Unit Status
1. Rack Output Tray 3. Rack Input Tray

2. Rack Buffer Component
The rack color and ID displays for the rack currently moving from the rack input tray to the
rack buffer component, and the rack moving from the return lane to the rack output tray.
The rack output tray is red if the tray is full.
Rack Buffer Component
The rack line type indicates the status of the rack on the rack buffer component.
Table 5.17 Rack Status
Line Type Status
Normal line frame A rack is not present, or the rack has been analyzed and is waiting to move
to the rack output tray.
Bold line frame The rack is waiting to move to the bypass lane or primary sample transport
lane for the original run.
Dotted line frame The rack is waiting to move to the bypass lane for an auto repeat run.
Table 5.18 Rack Output Tray Status

Color Status
Red Rack is full
5-12 A98352AC
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.18 Rack Output Tray Status (Continued)

Color Status
Gray Rack is not full
Master Wash Solution Tank
The status of the liquid quantity of wash solution in the master wash solution tank (Master
Det.).
Table 5.19 Master Wash Solution Tank Status
Display Color Status
Blue Normal
Yellow Insufficient
Confirm the ISE Status
1 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Calibration.
2 Review the Calibration tab.

a. Inspect the ISE status.
NOTE
If there are two flowcells, select Cell 1 or Cell 2 to view the status of each
flowcell.
A98352AC 5-13
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.20 ISE Status

READY Blue Ready to start analysis or maintenance.
BUSY Red Operating.
MEASURE Blue Analysis is in progress (ISE).
PAUSE Blue Analysis is going to Pause.
STOP Yellow The ISE is in Stop status. Select ISE Ready (F4) to
return the ISE status to Ready.
UNCONNECT Gray The ISE is not communicating with the DPR when you
turn on the system.
INITIAL Yellow The ISE is initializing.
b. Inspect the electrode status. The electrode status indicates if the most recent slope
value is in range for Na, K, and Cl.
NOTE
flowcell.
Table 5.21 Electrode Status

Color Description
Blue The slope value is within the acceptable range, and ISE calibration was
performed within 24 hours.
Yellow
— The slope value is not within the acceptable range.
— ISE calibration has not been performed within 24 hours. The system
uses the most recent ISE calibration results.
Gray No calibration data exists for the electrode.
c. Inspect the reagent status. The reagent status indicates if the reagent level is short
for ISE Buffer Solution, ISE MID Standard Solution, and ISE Reference Solution.
NOTE
flowcell.
Table 5.22 Reagent Status

Color Description
Blue The reagent level is above the reagent short level sensor, indicating
reagent is sufficient.
5-14 A98352AC
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.22 Reagent Status (Continued)

Color Description
Yellow The reagent is below the reagent short level sensor, indicating reagent is
not sufficient.
d. The Date/Time indicates the date and time the system performs the calibration.
e. The Slope indicates the calibration slope for Na, K, and Cl. A larger slope value
indicates a steeper slope (a larger potential).
f. The MID Solution Factor indicates the value that the system obtained from the
concentration of the ISE MID Standard Solution to establish a reference for
measuring Na, K, and Cl ion concentrations.
3 Inspect the slope chart. The slope chart contains records of slope values that the system
obtained from calibration. You can view slope charts in graph form for Na, K, and Cl.
a. Select Slope Chart.
Figure 5.11 ISE Maintenance: Slope Chart Tab
b. In Type, select Switch to select Serum or Urine.

The system displays the 30 most recent slope values in a chart. Identify the Na, K,
and Cl slope by color. In the Min Slope and Max Slope fields, the system displays the
maximum and minimum Na, K, and Cl slope values.
Although Cl slope values are negative values, the slope chart displays their absolute
values.
A98352AC 5-15
Disable a Test
Disable a Test
You can select specific tests to prevent analysis (the test is unavailable for patient analysis)
even when the test has an order (requisition). If the calibration failed for that test, or QC
fails and samples are in process, it can be useful to make a test unavailable.
You can make a test unavailable (disabled) or available (enabled) during Measure mode.
Analysis of the test stops or restarts after you select Disable (F7).
Reagent blank, calibration, and QC samples for the disabled tests remain available for
analysis.
The system displays and prints tests that are unavailable (disabled) with a / flag, indicating
that the test was ordered (requisitioned) but not performed.
Settings in the Disable dialog are in effect until a new index is set, or you shut down the
system (End Process).
1 Select Home > Start Condition.
Figure 5.12 Start Condition Screen
2 Select Disable (F7). The system opens the Disable dialog, and displays a list of tests to
make unavailable (disable).
5-16 A98352AC
5
Review Results for Flags and Alarms
Figure 5.13 Disable Dialog
3 Select the Unit.
4 Select the tests to make unavailable (disable). The system highlights tests that are
unavailable (disabled) in orange. The Unit displays Disabled.
5 Select OK to save the settings. The system returns to the Start Condition screen.
NOTE
The system displays a message if one or more tests are disabled on the Message
Display on the Home screen.

After the system generates results, review them for analytical validity.
Review the results using the Sample Status screen or the printout. For more information,
refer to Sample Status Screen.
Review Results for Flags

If a problem occurred during analysis, the system appends a flag to the analysis results.
Review all results carefully for flags and take the correct action.
For more information, refer to Flags.
Review Alarms
Review for alarms that occurred during analysis:
To display alarms, select Alarm List (the button on the lower-right corner of the screen).
A98352AC 5-17
Figure 5.14 Alarm List Screen
The Level column displays the alarm level (numbers and color).
Table 5.23 Alarm Level

Level Color Description
Level 1 Red A fatal system abnormality exists.
Level 2 Yellow An abnormality influencing the data exists.
Level 3 Green No system abnormality. The system displays the operation log.
The Count (at the top-right) indicates the quantity of alarms within the specified date
range. The system can store and display a maximum of 4,096 cases. You can scroll using the
scroll bar.
From the Alarm List screen, you can select:

• Print - Prints a list of all alarms.
• Refresh - The system returns the screen to the most recent alarms.
• Help - The system displays a description of the alarm and the corrective actions.
• Search - Search for alarms by date, alarm number, or alarm level.
• Close - The system closes the Alarm List screen.
NOTE
The alarm help information is only available in the Alarm List. The AU5800 Instructions
for Use and AU5800 Reference Manual do not contain alarm descriptions and
corrective actions.
5-18 A98352AC
5
Interpreting Lipemia, Icterus, and Hemolysis (LIH) Results

Sample Specific LIH
Each sample prints with a flag for Normal (N) through Abnormal (ABN) for levels of:
• Lipemia (LIP)
• Icterus (ICT)
• Hemolysis (HEM)
The system generates each flag determined by the parameters in Parameters > Specific Test
Parameters > LIH for the LIH test.
Table 5.24 Sample Specific LIH Flags
Name Flags
LIP (lipemia) N + ++ +++ ++++ +++++ ABN
ICT (icterus) N + ++ +++ ++++ +++++ ABN
HEM (hemolysis) N + ++ +++ ++++ +++++ ABN
A result of ABN (abnormal) means the mathematical logic in determining the amount of
interference failed one or more internal evaluations. Visually inspect the sample to
determine the amount of lipemia, icterus, and hemolysis present in the sample.
Test Specific LIH
When the level of interfering substances exceeds the criteria programmed for a specific test
in Specific Test Parameters, the system attaches an l, i, or h flag to the result affected by
lipemia, icterus, or hemolysis.
When LIH testing is not performed on a sample, the system attaches an n flag to the result.
The n flag differentiates LIH testing not being performed, and LIH not influencing the test.
The system typically generates an n flag when the LIH reagent is empty, or the LIH test was
not ordered (requisitioned).
Na, K, and Cl tests are not evaluated for assay specific LIH criteria and do not generate the n
flag.
LIH Reagent IFU
WARNING
The concentrations listed in the table are for reference. Depending on the matrix
effect with an individual serum sample, some results may not meet the listed
concentrations.
Table 5.25 Approximate Concentration of Chromatic Substance

Flag LIP (mg/dL ICT (mg/dL HEM (mg/dL Hemoglobin)
Intralipid) Bilirubin)
N <40 <2.5 <50
+ 40 to 99 2.5 to 4.9 50 to 99
A98352AC 5-19
Reagent Management
Table 5.25 Approximate Concentration of Chromatic Substance (Continued)

Flag LIP (mg/dL ICT (mg/dL HEM (mg/dL Hemoglobin)
Intralipid) Bilirubin)
++ 100 to 199 5.0 to 9.9 100 to 199
+++ 200 to 299 10.0 to 19.9 200 to 299
++++ 300 to 500 20 to 40 300 to 500
+++++ >500 >40 >500
Figure 5.15 Example of LIH Evaluation
According to the Direct Bilirubin IFU (example), Interfering Substances are:

• Hemolysis: No significant interference up to 10 mg/dL Hemolysate
• Lipemia: No significant interference up to 300 mg/dL Intralipid
NOTE
The interference information from the Direct Bilirubin IFU (example) is provided as an
example. For the current interference information on direct bilirubin, refer to the
Direct Bilirubin IFU.
According to the LIH Reagent IFU Table:

• A hemoglobin rating of ++ is equivalent to 100 to 199 mg/dL in the sample. Since the
Direct Bilirubin IFU indicates no significant interference only up to 10 mg/dL, the
system attaches an h flag in the printout to the DBIL result to indicate that the
performance of this test could have been affected by hemolysis.
• A lipemia rating of + is equivalent to 40 to 99 mg/dL of Intralipid in the sample. Since
the Direct Bilirubin IFU indicates no significant interference up to 300 mg/dL, the
system does not attach an l flag to the DBIL result.
Reagent Management
Reagents
Most Beckman Coulter reagents are liquid and ready to place in the reagent refrigerator
after removing the cap. If a reagent requires preparation, refer to the Chemistry
Information Sheet before loading the reagent into the reagent refrigerator.
The system can use four sizes of reagent bottles:

• 15 mL
• 30 mL
• 60 mL
5-20 A98352AC
5
Reagent Management
• 180 mL
Table 5.26 Adapter and Partition Part Numbers
Part Name Part Number
15 mL reagent bottle adapter MU852700 (2pcs), MU852900 (20pcs)
30 mL reagent bottle adapter MU852700 (2pcs), MU853000 (20pcs)
Removable Partition MU856200 (20pcs)
The reagent tray in the R1 and R2 refrigerators uses partitions between the 15 mL, 30 mL,
60 mL, and 180 mL bottles, and adapters to hold 15 mL and 30 mL reagent bottles securely
in position. 180 mL bottles occupy three positions on the reagent tray. If necessary, remove
two partitions to load a 180 mL bottle on the tray.
Replace adapters when the pins are damaged, or when the adapter no longer clicks into
place on the reagent tray.
Each of the R1 and R2 refrigerators holds up to 54 reagent bottles. 180 mL reagent bottles
occupy three positions on the reagent tray, and reduce the maximum quantity of bottles
respectively.
Commercial Reagent Bottles

Commercial reagent bottles not sold by Beckman Coulter are available in the Japan and
Asia markets.
If the color of the commercial reagent bottle is too light for the bottle sensor to detect,
apply a label as shown in Figure 5.16 Apply a Label to a Reagent Bottle. The part number
for the labels is MU987900.
Figure 5.16 Apply a Label to a Reagent Bottle
1. Label 2. Reagent bottle
When you use commercial reagent bottles, the test count displayed on the Reagent
Management screen can differ from the remaining test count. The system uses the liquid
A98352AC 5-21
Reagent Management
level in the bottle to calculate the test count. Because the bottle is different from the
Beckman Coulter reagent bottles, the calculation can be incorrect.
Fill Reagent Bottles
CAUTION
Bubbles in the reagent bottle can interfere with analysis. Inspect the reagent bottles
for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a cotton-tipped applicator before loading the
reagent.
CAUTION
Do not add new reagent to existing bottles. Adding new reagent to existing bottles
can affect results.
CAUTION
When you fill AU bottles with reagent, wash solution, or deionized water, do not
exceed the maximum volume. The maximum volume depends on the bottle size. If a
reagent bottle is filled over the maximum liquid level limit, bubbles can occur and
cause a level detection error.
5-22 A98352AC
5
Reagent Management
Figure 5.17 Maximum Liquid Level
1. 15 mL bottle 6. 12 mm
2. 8 mm 7. Maximum liquid level
3. 30 mL bottle 8. 180 mL bottle
4. 4 mm 9. 20 mm
5. 60 mL bottle
Add Adapters to the Reagent Tray

The 30 mL and 15 mL bottles require reagent tray adapters.
1 Insert the long pin of the adapter into the elongated hole in the reagent tray.
A98352AC 5-23
Reagent Management
Figure 5.18 Insert Adapter
1. Elongated Hole
2 Push the adapter toward the center of the tray. Refer to arrow 1 in Figure 5.18 Insert
Adapter.
3 Press the adapter down until it clicks into the other hole on the reagent tray. Refer to
arrow 2 in Figure 5.18 Insert Adapter.
4 Confirm that the adapter is secure on the reagent tray. The top of the reagent tray (with
the position numbers) must be level with the top of the adapter protrusion.
Figure 5.19 Confirm Adapter Placement in Reagent Tray
1. Adapter protrusion 2. Top of the reagent tray with the

position number
Remove Adapters from the Reagent Tray

Replace adapters when the pins appear damaged, or the adapter no longer clicks when you
place it on the reagent tray.
1 Hold the reagent tray so that reagents do not spill.

2 Lift the adapter in the direction shown in Figure 5.20 Remove Adapter from the
Reagent Tray .
5-24 A98352AC
5
Reagent Management
Figure 5.20 Remove Adapter from the Reagent Tray
Assign a Reagent Position

You can place reagents that have bar code labels in any available (not assigned) position on
the reagent tray. For reagents without bar code labels, assign the reagent to a fixed
position. Place reagents without a bar code label in the correct assigned position.
1 Select Home > Reagent Management > Details.

The system indicates assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk highlighted in blue in
the column to the left of the Pos. column.
NOTE
Before assigning a position, confirm that the reagent status is Checked. If the
reagent status is Unchecked, select Reagent Check (F5), and then select Reset.
A98352AC 5-25
Reagent Management
Figure 5.21 Reagent Management: Details Tab
2 Select Unit No.
3 In Reagent Display, select Position.
4 In Content, select R1 to assign a position in the R1 refrigerator, or R2 to assign a position

in the R2 refrigerator.
5 Select an open position to assign to the reagent.

6 Select Position Setting (F2).
Figure 5.22 Position Setting Dialog
7 Select Fixed Reagent, and then select Close.

The system indicates assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk highlighted in blue in
the column to the left of the Pos. column.
8 Select Edit (F1).
5-26 A98352AC
5
Reagent Management
Figure 5.23 Edit Dialog

b. In Type, the system displays R1 (R1-1) or R2 (R2-1). If necessary, select R1 (R1-2) or
R2 (R2-2).
c. In Lot No., enter a lot number according to your laboratory procedure.
d. In Bottle No.(SN), enter a bottle number according to your laboratory procedure.
e. In Bottle Size, select the reagent bottle size.
f. Select Close.
9 If the reagent has an R2 bottle, repeat steps 4 to 8 with Content selected for R2.
10 Confirm that the system indicates assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk
highlighted in blue in the column to the left of the Pos. column.
11 Select Reagent Check (F5).

The system displays the Reagent Check dialog.
12 Select the unit number that you assigned.

Unit number does not display for a one-unit system.
13 Select Check specified positions, and then select the positions that you assigned.
14 Select Start.
The system performs a reagent check at the specified positions, and updates the test
count on the Details tab.
Edit a Reagent ID
Edit the reagent ID after a reagent ID read error occurs on a bar code labeled reagent
bottle.
A notification alarm occurs during the reagent check (Reagent ID Read Error), and the
system displays the comment ID Edit until the reagent bottle is removed from the
refrigerator.
1 Select Home > Reagent Management > Details.
2 Select Unit No.

A98352AC 5-27
System Shutdown (End Process)
3 In Reagent Display, select Position.
4 Place the cursor on the position with the reagent ID read error.
5 Select ID Edit (F3).
Figure 5.24 ID Edit Dialog
6 Type in the 20-digit reagent ID from the reagent bottle. Select OK.
The system updates the onboard stability, expiration, lot number, and bottle number
with a No Volume to Process comment.
7 Select Reagent Check (F5), and then select Check specified positions to update the test
count. The system displays a Reagent ID Read Error alarm and ID Edit comment.
The system updates the RB stability and cal stability.
System Shutdown (End Process)

Shutting down the system (an End Process) turns off the analyzer lamp(s) and the
computer. The system maintains the refrigerator and incubator temperatures. The ISE unit
performs an automatic prime with ISE MID Standard Solution every hour to keep the
electrodes conditioned.
You can initiate a system shutdown after you start a W2 or photocal. If you initiate a system
shutdown after you start a W2 or photocal, the W2 or photocal completes, and then the
system shuts down. For more information, refer to Perform a W2 or Perform a Photocal.
1 Select Home.
2 Select End .
5-28 A98352AC
5
Pause Analysis
Figure 5.25 End Dialog
3 Review the next auto on time.

a. To set an auto on time, select Yes in Auto Start Up.
b. In Date and Time, select the date and time for the system to turn on.
c. To turn off the auto on time, in Auto Start Up select No.
NOTE
Beckman Coulter programs Auto Preparation in the System Maintenance menu

during installation. Programming options in the Auto Power On screen include a
daily time for Auto On and Auto Preparation. The Auto Preparation is the weekly
photocal.
NOTE
A Beckman Coulter Representative uses Database Backup in specific, limited

situations.
If you select Database Backup, the system requires up to 40 minutes to complete

the data backup.
4 Select Yes. The system shuts down.
IMPORTANT
Follow your laboratory procedure for turning off the deionized water supply.
Pause Analysis
You can pause the analyzer to add reagent and then resume analysis.
A98352AC 5-29
Pause Analysis
CAUTION
Do not leave the system paused for an extended time. When you pause the analyzer
for an extended time, the concentration of the samples in the sample cups increases
from evaporation and the evaporation can affect results.
CAUTION
Do not remove or add racks while the system is paused, as it can cause concordance
errors.
1 Select Pause . The system displays the Pause dialog.

The system selects all units to go to Pause.
2 To continue analysis on a unit, cancel the selection on the unit.
TIP
The unit number does not display for a one-unit system.
3 Select OK.
The system displays the analyzer unit mode as => PAUSE until analysis completes for all
samples in progress on each unit selected for Pause. When the system changes the
analyzer unit mode to Pause, you can add reagent and perform a reagent check.
Analysis continues on units that were not selected for Pause mode, and the racks move
to the rack output trays. Tests that were not processed on units in Pause mode display
with the / flag.
CAUTION
To avoid injury or damage to the reagent probes, confirm that the analyzer unit is
in Pause mode before adding reagents or performing a reagent check.
Resuming Analysis from Pause Mode

Analysis starts at the next test for analysis after you selected Pause.
1 Select Start. The system displays the Start dialog.
2 Confirm that all units are selected to start analysis.

3 Select Start. The system restarts analysis.
5-30 A98352AC
5
Rack Feeder Stop
Rack Feeder Stop

You can stop the rack feeder to insert an emergency or routine rack before other racks
during analysis.
When you stop the rack feeder, analysis continues for the racks that moved from the rack
input trays.
CAUTION
Do not leave the rack feeder stopped for an extended time. When you stop the rack
feeder for an extended time, the concentration of the samples in the sample cups
increases from evaporation and can affect results.
Stop the Rack Feeder
1 Select Feeder Stop . The system displays the Feeder Stop dialog.
2 Select OK. The system displays the rack feed operation stop message. Racks that were
moved from the rack input trays continue analysis.
Restart Analysis After Rack Feeder Stop
1 When the rack feeder is stopped, use normal ordering (requisition) procedures. For
more information, refer to Order (Requisition) for Routine and Emergency Samples.
2 Select Start. The system displays the Start dialog.
3 Select Start. The system restarts analysis.
Stop Analysis
To stop analysis immediately, perform a system stop.
CAUTION
If you stop the system during Measure mode, any data that is not complete is lost
and you must reanalyze the samples.
CAUTION
A98352AC 5-31
Perform an Emergency Stop
1 Select Stop/Standby during analysis operation. The system displays the Stop dialog
with a confirmation message.
2 Select OK. All analysis operation stops, and the system changes to Stop mode.
3 Remove all racks from the system except for racks on the rack input trays, priority rack
input component, and rack output trays.
Return to Standby Mode from Stop Mode
1 In Stop, select Stop/Standby . The system displays the Warmup/Standby dialog with a
confirmation to reset the analyzer to Standby mode or Warm up mode.
2 Select OK. The system performs the reset operation. After the system completes the
reset operation, the system changes to Standby mode or Warm up mode.
3 Perform a W1. For more information, refer to Perform a W1.

An emergency stop turns off power immediately to the analyzer and ISE units.
1 Press the EM STOP button (orange button on the front-right of the rack feeder unit). All
power to the analyzer and ISE units turns off immediately. The computer remains on.
To turn off the computer, press [Ctrl] + [ALT] + [Delete]. The computer displays a
Windows Security dialog. Select Shut Down.
2 Remove all racks from the system except for racks on the rack input trays, priority rack
input component, and rack output trays.
Return to Standby Mode After an Emergency Stop
1 Press the RESET button (white button on the front-right of the rack feeder unit) to turn
on the main power, and then wait 5 seconds.
2 Press the ON button (green button on the front-right of the rack feeder unit). The lamp
turns on and the software loads. The system displays a dialog to confirm retrieving the
database.
3 Select OK.
4 In the New Index dialog, select Current Index to continue analysis in the current index.
5-32 A98352AC
5
Using Beckman Coulter PROService (Option)
5 The system is in Warm up mode for 1.5 hours. After the required 20-minute lamp warm
up time, wait until the temperature of the cuvette wheel is 37 °C, and then select Home
> Analyzer Maintenance. Select Stand By (F4) to return to Standby mode.
Using Beckman Coulter PROService (Option)

Beckman Coulter PROService allows operators to transmit parameters and data of the
AU5800 to Beckman Coulter manually. Beckman Coulter can confirm operating status and
provide help for troubleshooting issues with this information.
Transmittable parameters and data on the PROService menu include the following:
• Files such as analysis parameters and system settings in the parameter menu.
• Analysis data.
• Files such as the operation and alarm logs.
• Other files specific to the system, such as the program version.
TIP
The PROService function does not transmit personal information such as patient
information. PROService is an option requiring a separate support contract. Contact
Beckman Coulter for more information.
Transmitting files with PROService
1 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > PROService.
Figure 5.26 User Maintenance: PROService Screen
A98352AC 5-33
Identifying and Reanalyzing Samples after a Cuvette Overflow
2 Select the Output for the data to be transmitted.

3 Select File Transfer (F8). A transmission start confirmation dialog appears.
4 Select OK to transmit the files.

The transmission is complete when the dialog “Please wait” disappears.

A cuvette overflow could have occurred 60 minutes before the system generates the
Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x] alarm. The results
measured during the 60 minutes before the alarm are invalid and must be reanalyzed.
The analyzer changes to Stop mode immediately after the system generates the
Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x] alarm.
NOTE
Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x]:

• A, B: Cuvette numbers with a photometric error. The photometry error check occurs every
41 cuvettes. If the error is detected on two successive cuvettes, the Photometry Error
During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x] is generated.
• C: 1 indicates the inner cuvettes and 2 indicates the outer cuvettes.
• x: The unit number with the photometric error.
WARNING
The tests performed during the 60 minutes before the Photometry Error During
Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x] alarm can have an incorrect result caused by the
overflow. The results are invalid and must be reanalyzed. If you have reported results
or transferred the results to the laboratory information system, take corrective
actions according to your laboratory procedure.
The 60-minute timeframe is the time that the analyzer was in Measure mode. If the
analyzer went into Standby mode and did not remain in Measure mode for 60
consecutive minutes before the alarm, add Standby mode time to the 60-minute
timeframe. For example, if the analyzer was in Standby mode for 20 minutes total,
add 20 minutes to the 60 minutes and search for samples affected by the overflow in
the past 80 minutes.
The overflow occurs either in the inner cuvettes or the outer cuvettes, or both in the
inner and outer cuvettes depending on the failure mode. The code (1 or 2) only
indicates the location where the cuvette overflow is first detected. The cuvette
overflow can spread over both the inner and outer cuvettes. Inspect all results
generated from both the inner and outer cuvettes within the 60-minute timeframe.
Search for samples affected by the overflow.
5-34 A98352AC
5
1 Select Home > Alarm List.
Figure 5.27 Alarm List
2 Search for the alarm message Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B,
C) [Unit x].
3 Note the date, time, and unit number of the alarm.

For example: 2011/01/15 19:20:52 Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash
(10, 51, 1) [Unit 1]
4 Search for the MEASURE START messages. Calculate the time between the Photometry
Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x] alarm and the most recent
MEASURE START message.
— If the time between the alarm and measure message is 60 minutes or longer, the
timeframe for searching samples with invalid data is 60 minutes.
— If the time between the alarm and the measure message is shorter than 60 minutes,
determine the time in Measure mode, and add it to the next time in Measure mode,
and continue adding the time until the total time in Measure mode is 60 minutes.
Add the total time in Standby between the Measure modes and the Photometry
Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x] alarm, and add it to 60
minutes. The result is the timeframe for searching samples with invalid data.
5 Specify the start date and time for the search to identify all the affected indexes. In the
following example, the timeframe for the search is 77 minutes (17 minutes of Standby
time between 18:43:39 and 19:00:21 is added to 60 minutes of Measure time). Calculate
backwards from the Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit
x] alarm (2011 19:20:52) by 77 minutes to obtain the starting date and time for the
search. The starting date and time for the search is then 2011/01/15 18:03:52.
A98352AC 5-35
The affected indexes include the index that was generated immediately before the
starting date and time and all the indexes after the starting date and time. In this
example, the two indexes in bold type are the affected indexes.
2011/01/15 19:20:52 Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash (10,51,1) [Unit 1]
2011/01/15 19:00:21 Measure Start
2011/01/15 18:45:39 INDEX UPDATED (2011/01/15 18:45)
2011/01/15 18:43:39 Measure End
2011/01/15 17:46:24 Measure Start
2011/01/15 17:35:35 INDEX UPDATED (2011/01/15 17:35)
2011/01/15 14:43:32 INDEX UPDATED (2011/01/15 14:43)
NOTE
This information is only an example. Typically, a new index is created once a day or
once a shift.
The ending search date and time is the time when the system generated the
Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash (A, B, C) [Unit x] alarm. In this
example, the time the system generated the alarm is 2011/01/15 19:20:52.
6 Select Menu List > Routine > Data Monitor > Reaction Monitor > Main.
Figure 5.28 Reaction Monitor: Main Tab
7 Select the Unit No. with the cuvette overflow.

5-36 A98352AC
5
8 In Index, select the affected index or the oldest index among the affected indexes
obtained in step 5. In this example, select 2011/01/15 17:35
9 Select all of the available boxes for sample types and kinds that the system has
processed.
10 Select Search Condition (F5).
Figure 5.29 Search Condition Dialog
11 Select Range of Date to specify the dates and times in From and To determined by steps
12 and 13. If you do not specify the date range, the system selects all samples within the
index.
12 Enter the starting date and time for search obtained in step 5 in From. In this example,
enter 2011/01/15 17:46:24.
13 Enter the ending date and time for search obtained in step 5 in To. In this example,
enter 2011/01/15 18:43:39.
14 Select Sample No.
15 Select OK.
16 Select the General tab.
A98352AC 5-37
Figure 5.30 Reaction Monitor: General Tab
17 Select List Display (F3). The system displays a list of samples with invalid data. Reanalyze
these samples.
Figure 5.31 List Display Dialog
18 Repeat steps 6 through 17 for all affected indexes.

5-38 A98352AC
5
Output the List to Media

Precautions for using external storage:
• Inspect for viruses on a separate computer for CD-Rs or USB flash drives and confirm
that no viruses are detected after saving data.
• When using a CD-R, write data on the CD-R and set it to unrecordable.
NOTE
Virus pattern files are information files necessary for virus detection. Update
antivirus software with the latest virus pattern files from the antivirus software
manufacturer regularly. Contact the antivirus manufacturer if needed.
1 Select Output from the List Display dialog.
Figure 5.32 Output Dialog
2 In [Media Select], select the media.
3 Select OK. The system displays the Data Output dialog.
4 Select OK. The Data Output dialog displays the save progress. The name of the saved file
is MeasureList_YYYYMMDD_HHMM.csv, with YYYYMMDD_HHMM as the name of the index.
NOTE
The system does not include pending samples in this list.
5 Select OK to return to the List Display dialog. Remove the media.
6 Data is saved as a csv file. Use a separate computer to open the file and view or print the
list of samples with invalid data.
Print the List
1 Select Print from the List Display dialog.
A98352AC 5-39
Figure 5.33 Print Dialog
2 Select OK.
3 Select Close.
5-40 A98352AC
CHAPTER 6
Maintenance
Maintenance Introduction
The maintenance frequency described in this chapter is determined by analysis of 10,000
or less tests per analyzer unit per day.
Increase the amount of maintenance required depending on the quantity of tests and local
environmental conditions.
Manage the ISE maintenance schedule for biweekly or longer periodic maintenance either
periodically or by the quantity of samples analyzed. The ISE maintenance frequency
described in this chapter is determined by analysis of 200 ISE samples per day.
Calibration may be required after replacement of key parts such as syringes or probes.
After any part replacement or significant maintenance, Beckman Coulter recommends that
you perform QC analysis. If you observe any shifts, calibrate all onboard tests.
Only Beckman Coulter is authorized to replace the fuse close to the breaker on the back of
the rack feeder unit.
IMPORTANT
When the AU5800 is connected to the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system,
Measure 1 mode continues even when no more racks are supplied from the rack loader
unit. To return the system to Standby to perform maintenance procedures, select
Feeder Stop. The analyzer moves to Measure 2, then Standby.
Maintenance Warnings and Cautions
WARNING
Operate the system with the covers down. If you need the covers up during
maintenance, keep all body parts away from the probes and other moving parts of
the system. Serious injury can occur and you can damage the system.
WARNING
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats
when performing any procedure. To avoid injury, observe and follow all the warnings
and cautions throughout this manual.
A98352AC 6-1
Maintenance
Maintenance Warnings and Cautions
CAUTION
Failure to perform maintenance according to the instructions within this manual can
cause problems with system performance and invalidate the service agreement.
CAUTION
When you press the DIAG button the first time after you select a maintenance
procedure option, the unit initializes. To avoid injury, do not touch any moving parts
until the system indicates that the system is ready (as indicated by alarms, modes,
and LEDs).
CAUTION
The sample probe moves to the ISE CLEAN cup position after selecting Home >
Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance, then any of the ISE Maintenance buttons
(Total Prime, Prime Bypass, Buffer Prime, MID/REF Prime, Drain Flowcell, Drain
Bypass), and then pressing the DIAG button. If the ISE cover is open, an ISE Cover
Open [ISE] alarm is generated. Select Alarm Clear to clear the ISE Cover Open audible
alarm. The ISE sample probe initializes when you clear the ISE Maintenance box or
select Update or Cancel after performing ISE maintenance. Keep all body parts out of
the way of the ISE sample probe.
6-2 A98352AC
A98352AC
Maintenance Schedule
The AU5800 has 1, 2, 3, or 4 analyzer units and an optional ISE unit. Mark procedures off for each unit as you complete the
maintenance procedure.
IMPORTANT
For the Japan market, refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the ISE Addendum.
Table 6.1 Daily Maintenance

Daily Maintenance Month and Year:
Inspect the Syringes Unit 1
for Leaks
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
ISE
Inspect the Stability Unit 1

of the Upper Cover
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Maintenance
6-3
6-4 Table 6.1 Daily Maintenance (Continued)
Maintenance
Inspect, Clean, and Unit 1
Prime the Sample
Probes, Reagent Unit 2
Probes, and Mix Bars
Unit 3
Unit 4
Replace the Unit 1

Deionized Water or
Diluent in the Pre- Unit 2
dilution Bottles
Unit 3
Unit 4
Replace the Sample Unit 1

Probe Wash
Solutions Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
ISE
Inspect the Printer Option

and Paper
A98352AC
Table 6.1 Daily Maintenance (Continued)
A98352AC

Inspect the Handle Unit 1
on the Diluted Wash
Solution Tank is in Unit 2
the Open Position
Unit 3
Unit 4
Inspect, Clean, and ISE

Prime the ISE
Sample Probe (ISE
Option)
Clean the ISE (ISE ISE
Option)
Calibrate the ISE (ISE ISE
Option)
Table 6.2 Weekly Maintenance

Weekly Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the Sample Unit 1

Probes and Mix Bars
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Maintenance
ISE
6-5
6-6 Table 6.2 Weekly Maintenance (Continued)
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance Month and Year:
Perform a W2 Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Perform a Photocal Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Clean the Pre- Unit 1

dilution Bottles
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Selectivity Check for ISE

the Na and K
Electrodes (ISE
Option)
Enhanced Cleaning Option

of Electrode Line
A98352AC
(ISE Option)
Table 6.3 Every Other Week or 3,000 Samples (ISE Option)
A98352AC
Every Other Week or 3,000 Month and Year:

Samples (ISE Option)
Manually Clean the ISE

ISE Mix Bar, Liquid
Level Sensors,
Sample Pot, and
Sample Pot Tubing
(ISE Option)
Table 6.4 Monthly Maintenance

Monthly Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the Sample Unit 1

Probe and Reagent
Probe Wash Wells Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
ISE
Clean the Mix Bar Unit 1

Wash Wells
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Maintenance
6-7
6-8 Table 6.4 Monthly Maintenance (Continued)
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the Wash Unit 1

Nozzle Component
and Inspect the Unit 2
Tube Mounting
Joints Unit 3
Unit 4
Clean the Deionized Unit 1

Water Tank,
Deionized Water Unit 2
Filter, and Sample
Probe Filter Unit 3
Unit 4
Table 6.5 Every Other Month or Every 20,000 Samples (ISE Option)
Every Other Month or Every Month and Year:
20,000 Samples (ISE Option)
Inspect and Add ISE ISE

Internal Reference
Solution (ISE Option)
A98352AC
Table 6.6 Quarterly Maintenance
A98352AC
Quarterly Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the Air Filters Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Inspect and, if Unit 1

Needed, Replace
the Deionized Water Unit 2
Filter, Sample Probe
Filter, and Replace Unit 3
the O-Ring
Unit 4
Table 6.7 Quarterly or Every 20,000 Samples (ISE Option)

Quarterly or Every 20,000 Month and Year:
Replace the Mixture ISE

Aspiration and MID
Standard Roller
Pump Tubing (ISE
Option)
Replace the Tubing ISE

between the Sample
Maintenance
Pot, Electrode Block,
and T-Connector
(ISE Option)
6-9
6-10 Table 6.7 Quarterly or Every 20,000 Samples (ISE Option) (Continued)
Maintenance
Quarterly or Every 20,000 Month and Year:
Replace the REF ISE

Electrode Block-side
Drain Tube and
Pinch Valve Tubing
(ISE Option)

Drain Well and, if
Needed Replace the
Drain Tube (ISE
Option)
Enhanced ISE ISE

Cleaning (Manual)
(ISE Option)
Table 6.8 Every 6 Months

Every 6 Months Month and Year:
Clean the Cuvettes Unit 1

and the Cuvette
Wedges Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
A98352AC
Table 6.9 Every 6 Months or Every 40,000 Samples (ISE Option)
A98352AC
Every 6 Months or Every Month and Year:

Replace the Na, K, ISE

or Cl Electrode (ISE
Option)
Table 6.10 Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples (ISE Option)
Every Two Years or Every Month and Year:
Replace the ISE REF ISE

Electrode and
Packing (ISE Option)
Table 6.11 Yearly Maintenance

Yearly Maintenance Month and Year:
Replace the O-rings Unit 1

in the Water Supply
Tube Mounting Unit 2
Joints
Unit 3
Unit 4
Maintenance
6-11
6-12 Table 6.12 As Needed Maintenance
Maintenance
As Needed Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the R1 or R2 Unit 1

Reagent Probes
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Replace a Sample Unit 1

Probe
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
ISE
Replace a Reagent Unit 1

Probe
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
A98352AC
Table 6.12 As Needed Maintenance (Continued)
A98352AC
Replace the Mix Unit 1

Bars
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Replace the Packing Unit 1

in the Wash Nozzle
Tube Mounting Unit 2
Joints
Unit 3
Unit 4
Replace the Sample, Unit 1

Reagent, ISE
Sample, or ISE Unit 2
Buffer Syringe
Unit 3
Unit 4
ISE
Maintenance
6-13
6-14 Table 6.12 As Needed Maintenance (Continued)
Maintenance
Replace the Wash Unit 1

Syringe Type 1 or
Replace the Wash Unit 2
Syringe Type 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
ISE
Clean the Interior of Unit 1

the Reagent
Refrigerators Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Clean or Replace the Rack

Anti-static Brushes Feeder
Unit
Replace the Sample Unit 1

or Reagent Probe
Tubing Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
A98352AC
ISE
Table 6.12 As Needed Maintenance (Continued)
A98352AC
Replace the Unit 1

Photometer Lamp
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Table 6.13 As Needed Maintenance (ISE Option)

As Needed Maintenance (ISE Month and Year:
Option)
Replace the Sample ISE

Pot
Clean the ISE ISE

Electrode Block
(Inlet Side)

ISE K Electrode
Manually Clean and ISE

Replace the ISE REF
Electrode Block
Replace the ISE Mix ISE
Bar
Replace the ISE ISE

Reagents
Maintenance
6-15
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
Maintenance Log
The Maintenance Log displays the maintenance frequency, the maintenance procedure, the
date the maintenance was performed, and the next date the maintenance is due.
Confirm the Maintenance Schedule

To confirm the maintenance schedule:
Figure 6.1 Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance Tab
1. Maintenance log 5. Unit number box (displayed on

2. Maintenance operation buttons multi-unit system)
3. Display pending items only 6. Pending (Num. of Times)
4. Procedures due soon
The system displays any maintenance procedures that are overdue or about to expire:
— Orange - overdue
— Yellow - about to expire
The system displays the number of times some components have been used in the
Pending (Num. of Times) column. Select Update to reset the count after the component
has been replaced.
6-16 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
NOTE
The system displays daily procedures with a yellow background three hours before
the maintenance is due.
2 Confirm the maintenance procedure to perform. Identify maintenance procedures that

are overdue or about to expire:
— To display the overdue procedures, select Display pending Items only.
— To display the maintenance procedure about to expire, select Procedures due soon.
— To display the specified unit, select the required Unit number box.
NOTE
If you select either Display pending Items only or Procedures due soon, the system
does not list the unscheduled and as needed procedures.
NOTE
The system lists the maintenance procedures for the selected units. All unit boxes
are selected by default. The Unit number box does not display for a single unit
system.
Add a Maintenance
Operators can add procedures to the Maintenance Log.
The system is preprogrammed with maintenance procedures specified by Beckman

Coulter.
1 Select a blank row from the Maintenance Log.

2 Select Maintenance Edit (F1). The system displays the Maintenance Edit dialog.
Figure 6.2 Maintenance Edit Dialog
3 For Maintenance, enter the procedure name.
4 In Unit, select the unit number.
5 In Frequency, select the performance interval (Day, Week, Month, or Year). Enter the
interval value from 1 to 180.
A98352AC 6-17
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
6 Select OK. The system displays the added maintenance procedure in the Maintenance
Log according to the frequency selected.
Delete a Maintenance
Operators can delete maintenance procedures programmed by operators.
You cannot delete maintenance procedures preprogrammed by Beckman Coulter.
If you delete any maintenance procedure, the system deletes the history data also.
1 Select the maintenance procedure to delete.

2 Select Maintenance Edit (F1). The system displays the Maintenance Edit dialog.
3 Delete the maintenance name in the Maintenance column.

4 Select OK. The system displays a confirmation message dialog.
5 Select OK.
Update the Maintenance Log

After you perform maintenance, update the Maintenance Log.
or
Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance. The system displays the ISE
2 Select the maintenance procedure on the list, and select Update.

The system displays the Update dialog.
Figure 6.3 Update Dialog
All units are selected by default.
3 If it is not necessary to update a unit, deselect the Unit box.
4 Select OK.
6-18 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
View Maintenance History

The system maintains a list of the 30 most recently completed maintenance procedures.
1 Select Unit 1, Unit 2, Unit 3, or Unit 4.
2 Select the maintenance procedure to view from the Maintenance Log.

3 Select Maintenance History (F2).
The system opens the Maintenance History dialog for the selected maintenance
procedure and unit. The system displays the last 30 maintenance dates, the next due
date, and the user name. The user name is the name that you used to log into the
system.
Figure 6.4 Maintenance History Dialog
4 Select OK.
5 Select Grid Display (F3) to confirm the maintenance history date as a list.
Figure 6.5 Grid Display Dialog
A98352AC 6-19
Maintenance
Accessing Maintenance Operations
The Grid Display dialog displays scheduled maintenance procedures and status for the
current month, preceding month, and following month.
If you select ISE, the dialog also displays the ISE maintenance procedures. The colors on
the grid indicate the status of the maintenance procedure.

To perform many of the analyzer and ISE maintenance procedures, use the maintenance
operation buttons. The overall process is the same for all maintenance procedures, and the
maintenance procedure specifies which maintenance operation button is required.
Figure 6.6 Analyzer Maintenance Operation Buttons
1. Analyzer Maintenance box 2. Maintenance operation buttons
6-20 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.7 ISE Maintenance Operation Buttons
1. ISE Maintenance box 2. Maintenance operation buttons
or
Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system
buttons.
or
Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
3 Select the maintenance operation button for the maintenance procedure.
NOTE
On systems with more than one analyzer unit, the system displays the Unit box as
selected by default in the dialog. If it is not necessary to update a unit, deselect
Unit box.
A98352AC 6-21
Maintenance
Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance

Table 6.14 Daily Analyzer Maintenance
Maintenance Procedure Part Part Number
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Inspect the Stability of the Upper - -
Cover
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Sample Probes, Reagent Probes, alcohol)
and Mix Bars
Replace the Deionized Water or Deionized water or diluent -
Diluent in the Pre-dilution
Bottles
Replace the Sample Probe Wash 2% Wash solution
• ODR2000 (4x5L) or
Solutions
or OSR0001 (6x2L) (Outside
Japan)
Sodium hypochlorite solution • MS028400 (Japan)
(1.0%)
or
• 5% Sodium Hypochlorite
Solution diluted 1:5 (US) • A32319 (US)
• Cleaning Solution diluted • 66039 (Outside US and
1:5 (Outside US and Japan) Japan)
• Sodium hypochlorite • Commercial item (Japan)
solution (5%) diluted 1:5
(Japan)
60 mL reagent bottle (6 bottles) MU960500

Inspect the Printer and Paper - -
Inspect the Handle on the - -
Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in
the Open Position
Table 6.15 Weekly Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Bars alcohol)
Stylet 0.2φ (diameter) MU941300
6-22 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Table 6.15 Weekly Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

Perform a W2 1N hydrochloric acid Commercial item
Sodium hypochlorite solution
(0.5%) • A32319 (US)
• 5% Sodium Hypochlorite • 66039 (Outside US and
Solution diluted 1:10 (US) Japan)
• Cleaning Solution diluted • Commercial item (Japan)
1:10 (Outside US and Japan)
• Sodium hypochlorite
(Japan)
60 mL reagent bottle (6 bottles MU960500

per analyzer unit and 1 bottle for
ISE unit)
ISE Cleaning Solution
• AUH1019 (US)
• ISE Cleaning Solution (US) • 66039 (Outside US)
• Cleaning Solution (Outside • For the Japan market, refer
US) to the ISE Addendum.
Hitachi Cup MU853200

Perform a Photocal - -
Clean the Pre-dilution Bottles Sodium hypochlorite solution
(0.5%) • A32319 (US)
(Japan)
60 mL reagent bottle MU960500
A98352AC 6-23
Maintenance
Table 6.16 Monthly Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the Sample Probe and Sodium hypochlorite solution
Reagent Probe Wash Wells (0.5%) • A32319 (US)
(Japan)
Cotton-tipped applicator Commercial item

Disposable pipette Commercial item
Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells Sodium hypochlorite solution
(0.5%) • A32319 (US)
(Japan)

Disposable pipette Commercial item
Clean the Wash Nozzle Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Component and Inspect the Tube tissue
Mounting Joints
Sonicator filled with deionized Commercial item
water
6-24 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Table 6.16 Monthly Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

Clean the Deionized Water Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Tank ,Deionized Water Filter, and tissue
Sample Probe Filter
Basin Commercial item
Sonicator filled with deionized Commercial item
water
Extra deionized water tank, filled MU959600
with 5 L of deionized water
(1.0%) • A32319 (US)
(Japan)
Table 6.17 Quarterly Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the Air Filters Air filters MU959300 (140 x 140 mm)
Vacuum Commercial item
Inspect and, if Needed, Replace Sample Probe Filter ZM307900
the Deionized Water Filter,
Sample Probe Filter, and Replace Deionized Water Filter ZM307900
the O-Ring O-rings MU963700
Table 6.18 Six-Month Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the Cuvettes and the 2% Wash solution
• ODR2000 (4x5L) or
Cuvette Wedges
OSR0001 (6x2L) (Outside
Japan)
• MS028400 (Japan)

Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Sonicator Commercial item
Plastic containers to hold Commercial item
cuvettes in the sonicator
A98352AC 6-25
Maintenance
Table 6.19 Yearly Analyzer Maintenance

Replace the O-rings in the Water O-rings MU963800
Supply Tube Mounting Joints
tissue
Pair of tweezers Commercial item
Table 6.20 As Needed Analyzer Maintenance

Replenish the Wash Solution Wash solution
• ODR2000 (4x5L) or
Japan)
• MS028400 (Japan)
Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Probes alcohol)
Stylet φ0.3 (diameter) ZM022700
Replace a Sample Probe Sample probe MU993400
Replace a Reagent Probe Reagent probe MU858100
Replace the Mix Bars R1/S: Spiral shape mix bar MU855400
R2: L shape mix bar MU855500
Replace the Packing in the Wash Packing B03860
Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints
Pair of tweezers Commercial item
Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE Sample syringe (S syringe) ZM011100
Sample, or ISE Buffer Syringe
Reagent syringe (R syringe) ZM011200
S syringe case ZM022900
R syringe case MU837000
ISE buffer syringe case ZM136200
tissue
Replace the Wash Syringe Type 1 Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Wash Syringe Type 1 (R syringe) ZM011200
R syringe case MU837000
Seal assembly B21251
6-26 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Table 6.20 As Needed Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

Replace the Wash Syringe Type 2 Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Wash Syringe Type 2 B16554
Seal Assembly B21251
Piston B16681
Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
alcohol)
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Refrigerators tissue
alcohol)
Clean or Replace the Anti-static Anti-static brushes (2 pieces) MU852500
Brushes
alcohol)
Replace the Sample or Reagent Sample probe tubing MU856000
Probe Tubing
Reagent probe tubing MU855900
(ISE) Sample probe tubing MU851900
Perform a W1 - -
Replace Rack ID Labels Rack ID labels MU906600 to MU908500
Clean or Replace Individual Cuvette (4 x 5 mm) MU855200
Cuvettes
tissue
2% Wash solution
• ODR2000 (4x5L) or
Japan)
• MS028400 (Japan)
Plastic container Commercial item

Replace the Photometer Lamp Photometer lamp MU855000
Clean the Rack Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Clean the Rack Tray Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Clean the Rack Transfer Lanes Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
A98352AC 6-27
Maintenance
Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions
Table 6.20 As Needed Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

Save Parameters - -
Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions

Table 6.21 Sodium Hypochlorite Solution
Effective Chlorite Concentration for Maintenance Dilution Ratio of 5% chlorite concentration:
Solutions
5% Sodium Hypochlorite Solution (US)
ISE Cleaning Solution (Outside US and Japan)
Sodium hypochlorite solution (5%) (Japan)
0.5% 1:10
1.0% 1:5
Table 6.22 Wash Solution

Dilution for Maintenance Solutions Dilution Ratio (Wash Solution)
1% 1:100
2% 1:50
Daily Maintenance
Perform the following procedures daily.
• Inspect the Syringes for Leaks
• Inspect the Stability of the Upper Cover
• Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars
• Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottles
• Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions
• Inspect the Printer and Paper
• Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in the Open Position
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks

Each analyzer unit includes sample syringes, reagent syringes, and wash syringes. If your
system includes an ISE unit, the ISE unit includes a sample syringe, a wash syringe, and ISE
buffer syringes.
• Two sample syringes and two wash syringes are located on the back of each analyzer
unit behind the left door.
• The ISE sample syringe and wash syringe are located on the front of the ISE unit
behind the door.
• The ISE buffer syringes are located on the front of the ISE unit behind the ISE reagents.
6-28 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
The sample and reagent syringes measure the volume of sample or reagent to be used in a
reaction.
The wash syringes dispense only deionized water for cleaning the interior of the sample
probe.
The two types of wash syringes:

Use either a Wash Syringe Type 1 or Wash Syringe Type 2 for the analyzer unit. For the ISE
unit, only use Wash Syringe Type 1. To view the shape of each type of syringe, refer to
Wash Syringe Type 1, and ISE Buffer Syringe Parts and Figure 6.12 Wash Syringe Type 2
Parts.
The ISE buffer syringe measures the correct volume of buffer for the ISE.
If a syringe leaks, the leak causes possible failures to the syringe, probe, and analytes being
tested.
Although the syringes are different sizes and serve different functions, you can inspect for
correct performance using the same methods.
Inspect all components of the syringes, including the syringe case head, the syringe case
body, the fixing nut, and the piston fixing screw for leaks and correct installation.
Materials Required:
The procedure is identical for all syringes.

2 Open the front left door to access the reagent syringes and rear left door to access the
sample and wash syringes on the analyzer units. Open the top ISE reagent cover to
access the buffer syringes, or the front door of the ISE unit to access the ISE sample and
wash syringes.
CAUTION
with water.
3 Visually inspect each syringe case head for any cracks or leaks. Use the clean, dry, lint-
free absorbent tissue to confirm that the top and bottom connections for the syringe
case head and the bottom fixing screw have no leaks. If you find a crack or a leak,
A98352AC 6-29
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
replace the syringe. For more information, refer to Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE
1. Reagent syringe 3. Inner

2. Outer
Figure 6.9 Sample Syringe and Wash Syringe Locations
1. Wash syringes 4. Inner

2. Sample syringes 5. Rear of analyzer
3. Outer
6-30 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Figure 6.10 ISE Syringe Location
1. ISE Buffer syringes 3. ISE Sample syringe

2. ISE Wash syringe 4. Front of ISE unit
A98352AC 6-31
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Wash Syringe Type 1, and ISE Buffer Syringe Parts
1. Fixing nut 4. Case body (Syringe case)

2. Case head (Syringe case) 5. Piston fixing screw
3. Fixing screws 6. Possible leakage locations
Figure 6.12 Wash Syringe Type 2 Parts
1. Piston 3. Wash syringe

2. Seal assembly 4. Possible leakage locations
4 Confirm that the fixing nuts and piston fixing screws are tight. If a leak persists after
you tighten the screws, replace the syringe.
6-32 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
CAUTION
5 Close all doors and covers in the Analyzer unit and ISE unit.
Log.
Inspect the Stability of the Upper Cover
Lift the upper cover of each analyzer unit and confirm that it is stable and remains in
the raised position. If the cover starts to descend, contact Beckman Coulter to have the
cover supports inspected and replaced.
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars
The probes deliver precise quantities of reagent or sample to the cuvettes.
The mix bars mix the contents in the cuvettes.
If the mix bars or probes are bent or damaged, or if the probes are clogged, you cannot
achieve correct analysis.
Before you begin analysis, inspect the sample probes, reagent probes, and mix bars for
damage or deterioration. Confirm that each probe operates correctly.
Materials Required:
A98352AC 6-33
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Inspect the Sample Probes and Reagent Probes
Figure 6.13 Sample Probes and Reagent Probes
1. Reagent probe 3. Probe wash position

2. Sample probe
1 Lift the upper covers of each analyzer unit.

2 Visually inspect that each probe is not bent or damaged. If a probe is bent or damaged,
replace the probe. For more information, refer to Replace a Sample Probe, or Replace a
Reagent Probe.
3 Inspect each probe for contaminants or crystallization. If a probe is dirty, wipe the
surface with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
IMPORTANT
Do not bend the probe when cleaning.
4 If a probe is incorrectly aligned, contact Beckman Coulter.
6-34 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Inspect the Mix bars
Figure 6.14 Mix bar wash wells
1. Mix bar wash wells 3. Mix bar component (R2)

2. Mix bar component (R1, S)
1 Inspect each mix bar. If a mix bar is bent, scratched, or has chips in the fluororesin
coating, replace the mix bar. For more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
2 Inspect each mix bar for contaminants or crystallization. If the mix bar is dirty, wipe the
mix bar with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
Confirm Operation of the Probes and Mix Bars

Prime the system to inspect the operation of the probes and mix bars.

A98352AC 6-35
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Figure 6.15 Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance tab
1. Analyzer Maintenance 2. Inspect Probe and Mixing Bar
buttons.
4 Select Inspect Probe & Mixing Bar. The system displays the Inspect Probe & Mixing Bar
dialog.
5 Select OK.

The system initializes the probes and mix bar components, then:
1. Dispenses deionized water from the two sample probes.

2. Dispenses deionized water from the R1 and R2 probes for inner cuvettes.
3. Dispenses deionized water from the R1 and R2 probes for outer cuvettes.
4. Activates the mix bar components.
7 As the system dispenses water, confirm that each probe dispenses a thin, straight
stream of water, and that water flows in the wash wells.
6-36 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Figure 6.16 Sample and Reagent Probes
1. Correct Flow 2. Incorrect Flow

a. If the water is spraying or dispensing at an angle, clean the probe. For more
information, refer to Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars or Clean the R1 or R2
Reagent Probes.
b. If cleaning does not correct the problem, replace the probe. For more information,
refer to Replace a Sample Probe, or Replace a Reagent Probe.
8 As the system activates the mix bar component, confirm that the mix bars align
correctly in the wash wells. If a mix bar does not align correctly, contact Beckman
Coulter.
9 Repeat steps 6 to 8 as required to inspect all probes and mix bars.

Log.
Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottles
1 Discard the water or diluent in the pre-dilution bottles, indicated by the 55. Diluent/W2
and 56. Diluent/W2 label close to the R1 refrigerator on each analyzer unit.
2 Rinse the bottles twice with deionized water.

3 Fill the bottles with deionized water or diluent and replace the bottles on the analyzer
unit.
Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions

The sample probe wash solution bottles are located in the positions labeled 61. DET-1/W2,
62. DET-2, 63. DET-1/W2 and 64. DET-2 on each analyzer unit, and DET-1/W1 and DET-2
on the ISE unit.
A98352AC 6-37
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Materials Required:
• 60 mL reagent bottles (4 for each analyzer unit and 2 for the ISE unit)
Figure 6.17 Location of Sample Probe Wash Solution for Analyzer Unit
1. Sample probe wash solution set position
Figure 6.18 Location of ISE sample Probe Wash Solution
1. ISE sample probe wash solution set

position
6-38 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
NOTE
Sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) is only required for laboratories using the AU5800
with high sample volume or dialysis patients.
If you have a normal volume of samples that are not highly viscous, fill the bottles with
approximately 50 mL, as follows:
• (ISE) Position DET-2: 2% wash solution
If you have a high volume of samples or use the analyzer for dialysis patient samples, fill
the bottles with approximately 50 mL, as follows:
• (ISE) Position DET-2: sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%)
For more information, refer to Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions.
WARNING
to handle the solution. If the solution contacts skin or clothes, rinse the affected area
thoroughly with water. If the solution contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush
with water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more
CAUTION
When using sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) as a sample probe wash solution,
follow these precautions:
• Prepare fresh sodium hypochlorite solution and completely replace the solution in the
bottle once a day.
• If you anticipate not using the analyzer for two days or longer, remove the solution from
the system and discard the solution to prevent analyzer corrosion.
• any solution spills on the analyzer, clean the area with an absorbent tissue, and wipe it
If
dry with a clean absorbent tissue.
A98352AC 6-39
Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
• Do not mix the solution with other chemicals. If the solution becomes contaminated,
follow your laboratory procedure to dispose of the solution.
NOTE
Follow your laboratory procedure for replacing the 2% wash solution in the bottles.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing the 2% wash solution daily.
1 Remove each wash solution bottle and inspect the level of solution.
2 As required, fill each bottle to approximately 50 mL of the solution used in your
laboratory.
3 Replace the bottle on the analyzer.

Inspect the Printer and Paper

The printer is an optional part. Before you begin daily analysis, confirm that the printer is
turned on and that there is enough paper in the printer.
For more information, refer to the manual supplied with the printer.
1 Confirm that the printer is on. The printer displays a ready message.
2 Confirm that there is enough paper in the printer.
Log.
Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in the Open Position
To be sure that the cuvettes and mix bars are cleaned correctly during analysis, inspect the
handle on the diluted wash solution tank is in the OPEN position.
1 Open the right front door of each analyzer unit.

2 Confirm that the handle of each diluted wash solution tank is in the OPEN position.
Turn the handle to the OPEN position if the handle is in the CLOSE position.
6-40 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.19 Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank in the Analyzer Unit
1. Diluted Wash Solution Tank 2. Handle: OPEN position
3 Close all the analyzer doors and covers.
Weekly Maintenance
Perform the following procedures weekly.
• Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars
• Perform a W2
• Perform a Photocal
• Clean the Pre-dilution Bottles
Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars
CAUTION
If the sample probes or mix bars are contaminated or stained, carryover between
samples can occur. Clean the sample probes and mix bars weekly to prevent
contamination and to provide correct analysis and results.
Clean the Sample Probes
A98352AC 6-41
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Materials Required:
• Stylet 0.2φ (diameter)

2 Lift the rear upper cover of each analyzer unit and ISE unit.
3 Unscrew the connector above the sample probe.
CAUTION
Replace one sample probe at a time to avoid problems if a sample probe was
replaced on for the inner/outer cuvettes, or a different unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not bend or damage the sample probe when you replace it.
Figure 6.20 Remove the Sample Probe for Cleaning
1. Connector 2. Sample probe
4 After all the liquid drips from the probe, lift the probe from the arm.
5 Wipe the tip of the probe with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
6 Carefully insert the stylet into the probe to remove any potential obstruction.
7 Reinstall the probe into the arm, attach the connector to the top of the probe, and
tighten the connector.
Maintenance: Maintenance tab. Or select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE
Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the ISE Maintenance: Maintenance
tab.
6-42 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
9 Select the Analyzer Maintenance box. The system activates the Analyzer maintenance
operation buttons. Or select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the ISE
maintenance operation buttons.
11 For analyzer units, for Cuvette, select Inner for the S1 probe, Outer for the S2 probe or
Both.
For Times, enter 3, and then select OK.
12 Press the DIAG button. Confirm that a thin straight stream of water is dispensed from
the probe, and that the water does not spray or dispense at an angle. If the water sprays
or dispenses at an angle occurs, replace the probe. For more information, refer to
Replace a Sample Probe.
13 Repeat for all sample probes on the analyzer and ISE units, and confirm that all sample
probes are on each analyzer unit and ISE unit.
14 Clear the Analyzer Maintenance box or the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the
Log.
Clean the Mix Bars
Materials Required:
1 Lift the mix bars up to remove them and wipe them with an alcohol prep pad (70%
Isopropyl alcohol).
Figure 6.21 Remove the Mix Bars for Cleaning
1. Mix bar
A98352AC 6-43
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
CAUTION
When cleaning the mix bars, confirm that the mix bars are not bent and that the
coating is not scratched. Replace the mix bars if they are damaged. When
inserting the mix bars into the mix bar component, do not scratch the mix bars.
Scratched or damaged mix bars can cause sample carryover and affect results.
2 Insert the 12 spiral-shape mix bars (blue top) in the positions labeled R1/S and the 6 L-
shape mix bars (yellow top) in the positions labeled R2 for each mix bar component on
each analyzer unit.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the mix bar when inserting the mix bar into the mix bar
component. Scratched or damaged mix bars can cause sample carryover and
affect results.
Rotate each mix bar slightly in order to insert completely.
Figure 6.22 Mix Bars
1. Spiral-shaped mix bar 3. Blue

2. L-shaped mix bar 4. Yellow
CAUTION
The shapes of the mix bars differ between mix types. If the spiral and L-shaped
mix bars are not placed in the correct mix bar component, analysis results can be
affected. The placement of each mix bar shape:
— R1 and S positions: Spiral-shaped mix bar
— R2 positions: L-shaped mix bar
buttons.
4 Select Prime Washing Line. The system displays the Prime Washing Line dialog.
6-44 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
6 Press the DIAG button. Watch the mix bar component perform a sequence to confirm
correct operation. If an abnormal noise occurs during mixing, replace the mix bar. For
more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.

Log.
Perform a W2
To obtain correct analysis results, clean the cuvettes once a week. The sample probes,
reagent probes, mix bars, and waste lines are thoroughly cleaned during the W2 process.
The W2 prepares the cuvettes for the photocal by thoroughly cleaning them. The sample
probes, reagent probes, mix bars, and waste lines also benefit from the cleaning procedure.
Perform a photocal to inspect the integrity of the cuvettes. Clean or replace cuvettes that
show an abnormal value during a photocal. For more information, refer to Perform a
Photocal.
The W2 is accomplished by running 1N hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution

(0.5%) through the system.
• Each week, alternate the cleaning solution that you use.
• The 1N hydrochloric acid removes stains formed by protein deposits left in the
cuvettes.
• The sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) removes a small quantity of inorganic
substances such as metallic ions and any bacterial contamination.
A W2 takes about 30 minutes to complete from start to finish.
WARNING
The mixing of sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid causes the
formation of chlorine gas, which is highly toxic. Do not mix sodium hypochlorite
solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid. Confirm that all W2 cleaning solution
containers on the analyzer contain the same cleaning solution. Clearly label
containers designated for sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid
and confirm that all positions requiring W2 cleaners contain the same cleaning
solution.
WARNING
to handle hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). If the
hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts skin or clothes,
A98352AC 6-45
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the hydrochloric acid or sodium
hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with
water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more
WARNING
Do not spill any cleaning solution on the system. If cleaning solution is spilled on the
system, follow your laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
CAUTION
For each procedure, prepare a fresh sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). Prepare a
fresh solution to maintain effective cleaning. Without effective cleaning, analysis
results can be affected.
The ISE Enhanced Cleaning procedure is optional during the W2. To run the ISE Enhanced
Cleaning procedure separately from the W2, refer to Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line.
Materials required for each analyzer unit:

• Six 60 mL bottles:
— Six 60 mL bottles labeled 1 N hydrochloric acid
or
— Six 60 mL bottles labeled sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%).
• Cleaning Solutions:
— Approximately 360 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid or 360 mL of sodium hypochlorite
solution (0.5%)
Materials required for the ISE (optional unit).
For W2:
• One 60 mL bottle:
— One 60 mL bottle labeled 1 N hydrochloric acid
or
— One 60 mL bottle labeled sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%)
• Cleaning solution:
— Approximately 60 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid or 60 mL of sodium hypochlorite
solution (0.5%)
For Enhanced Cleaning:
• Hitachi Cup

6-46 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
2 Fill the 60 mL bottles with approximately 60 mL of the cleaning solution selected for
the procedure of the week. If sodium hypochlorite solution was used previously for the
W2, use hydrochloric acid for the current procedure.
Do not fill past the neck of the bottle.
WARNING
The mixing of sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid causes
the formation of chlorine gas, which is highly toxic. Do not mix sodium
hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid. Confirm that all W2 cleaning
solution containers on the analyzer contain the same cleaning solution. Clearly
label containers designated for sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and
hydrochloric acid and confirm that all positions requiring W2 cleaners contain the
same cleaning solution.
3 Lift the upper covers of each analyzer unit and ISE unit.
4 Place the bottles in the positions labeled W2 on each analyzer unit and ISE unit. Remove
diluent and cleaning bottles as needed when placing the W2 bottles. If a photocal is also
selected, close the upper cover.
A98352AC 6-47
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.23 W2 Positions
1. R2: Two positions labeled W2 4. ISE sample probe: One position

2. R1: Two positions labeled labeled Det-1/W2
55.Diluent/W2 and 56.Diluent/W2
3. Sample: Two positions labeled
61.DET-1/W2 and 63.DET-1/W2
WARNING
Do not spill any cleaning solution on the system. If cleaning solution is spilled on
the system, follow your laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
5 Fill a Hitachi cup with 1.5 mL ISE Cleaning Solution if ISE Cleaning (Enhanced) is
selected. Place the cup in the CLEAN position on the ISE unit.
7 Select W2 (F6). The system displays the W2 dialog.
6-48 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.24 W2 Dialog
8 Decide whether to start the photocal immediately when the W2 is complete, without
operator input. Also, the weekly ISE Cleaning (Enhanced) procedure can be run with
the W2 without adding any time to the procedure.
• If you want to start the photocal after the W2 completes, select After W2 ends,
perform the photocal.
• To start the ISE cleaning procedure during the W2, select ISE Cleaning (Enhanced).
• The system selects all units by default. If a unit is not required, deselect the Unit.
9 Select OK. The W2 starts and takes 30 minutes to complete. You can view the time
countdown in the mode display area. If you selected After W2 ends, perform the
photocal in step 8, the photocal starts automatically. If you did not select After W2 ends,
perform the photocal, when the W2 completes, the analyzer enters Standby mode.
CAUTION
The cleaning solution bottles can generate gas. After the W2 is complete,
immediately remove the W2 cleaning solution bottles from the system.
10 Remove all maintenance materials used for the W2 procedure. Replace the diluent and
cleaning bottles into the corresponding positions on the analyzer.
11 The Maintenance Log is automatically updated.
Perform a Photocal
When the W2 is finished, perform a photocal. You can start the photocal from the W2 Start
dialog. If you selected the photocal in the W2 procedure, refer to View the Photocal Results.
The photocal confirms the integrity of the cuvettes. The photocal detects dirt, stains, or
scratches and identifies cuvettes that require cleaning or replacing.
A98352AC 6-49
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
If you did not select the photocal with the W2 procedure, you can start the photocal using
the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
For optimal results, only perform a photocal measurement when the photometer lamp
is stabilized after the system starts up. The photometer lamp needs approximately 20
minutes to stabilize (warm up) after the system starts up.
1 Confirm that the system is in Standby mode.

2 Confirm that all covers and doors are closed.
4 Select Photocal (F7). The system displays the Photocal dialog.
Figure 6.25 Photocal Dialog
5 Select ALL Cuvettes to perform the photocal.
NOTE
The system selects all units by default. If a unit is not required, deselect the Unit.
6-50 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
NOTE
If individual cuvettes fail, the cuvette might need cleaning or replacement. To

perform a photocal on an individual cuvette after it was cleaned or replaced, select
Cuvette No. Select the Unit, then for No., enter the cuvette number and for
Cuvette, enter Inner or Outer.
6 Select OK. The photocal starts. The photocal takes 30 minutes to complete. The system
automatically moves to Standby mode after the photocal is complete. The Maintenance
Log is automatically updated.
NOTE
For a specific cuvette, the photocal takes approximately 8 minutes.
NOTE
The system automatically saves the first photocal value after you update Replacing
Photocal Lamp in the Consumption tab. The system uses this photocal value as the
reference value in Photocal Monitor > Detail (F5) > Graph.
View the Photocal Results
If a cuvette fails the photocal, the system generates an audible alarm. Perform the following
corrective action.
1 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > Photocal Monitor. If the cuvette fails the
photocal, the system highlights the cuvette number.
2 Select the Unit No. and Cuvette for Inner or Outer.
A98352AC 6-51
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.26 Analyzer Maintenance: Photocal Monitor Tab
3 Clean or replace any cuvettes failing the Mean Check or Cuvette Check.
— The system displays cuvettes with a Mean Check Error in red. The cuvette is
probably dirty and can be cleaned. For more information, refer to Clean or Replace
Individual Cuvettes.
— The system displays cuvettes with a Cuvette Check Error in green. The cuvette is
probably scratched and needs replacement. For more information, refer to Clean or
Replace Individual Cuvettes.
4 Replace the photometer lamp if any cuvettes failed the Lamp Check.
— The system displays cuvettes with a Lamp Check Error in orange. The photometer
lamp is deteriorating and needs replacement. For more information, refer to
Replace the Photometer Lamp.
5 Select the Maintenance tab.
6 Select Photocal (F7). The system displays the Photocal dialog.

— Repeat the photocal on each cuvette that fails the Mean Check or Cuvette Check.
Select Cuvette No. first, then select the Unit, enter the cuvette number for No. and
select Inner or Outer in Cuvette. The photocal takes approximately 8 minutes to
complete.
— Repeat the photocal on all cuvettes if any cuvettes fail the Lamp Check and the
lamp was replaced, or numerous cuvettes failed the Mean Check or Cuvette Check.
Select All Cuvettes in the Photocal dialog. The photocal takes 30 minutes to
complete.
7 If any cuvettes fail the photocal again, repeat steps 1 to 6.

8 To print photocal results, go to the Photocal Monitor tab. Select Print (F8) and then OK.
6-52 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
NOTE
The system only prints data for cuvettes that fail the photocal.
NOTE
If a cuvette fails the photocal after cleaning, replace the cuvette with a new cuvette
and repeat the photocal.
9 Confirm that all cuvettes have passed the photocal and run QC before processing
samples.
Clean the Pre-dilution Bottles

When the pre-dilution bottles remain on each analyzer unit without being periodically
cleaned, bacterial contamination can occur.
To maintain the reliability of the analyzer and prevent contamination, clean the pre-
dilution bottles once each week.
Materials Required for each Analyzer Unit:

• Two extra 60 mL bottles (optional)

2 Lift the back upper cover of each analyzer unit.
3 Remove the pre-dilution bottles from the analyzer and discard the deionized water. The
pre-dilution bottles are located outside of the R1 refrigerator in the position labeled
55.Diluent/W2 and 56.Diluent/W2.
4 Wash the pre-dilution bottle by filling it with sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%).
5 Rinse well with deionized water.
6 If extra 60 mL bottles are available, fill them with deionized water and place them on
the analyzer while you rinse and air dry the original bottles. Alternate the weekly use of
each bottle. If extra bottles are not available, thoroughly rinse the bottles to remove any
sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) residue which affects analysis results.
Log.
A98352AC 6-53
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Perform the following procedures monthly.
• Clean the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Wells
• Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells
• Clean the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints
• Clean the Deionized Water Tank Deionized Water Filter and Sample Probe Filter
Clean the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Wells

Dirty wash wells can cause incorrectly cleaned probes, which can then contaminate
reagents or samples.
To maintain the reliability of the analyzer and prevent contamination, clean the wash wells
monthly.
Figure 6.27 Reagent and Sample Probe Wash Wells
1. Reagent probe wash wells 3. Sample probe wash well (ISE option)
2. Sample probe wash wells
Materials Required:
• Cotton-tipped applicator
• Disposable pipette

2 Lift the front and back upper covers of each analyzer unit.
Maintenance: Maintenance tab. For the ISE, select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE
Maintenance.
6-54 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
4 Select the Analyzer Maintenance box. For the ISE, select ISE Maintenance box. The
system activates the maintenance operation buttons.
5 Select Clean Wash Well. The system displays the Clean Wash Well dialog.
6 The system selects all units by default. If a unit is not required, deselect the Unit.
7 Select OK.
8 Press the DIAG button. The sample and reagent probes initialize. All probes for the
inner cuvettes move from their home positions over the wash wells to the cuvettes. If
the system has an ISE unit, the ISE sample probe moves from the home position over
the wash well to the ISE solution position.
CAUTION
Do not spill sodium hypochlorite solution outside the wash well. Follow your
laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
IMPORTANT
While cleaning the interior of the wash well, avoid touching the sample probe and
reagent probe.
9 Using a pipette, dispense the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) into each sample
probe and reagent probe wash wells for the inner cuvettes or the ISE.
10 Use a cotton-tipped applicator to clean each well. Use a different cotton-tipped

applicator for each wash well to avoid any contamination. If the system has an ISE unit,
skip steps 11 through 13. Go to step 14.
11 Press the DIAG button twice. All probes for outer cuvettes move from their home
positions over the wash wells to the cuvettes.
12 Using a pipette, dispense the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) into each sample
probe and reagent probe wash wells for the outer cuvettes.

applicator for each wash well to avoid any contamination.
14 For the analyzer unit, select Prime Washing Line. The system displays the Prime
Washing Line dialog. For the ISE unit, select Replace Sample Probe. The system displays
the Replace Sample Probe dialog.
16 Press the DIAG button. After initialization, the system primes water through the probes
and wash wells. Visually inspect the probe wash wells for correct drainage. If drainage
is poor, repeat steps 4 to 15.
17 Close all the doors and covers on all the analyzer units and the ISE unit.
A98352AC 6-55
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Log.
Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells

In normal operation, the mix bar wash wells clean the outside surface of each mix bar by
washing in 1% wash solution and then rinsing with deionized water.
Dirty wash wells can cause incorrectly cleaned mix bars, which can cause carryover
problems.
To maintain the reliability of the analyzer and prevent contamination, clean the wash wells
monthly.
Materials Required:
• Disposable pipette

3 Manually turn the mix bar component so that the mix bars are not over the wash wells.
Figure 6.28 Mix Bar Wash Wells
1. R1/S mix bar component 3. Mix bar

2. R2 mix bar component 4. Mix bar wash well
6-56 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not spill sodium hypochlorite solution outside the wash well. Follow your
laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
4 Using a pipette, dispense the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) into each of the four
mix bar wash wells.

applicator for each wash well to avoid any contamination.
buttons.
8 Select Replace Mix Bar. The system displays the Replacing Mix Bar dialog.
Figure 6.29 Replacing Mixing Bar Dialog
10 Select The First Mixer.
12 Press the DIAG button. The R1/S mix bar component initializes and performs a
sequence.
13 Visually inspect the mix bar wash wells for correct water drainage. If drainage is poor,
repeat steps 3 to 12.
14 Select The Second Mixer.
16 Press the DIAG button. The R2 mix bar component initializes and a sequence.
A98352AC 6-57
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
17 Visually inspect the mix bar wash wells for correct water drainage. If drainage is poor,
repeat steps 3 to 9 and 14 to 16.

Log.
Clean the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints
The wash nozzle unit consists of 18 nozzles, responsible for aspirating liquid out of the
cuvettes, dispensing diluted wash solution and DI water into the cuvettes and drying the
cuvettes.
If any of the nozzles become clogged, their functionality may suffer, resulting in inefficient
cleaning of the cuvettes.
Inspect the mounting joints for cracks or leaks.
If any damage exists, the aspiration and dispense by nozzles could be affected.
IMPORTANT
Always remove and replace the wash nozzle component on the same analyzer unit. If
you replace the wash nozzle component on a different analyzer unit, a mechanical
error can occur and eventually cause a cuvette overflow.
• Clean, dry lint free cloth
• Sonicator filled with DI water
Remove the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints

buttons.
6 Select Replace Wash Nozzle. The system displays the Replace Wash Nozzle dialog.
6-58 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
7 Select OK.
8 Press the DIAG button. The liquid drains from the tubes.
CAUTION
Before cleaning or replacing the tube mounting joints, drain the water remaining
in the wash nozzles. If you loosen any manifold without draining the remaining
water, the water spills out of the nozzle. If the water spills onto the cuvettes,
refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wedges.
Figure 6.30 Wash Nozzle Component and Tube Mounting Joints
1. Water and wash solution supply 2. Aspiration tube mounting joint

tube mounting joint manifolds (A manifold
total of six O-rings are used inside) 3. Wash nozzle unit
9 Loosen the six manifolds and remove them from their mounting positions.
IMPORTANT
Six O-rings are inside the water supply tube mounting joint of the wash nozzle
component. After removing the manifold, confirm that there are six O-rings seated
inside the six grooves in the manifold base.
Figure 6.31 Manifold Base of the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint
1. Manifold Base 2. O-Ring
A98352AC 6-59
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
If an O-ring is missing, inspect the manifold to confirm that the O-ring is not
attached to the surface of the manifold. If it cannot be found, install a new O-ring in
the groove in the manifold base. For more information, refer to Replace the O-rings
in the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joints.
IMPORTANT
Inspect the packing inside each manifold of the four tube mounting joints. If the
packing is damaged, replace the packing. For more information, refer to Replace
the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints.
10 Loosen the knob holding the wash nozzle component in position. Loosen the knob until
it stops turning.
11 Lift the wash nozzle component up over the positioning screws. Do not bump or bend
the nozzles.
IMPORTANT
Do not loosen or remove the positioning screws on either side of the knob when
you loosen the knob on the wash nozzle component. The positioning screws keep
the wash nozzle component in alignment.
Figure 6.32 Wash Nozzle Component
1. Tubing 3. Wash nozzle unit

2. Wash nozzle joint
12 Remove the wash nozzle component along with the tubing and inspect the joints for
cracks. If a crack is found, contact Beckman Coulter to replace the Joint.
Clean and Inspect the Wash Nozzle Component
IMPORTANT
Do not damage the nozzles when using a sonicator to clean the wash nozzle
component.
6-60 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
1 Sonicate the wash nozzle component in deionized water for 15 minutes. Only submerge
the nozzle portion. Do not get the springs above the nozzles wet. If water does get into
the springs, dry them well using a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue, or canned air.
NOTE
Beckman Coulter recommends using a sonicator for cleaning the nozzles. If a

sonicator is not available, clean the interior of each nozzle using the supplied stylet
and deionized water.
2 Remove the wash nozzle component from the sonicator, and dry thoroughly with a
clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue.
3 Inspect the O-rings inside the water supply tube mounting joints. Confirm that all six O-
rings are correctly inserted in individual grooves inside each joint. Confirm that the O-
rings are not ripped or over-stretched. Look for dust or detergent crystals around each
O-ring. If faults are found with the O-rings, replace the O-rings.
For more information, refer to Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting
Joints.
4 Return the wash nozzle component to its original position. Place the wash nozzle
component over the positioning screws, then tighten the knob to hold the wash nozzle
component in position.
IMPORTANT
Do not hit the nozzle tips on the cuvette wheel cover when installing the wash
nozzle component.
5 Return each of the manifolds to their original position. Match the colored dot on the
manifold with the one next to its position. Tighten the manifolds without cross
threading them. Confirm that the manifolds are finger-tight to prevent a cuvette wheel
overflow, but do not over-tighten.
IMPORTANT
To avoid system damage and to perform tests correctly:

— When you install the manifolds, confirm that the manifolds are in the correct, color-
coded positions. Firmly tighten the manifolds.
— Confirm that all tubing from the nozzles to the tube mounting joints are connected.
— Do not damage any of the joints or tubing. Damaged components can cause leaks and
can contaminate or flood the cuvette wheel.
6 Select Prime Wash Nozzle. The system displays the Start dialog.
A98352AC 6-61
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
8 Press the DIAG button. The air in the tubing is purged as the wash nozzle component
moves up and down.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the wash nozzle component moves freely without interference and
that no leaks occur. If leaks occur, remove the water supply manifold, and confirm
that there are six O-rings correctly placed in the grooves. Inspect each O-ring, and
replace damaged O-rings.

Log.
Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter
The deionized water filter and sample probe filter prevent particles from entering the
internal deionized water system. Clean the deionized water tank to avoid bacterial
contamination of the system.

• Basin
• Sonicator filled with deionized water
• Extra deionized water tank, filled with 5 L of deionized water
IMPORTANT
Before you start this procedure, turn off the system. If you perform this procedure with
the system on (in Standby mode), the system supplies deionized water through the
supply tube, the float sensor in the deionized water tank activates, and water drains
continuously from the tube.
Clean the Deionized Water Tank
1 To shut down the system, select End. For more information, refer to System Shutdown
(End Process).
2 Open the right front door of the analyzer unit.

3 Position a basin on the floor under the deionized water tank to catch spilled water.
6-62 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.33 Deionized Water Tank
1. Deionized water tank 2. Quick disconnects
4 Unplug the black float sensor connector 795.

5 Press the gray buttons of the quick disconnect joints on the front of the tank and
remove the tubes.
IMPORTANT
When the float sensor and tubing are removed from the tank, deionized water can
drip. If the deionized water drips, immediately wipe off the water with a clean, dry
lint-free absorbent tissue.
6 Pull the deionized water tank out of the analyzer. Confirm that the tubes clear the top of
the tank and wrap them in a clean absorbent tissue.
7 Unscrew the cap of the tank and remove the float sensor.
A98352AC 6-63
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.34 Float Sensor
1. Cap 3. Deionized water tank

2. Float sensor
8 Discard the deionized water in the tank.

9 Clean the tank with sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%).
10 Rinse the tank thoroughly using deionized water and set aside and allow the tank to
dry.
11 Clean the float sensor and the exterior part of the tubes with deionized water.
12 Remove the deionized water filter from the case attached to the water supply tube over
the basin by unscrewing it. Water drips from it.
6-64 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.35 Deionized Water Filter
1. Water supply tube 4. Cap of filter case

2. Filter case 5. Joint
3. Deionized water filter
13 Locate the sample probe filter case directly to the left of the diluted wash solution tank
and remove it from the bracket.
14 Press the gray button of the quick disconnect joints and pull to remove the tubes from
the top and bottom of the filter case.
15 Unscrew the filter case over the basin and remove the sample probe filter.
IMPORTANT
When working with the sample probe filter, do not lose the O-ring.
A98352AC 6-65
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.36 Sample Probe Filter
1. Quick disconnect 2. Filter case
Clean the Deionized Water Filter and Sample Probe Filter
1 Place the deionized water filter and the sample probe filter in the sonicator filled with
deionized water.
2 Sonicate the filters for 10 minutes.

3 Reinsert the clean deionized water filter into its case and tighten the cap.
4 Reinsert the clean sample probe filter into the filter case.
IMPORTANT
When working with the sample probe filter, do not lose the O-ring.
6-66 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.37 Sample Probe Filter
1. Filter positioning insert 3. O-ring

2. Sample probe filter
5 Tighten the filter case firmly.
CAUTION
Do not connect the filter case to the joints upside down. If you connect the filter
case upside down, debris can cause data errors.
6 Reconnect the quick disconnects by forcing the tubes into their connections until you
hear a distinct click.
7 Push the filter case into the metal bracket.
Replace the Deionized Water Tank
1 Fill the clean tank with 5 L of deionized water.
IMPORTANT
Fill the deionized water tank with 5 L of deionized water before turning the system
on. If the deionized water tank is empty and the pump turns on, a malfunction can
result when the system is turned on.
2 Place the float sensor into the deionized water tank. Tighten the cap.
3 Place the tank into the system and reinsert all water supply tubes into the top of the
tank. Push the tank into place.
4 Reconnect each quick disconnect to the tank by forcing the tube into its connection
until you hear a distinct click.
5 Reconnect the float sensor connector 795.

6 Wipe any spilled water from the analyzer surface and remove the basin.
A98352AC 6-67
Maintenance
Quarterly Maintenance
7 Press the ON button. The system powers on and initializes, enters into Warm up for 20
minutes, and then enters Standby.
8 When the New Index dialog displays, select New Index.
Perform a Prime Washing Line
buttons.
6 Press the DIAG button. Watch the sample probe tubing, reagent probe tubing, and water
supply tubing for the wash nozzle component as the system performs the prime. Repeat
the prime until all bubbles are removed from the tubing by pressing the DIAG button.

Log.
Perform the following procedures quarterly (every three months).
• Clean the Air Filters
• Inspect and, if Needed, Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and
Replace the O-ring
Clean the Air Filters

The air filters prevent dust and other contaminates from entering the analyzer.
CAUTION
Do not run the analyzer without filters in position. If filters are missing, heaters and
the power supplies get dusty, which can cause a short circuit and fire.
Materials Required:
6-68 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
• Air filter
• Vacuum
(End Process).
2 Press EM STOP to completely turn off the power, including the fans. An emergency stop
is necessary to avoid the risk of the fans bringing dust into the analyzer while the filter
is removed.
3 Open the left front door of the analyzer unit.

4 Remove the air filter.
Figure 6.38 Air Filter Location
1. Air filter
5 Vacuum the dust from the filter or clean the filter with water and allow the filter to
completely dry.
Replace the air filter if it is torn.
The air filter can be cleaned with a vacuum without being removed from the analyzer. If
the filter is moved from its original position after cleaning, reposition the filter to its
original flat condition and position.
IMPORTANT
If you are cleaning the filter with water, confirm that the filter is completely dry
before replacing it on the system to avoid moisture from getting into the system.
A98352AC 6-69
Maintenance
6 Replace the filter in its original position.

database.
10 The system is in Warm up mode for 1.5 hours. When the New Index dialog displays,
select New Index.
After the required 20 minutes for the lamp to warm up, wait until the temperature of
the cuvette wheel reaches 37 °C, then select Home > Analyzer Maintenance. Select Stand
By (F4) to return to the Standby mode.
Log.
Inspect and, if Needed, Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and Replace the
O-ring

• Sample Probe Filter
• Deionized Water Filter
• O-rings
For information on how to remove the filters, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
6-70 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.39 Parts in the Sample Probe Filter Case
1. Filter positioning insert 3. O-ring

2. Sample probe filter
Figure 6.40 Deionized Water Filter
1. Water supply tube 4. Filter case cap

2. Filter case 5. Joint
3. Deionized water filter
A98352AC 6-71
Maintenance
Six-Month Maintenance
1 When the filters are removed for cleaning, inspect them. If the filters cannot be cleaned
successfully, replace them.
2 Replace the O-ring. For more information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
Log.
Perform the following procedures every six months.
• Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wedges
Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wedges

To maintain correct operation of the photometry system, the cuvettes and the wedges must
be clean. There are 12 wedges, 34 cuvettes per wedge, for a total of 408 cuvettes per
analyzer unit.
You check the cuvettes weekly (during the photocal procedure). Perform this procedure
every 6 months to keep the cuvettes in optimal condition, and if a cuvette overflow occurs.
Materials Required:
• Sonicator
• Plastic containers to hold cuvettes in the sonicator
• Large plastic containers to hold cuvette wedges
CAUTION
There are cuvettes with different interior and outer dimension. The AU5800 uses
cuvette PN MU855200 with an interior dimension of 5 mm x 4 mm. These cuvettes
are different from the other AU analyzers. Do not use a cuvette from another AU
analyzer on the AU5800. Use of a cuvette other than the AU5800 cuvette on the
AU5800 causes erroneous results.
Remove the Cuvette Wedges
Perform this procedure on a work surface protected with clean, dry, lint-free absorbent
tissue.
6-72 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
buttons.
4 Select Replace Cuvette. The system displays the Replace Cuvette dialog.
6 Lift the main front cover of each analyzer unit.

7 Press the DIAG button. The analyzer initializes the probes.
8 Carefully remove the cuvette wedge cover. Avoid bumping the probes with the cuvette
wedge cover.
Figure 6.41 Cuvette Wheel Component
1. Cuvette wheel cover 2. Cuvette wedge cover
9 To remove the cuvette wedge, loosen the screw and then lift the cuvette wedge out of
the cuvette wheel.
Figure 6.42 Remove a Cuvette Wedge
1. Screw 3. Cuvette wedge cover

2. Cuvette wedge
A98352AC 6-73
Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not loosen or remove the positioning pins. The positioning pins keep the
cuvette wheel in correct alignment. Incorrect results or system errors can occur.
CAUTION
When handling cuvettes, do not scratch the cuvettes. If a cuvette is scratched, the
photometric data is inaccurate, and you must replace the cuvette.
CAUTION
To maintain correct photometric analysis, do not get fingerprints on the

photometric surface of the cuvettes. Always wear gloves when handling the
cuvettes.
CAUTION
There are cuvettes with different interior and outer dimension. The AU5800 uses
cuvette PN MU855200 with an interior dimension of 5 mm x 4 mm. These
cuvettes are different from the other AU analyzers. Do not use a cuvette from
another AU analyzer on the AU5800. Use of a cuvette other than the AU5800
cuvette on the AU5800 causes erroneous results.
10 Press the DIAG button to move the next cuvette wedge to the changing position.
11 Repeat steps 9 to 10 to remove all 12 wedges.
Remove the Cuvettes from the Wedge

Perform this procedure over a protected work surface.
Use a finger or the reverse end of a cotton-tipped applicator to push each cuvette from
the bottom to remove it from the wedge. Remove all the 408 cuvettes from the 12
wedges.
6-74 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.43 Remove a Cuvette
1. Cuvette wedge 3. Photometric face

2. Cuvette 4. Frosted glass face
Clean All Cuvettes and Wedges
CAUTION
When handling cuvettes, do not scratch the cuvettes. If a cuvette is scratched, the
1 Submerge all cuvettes in a plastic container filled with 2% wash solution.

2 Sonicate for 15 minutes.
3 Thoroughly rinse the cuvettes in deionized water, or sonicate them in deionized water
for 10 minutes to remove any residual wash solution.
4 Allow the cuvettes to dry completely.
IMPORTANT
Use one of the following cuvette drying methods:

— Allow cuvettes to air dry.
— Use an oven with the heat set under 50 °C (122 °F).
— Use a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue.
5 Rinse the cuvette wedges with deionized water and dry thoroughly with a clean, dry,
lint-free absorbent tissue.
A98352AC 6-75
Maintenance
6 Insert the cuvettes into the wedges. Confirm that each cuvette is gently pushed down
completely into the wedge.
Figure 6.44 Insert the cuvettes into the wedges
1. Bottom 2. Push in
CAUTION
Confirm that 408 cuvettes are correctly installed in the cuvette wedges. If one of
the cuvettes is missing, the mixture, reagent, or wash solution spills into the
cuvette wheel, causing a cuvette wheel overflow and preventing successful
analysis.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the cuvettes when replacing cuvettes on the cuvette wedges.
Never touch the photometric surface of a cuvette. If the photometric surface is
scratched or stained, analysis data is inaccurate. Wear gloves when handling the
cuvettes.
7 Replace the cuvette wedges in the original positions on the analyzer unit.
8 Align the numbers on the wedge with the numbers on the cuvette wheel. Gently push
the cuvette wedges down completely into the wheel.
9 Tighten the screw to fix the cuvette wedge.

10 Press the DIAG button to move the cuvette wheel to the next replacing position.
11 Repeat steps 8 to 10 to remove all 12 wedges.
6-76 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance
12 After replacing the cuvette wedges in the cuvette wheel, confirm that all 12 cuvette
wedges are in place. Confirm that the top of each cuvette is even with the top of the
wedge and that each wedge is level within the cuvette wheel.
13 Replace the cuvette wedge cover.

Log.
17 Perform a photocal. For more information, refer to Perform a Photocal.
CAUTION
After cleaning cuvettes, perform a photocal to confirm that the cuvettes are
cleaned correctly.
IMPORTANT
To obtain optimal analysis data, do not start the photocal until the lamp is stable
after turning on the system. The lamp requires 20 minutes to stabilize after you
press the ON button.
18 Confirm that all cuvettes have passed the photocal and run QC before processing
samples.
Yearly Maintenance
Perform the following procedures yearly.
• Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joints
Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joints

Replace each O-ring in the water supply tube mounting joint with a new one yearly.
When installing the water supply tube mounting joints of the wash nozzle component,
inspect the following items.
• All six O-rings are seated in a groove, refer to Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply
Tube Mounting Joints.
• Particles such as dust or wash solution crystals are not observed on or around the O-
rings.
A98352AC 6-77
Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance
Figure 6.45 Manifold Base of the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint
1. O-ring
Materials Required:
• O-rings
• Pair of tweezers

buttons.
7 Select OK.
CAUTION
Before cleaning or replacing the tube mounting joints, drain the water remaining
in the wash nozzles. If you loosen any manifold without draining the remaining
water, the water spills out of the nozzle. If the water spills onto the cuvettes,
6-78 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance
9 Loosen the manifolds for the water supply tube mounting joints and remove them from
the mounting positions.
Figure 6.46 Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint
1. Water supply tube mounting joint 2. Wash nozzle component

manifolds (A total of six O-rings are
used in each joint)
Figure 6.47 Loosen the manifolds
10 Using a pair of tweezers, remove each O-ring from the groove. Wipe away any
crystallization or foreign matter found around O-ring grooves.
11 Set new O-rings into the grooves.

12 Replace the manifolds into their positions on the analyzer unit. Match the colored dot
on the manifold with the one next to its position. Tighten the manifolds without cross
threading and do not over tighten. For more information, refer to Clean the Wash
Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints.
A98352AC 6-79
Maintenance
As Needed Maintenance
Figure 6.48 Match the colored dot
1. Green 3. Yellow
2. Water supply tube mounting joint
manifolds
13 Select Prime Wash Nozzle. The system displays the Prime Wash Nozzle dialog.
16 Confirm that the tube mounting joints do not leak. If you detect a leak, unscrew the
manifold for the water supply tube mounting joint, and confirm that the O-rings are
installed correctly.
IMPORTANT
If you use the O-rings for a long time without cleaning or if you replace the joint
manifold without the O-rings correctly set, wash solution crystals can form, causing
errors with the cuvettes. Inspect the O-rings along with the monthly maintenance
of the wash nozzle component.

Log.
• Replenish the Wash Solution
• Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes
• Replace a Sample Probe
• Replace a Reagent Probe
• Replace the Mix Bars
6-80 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
• Replace the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints

• Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE Sample, or ISE Buffer Syringe
• Replace the Wash Syringe Type 1
• Replace the Wash Syringe Type 2
• Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators
• Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes
• Replace the Sample or Reagent Probe Tubing
• Perform a W1
• Replace Rack ID Labels
• Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes
• Clean the Cuvettes, Cuvette Wedges, and Cuvette Wheel after an Overflow
• Replace the Photometer Lamp
• Clean the Rack
• Clean the Rack Tray
• Clean the Rack Transfer Lanes
• Save Parameters
• Reset the System from Stop to Standby Mode
Replenish the Wash Solution

The 20 L master wash solution tank located under the rack feeder unit is replenished as
needed.
The master wash solution tank on each analyzer unit is automatically supplied with the
solution from the tank on the rack feeder unit.
The system continues analysis for up to 4 hours after the master wash solution tank under
the rack feeder unit becomes empty by using the wash solution in each tank on the analyzer
units.
To replenish the master wash solution:
WARNING
• Wear gloves to prevent hands from coming in contact with the concentrated wash
solution. If hands or clothes come in contact with concentrated wash solution, wash
them immediately with water. If the concentrated wash solution comes into contact
with the eyes or mouth, flush with water and consult a doctor immediately.
• If the concentrated wash solution is splashed or accidentally spills, clean the spill
according to laboratory Standard Operating Procedures. If any spill is left untreated, the
spill may generate toxic gas and corrode parts of the analyzer.

• Wash Solution
1 Open the front door of the rack feeder unit.
A98352AC 6-81
Maintenance
Figure 6.49 Master Wash Solution Tank Location
1. Master Wash Solution Tank 2. Sensor connector (290)
2 Pull the master wash solution tank forward.
Figure 6.50 Pull the master wash solution tank
1. Master Wash Solution Tank Cap
3 Unscrew the master wash solution tank cap.

4 Fill the master wash solution tank with wash solution by carefully pouring wash
solution into the tank.
5 Replace the master wash solution tank cap and tighten the cap.
6-82 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
TIP
You can add new wash solution to the remaining wash solution in the wash solution
tank.
6 Push the tank backward into the Rack Feeder Unit.

7 Close the front door of the rack feeder unit.
Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes
CAUTION
If reagent probes are contaminated or stained, carryover between reagents can

occur. To prevent contamination and to provide correct analysis and results, clean
the reagent probes as needed.
The cleaning procedure for each probe is identical.

Materials Required:
• Stylet φ0.3 (diameter)

buttons.
4 Select Replace Reagent Probe. The system displays the Replace Reagent Probe dialog.
6 In Cuvette, select Inner for R1-1 and R2-1 or Outer for R1-2 and R2-2.
7 Select R1 or R2. For Times enter 3, and then select OK.
8 Lift the front upper cover of each analyzer unit.

9 Press the DIAG button. When you press the DIAG button, the selected probe initializes,
then drains the deionized water in the probe.
10 Press the DIAG button. The selected probe moves forward.
11 Unscrew the connector above the probe.
A98352AC 6-83
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
When handling the probe, do not bend or damage the probe tip.
12 Lift the probe from the arm.

13 Wipe the tip of the probe with an alcohol prep pad.
14 Carefully insert the stylet into the probe to remove the obstruction.
15 Return the probe to its arm and tighten the connector over the top.
16 Press the DIAG button. Watch the dispense to confirm that you reinstalled the probe
correctly.
17 If the water is spraying or not dispensing straight from the probe tip, replace the probe.
For more information, refer to Replace a Reagent Probe.

Log.
Replace a Sample Probe

The sample probes deliver precise quantities of sample to the cuvettes.
Clogged, bent, or damaged probes can affect correct analysis.
If the probes are still contaminated after cleaning, replace the probes.
For more information on materials, refer to Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance.
Materials Required:
• Sample probe
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the sample probe is above the wash well and then replace it with a new
one. Deionized water drips from the probe tip as the connector is unscrewed.
IMPORTANT

6-84 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
3 Unscrew the connector above the probe.
Figure 6.51 Remove a Sample Probe
1. Sample probe connector (S2) 3. Sample probe transfer (S2)

2. Sample probe connector (S1) 4. Sample probe transfer (S1)
4 Allow water to drip from the probe, then lift the probe from the arm.
5 Place the new probe into its position and tighten the connector over the top. Firmly
tighten the connector so that no leaks occur.
NOTE
If the probe connector does not fit, confirm that you are replacing the correct
probe type. The sample probe has a smaller diameter than the reagent probe.
Or
Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance. The system displays the ISE
buttons.
Or
buttons.
8 Select the option for the probe you are replacing.

Table 6.23 Probe Options
Probe Maintenance Operation Button
Sample probe Replace Sample Probe
A98352AC 6-85
Maintenance
Table 6.23 Probe Options (Continued)

ISE Sample Probe (ISE) Replace Sample Probe
The system displays the Replace Sample Probe dialog.
9 The system selects all units by default. If a unit is not required, deselect the Unit. For
Cuvette, select Inner for S1 or Outer for S2 when replacing a sample probe on an
analyzer unit. For Times, enter 3, and then select OK.
the deionized water is dispensed in a thin straight stream, and does not spray or
dispense at an angle.

12 Clear the Analyzer Maintenance box or ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the
Log.
14 Perform QC, inspect the data, and recalibrate if necessary.
Replace a Reagent Probe

The reagent probes deliver precise quantities of reagent to the cuvettes.
Clogged, bent, or damaged probes can affect correct analysis.

If the probes are still contaminated after cleaning, replace the probes.
Materials Required:
• Reagent probe
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the reagent probe is above the wash well and then replace it with a new
one. Deionized water drips from the probe tip as the connector is unscrewed.
IMPORTANT
6-86 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
buttons.
4 Select Replace Reagent Probe.

Table 6.24 Probe Options
Replace Reagent Probe

Reagent Probe
(R1-1)
Reagent Probe
(R1-2)
Reagent Probe
(R2-1)
Reagent Probe
(R2-2)
The system displays the Replace Reagent Probe dialog.
5 The system selects all units by default. If a unit is not required, deselect the Unit. Select
the probe (Inner/Outer and R1/R2) to be replaced. For Times, enter 3, and then select
OK.

7 Press the DIAG button. When the DIAG button is pressed, the selected probes initialize,
and then drain the DI water in the probe.
8 Press the DIAG button. The selected probe moves forward.
9 Unscrew the silver connector above the probe.
Figure 6.52 Remove a Reagent Probe
1. Reagent probe connectors
A98352AC 6-87
Maintenance
10 Lift the probe from the arm.

11 Place the new probe into its position and tighten the connector over the top. Firmly
tighten the connector so that no leaks occur.
NOTE
If the probe connector does not fit, confirm that you are replacing the correct
probe type. The sample probe has a smaller diameter than the reagent probe.
12 Press the DIAG button. After the probe initializes, deionized water is dispensed from the
probe tip. Confirm that the deionized water is dispensed in a thin straight stream, and
does not spray or dispense at an angle.

Log.
Replace the Mix Bars

Replace the mix bars if they are stained, damaged, or if the fluororesin coating is chipped.
Materials Required:
• R1/S: Spiral shape mix bar
• R2: L shape mix bar
Figure 6.53 Mix Bars
1. Spiral-shaped mix bar 3. Blue

2. L-shaped mix bar 4. Yellow
6-88 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not operate the mix bar component when replacing a mix bar. Replacement of the
mix bar during operation can cause an injury.

3 Pull out the mix bar to be replaced.
Figure 6.54 Remove a Mix Bar
4 Insert a new mix bar into the mix bar component.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the mix bar when inserting the mix bar into the mix bar
component. Scratched or damaged mix bars can cause sample and reagent
carryover and affect results.
Rotate each mix bar slightly to insert completely.
CAUTION
The shapes of the mix bars differ between mix types. If the spiral and L-shaped
mix bars are not placed in the correct mix bar component, analysis results can be
affected. The placement of each mix bar shape:
— R1 and S positions: Spiral-shaped mix bar
— R2 positions: L-shaped mix bar
A98352AC 6-89
Maintenance
buttons.
7 Select Replace Mix Bar. The system displays the Replace Mix Bar dialog.
9 Select The First Mixer or The Second Mixer.
11 Press the DIAG button. The selected mix bar component initializes and performs a
sequence.

Log.
Replace the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints

When inspecting the wash nozzle tube mounting joints, replace the packing if it is
overstretched, cracked, or torn.
Materials Required:
• Packing
• Pair of tweezers

2 Open the rear cover of the analyzer.
buttons.
7 Select OK.
6-90 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
NOTE
Before cleaning or replacing the wash nozzle joints, drain the water remaining in
the wash nozzles. If you loosen any manifold without draining the remaining water,
the water spills out of the nozzle. If the water spills onto the cuvettes, refer to
Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wedges.
9 Remove all the wash nozzle tube mounting joints.
Figure 6.55 Wash Nozzle and Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint Manifold Location
1. Water supply tube mounting joint 3. Wash nozzle component

manifold
2. Wash nozzle tube mounting joint
manifold
10 Remove the packing with tweezers from each tube mounting joint.
11 Install new packing on each tube mounting joint.
IMPORTANT
Place the packing in the groove of each tube mounting joint.
Figure 6.56 Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joint
A98352AC 6-91
Maintenance
1. Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints 3. Groove of the tube mounting joint
2. Packing
12 Install all the wash nozzle tube mounting joints into their original positions. Match the
colored dot on the manifold with the one next to its position.
Figure 6.57 Match the Colored Dots
1. White 4. Blue
2. Yellow 5. Green
3. Wash nozzle tube mounting joint
manifold
IMPORTANT
Install the tube mounting joints in the correct positions. The tube mounting joints
are color-coded to match where the placement of each joint belongs on the
analyzer.
IMPORTANT
Tighten the cap of each tube mounting joint firmly when replacing the tube
mounting joints, otherwise leaks can result.
15 Press the DIAG button. Confirm that the wash nozzle component is operating correctly.

Log.
6-92 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE Sample, or ISE Buffer Syringe

For replacing a wash syringe, refer to Replace the Wash Syringe Type 1 or Replace the
Wash Syringe Type 2.
The procedures for replacing the sample syringes, reagent syringes, ISE sample syringe,
and ISE buffer syringes are identical.
If a leak, crack, or any other damage is found with a syringe, replace the syringe.
If syringe performance is questionable because of abnormal data, remove and inspect the
syringe.
Replace a syringe if:

• There is not smooth resistance when pulling on the piston. A worn or damaged syringe
has a pulling movement that is too hard or too loose.
• The fluorocarbon polymer tip is worn, damaged or there is evidence of the
fluorocarbon polymers flaking.
• The syringe or case leaks even after correct installation.
• The head of the syringe is cracked.
Replace a syringe case if:
• The case head is chipped, worn, or damaged in any way.
Materials Required:
• Sample syringe (S syringe)
• Reagent syringe (R syringe)
• S syringe case
• R syringe case
• ISE buffer syringe case
CAUTION
Identify the S syringe and R syringe using the diameter of the piston shaft. If you
install the incorrect syringe, you obtain incorrect results.
Figure 6.58 Piston Shaft Diameter
1. 2 mm for S syringe and 5 mm

for R syringe
A98352AC 6-93
Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not remove the piston from a new syringe. If you remove the piston, the
performance of the syringe can be unreliable.
Figure 6.59 Sample, Reagent, and ISE Buffer Syringe Case Heads
1. Sample Syringe Case Head (Transparent) 4. Case Head

2. Reagent Syringe Case Head (Transparent) 5. Case Body
3. ISE Buffer Syringe Case Head (Gray) 6. Syringe Case
IMPORTANT
The case heads for the S syringe, R syringe, and ISE Buffer syringe differ in shape and
color.
Table 6.25 Combinations of Syringes and Syringe Cases

Syringe Syringe Case
S R S R ISE
Analyzer Sample syringe X X
Reagent syringe X X
ISE (Option) Sample syringe X X
Buffer syringe X X
6-94 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Remove the Syringe
Procedures for removing the sample syringe, reagent syringe, ISE sample syringe, and ISE
buffer syringe are identical.

2 Open the left front door to access the reagent syringes and left rear door to access the
sample syringes on the analyzer units. Open the top ISE reagent cover to access the ISE
buffer syringes, or the front door of the ISE unit to access the ISE sample syringe.
3 Loosen the bottom piston fixing screw and the top fixing nut to remove the syringe and
the syringe case from the mounting grooves.
4 Pull the syringe and the syringe case forward to remove it from the mounting grooves.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
When removing the syringe and the syringe case, hold the bottom with a clean, dry,
lint-free absorbent tissue. Do not bend the tubing when removing the syringe and
the syringe case.
Figure 6.60 Location of Reagent Syringes
1. Fixing nut 3. Piston fixing screw

2. Syringe and syringe case 4. Fixing screws
A98352AC 6-95
Maintenance
5. Mounting groove 6. Reagent syringe
Figure 6.61 Location of Sample Syringes
1. Fixing nut 5. Mounting groove

2. Syringe and syringe case 6. Wash syringe
3. Piston fixing screw 7. Sample syringe
4. Fixing screws
6-96 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.62 Location of ISE Sample Syringe and ISE Buffer Syringes
1. Buffer syringes 3. Sample syringe

2. Wash syringe 4. Front of ISE unit
5 Tilt the syringe and the syringe case upside down before removing the syringe from the
syringe case. Tilt the syringe and the syringe case prevents air from entering the tubing
lines and keeps the water from leaking into the syringe case.
6 Remove the syringe case body by turning it counterclockwise while holding the case
head. Pull the syringe from the case head.
Do not lose the O-ring, which can drop from the case head. If the O-ring remains in the
case head, carefully remove it with tweezers.
A98352AC 6-97
Maintenance
Install a New Syringe or a New Syringe Case
1 Obtain a new syringe, and if necessary, a new syringe case.

2 Insert the new syringe into the case head.
3 Dry excess water from the syringe and case head to prevent condensation from forming
in the case body. Screw the syringe case body into the case head by twisting clockwise.
Do not over-tighten. Tighten the syringe case body by 45 to 60 degrees from the
position that it becomes tight.
4 Install the syringe and the syringe case by placing the case head into the mounting
groove. Align the syringe piston into the drive shaft.
CAUTION
with water.
5 Tighten the top fixing nut and then tighten the bottom piston fixing screw.
Prime the New Syringe
or
buttons.
or
buttons.
3 After replacing the syringe, select the maintenance operation button. The system
displays the Replace Reagent Syringe or Replace Sample Syringe dialog.
Table 6.26 Sample, Reagent, and ISE Buffer Syringe Prime Function
Syringe Maintenance Operation Button
S1 or S2 sample syringe (S syringe) Replace Sample Syringe
R1-1, R1-2, R2-1, or R2-2 reagent syringe (R Replace Reagent Syringe

syringe)
6-98 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Table 6.26 Sample, Reagent, and ISE Buffer Syringe Prime Function (Continued)
Syringe Maintenance Operation Button
ISE sample syringe (S syringe) (ISE) Replace Sample Syringe
ISE buffer syringe (R syringe) (ISE) Buffer Prime
4 In the dialog, select the quantity of cycle times, and then select OK.
Table 6.27 Sample, Reagent, and ISE Prime Cycle Times
Maintenance Operation Button Setting
Replace Sample Syringe

— Each Unit is checked. Remove the check if
the syringe is not being replaced on that
unit(s).
— For Cuvette, select Inner for S1, Outer
for S2 or Both.
— Times setting is preset at 260.
Replace Reagent Syringe

— Each Unit is checked. Remove the check if
the syringe is not being replaced on that
unit(s).
— For Cuvette, select Inner for R1-1 and
R2-1, Outer for R1-2 and R2-2 or Both.
— For Reagent Syringe, select R1, R2, or
Both.
— For Times, select 5 or more.
(ISE) Replace Sample Syringe

— Times setting is preset at 260.
(ISE) Buffer Prime

— Preset.
6 For the reagent syringe or ISE buffer syringe and tubing: If there are bubbles in the
syringe after priming, repeat the prime until all bubbles are cleared. If you cannot clear
the bubbles after the prime, perform the corrective actions. For more information, refer
to Corrective Actions if Prime Fails for Reagent Syringe or ISE Buffer Syringe.
or
For the sample syringe and tubing: If the prime fails (air is still detected), the system
displays a Sample Syringe Prime Incomplete alarm. Repeat the prime. If the
system generates the alarm again, replace the syringe.
NOTE
The sample syringe prime can take from 12 to 44 minutes to complete. The sample
syringe primes until the system detects no air using pressure changes.
A98352AC 6-99
Maintenance

or
Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
Log.
Corrective Actions if Prime Fails for Reagent Syringe or ISE Buffer Syringe
2 Pull the syringe and the syringe case forward to remove it from the mounting grooves.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
When removing the syringe and the syringe case, hold the bottom with a clean, dry,
lint-free absorbent tissue. Do not bend the tubing when removing the syringe and
the syringe case.
IMPORTANT
Do not apply excessive force to the fixing screws when you remove the syringe and
the syringe case. Excessive force to the fixing screws damages the syringe case.
3 Slowly move the syringe piston up and down by hand. Confirm that there are no
bubbles on the syringe tip.
If you see bubbles, move the piston up and down until the bubbles are purged.
CAUTION
Do not move the piston by hand with the syringe case disconnected.
If you move the syringe piston with the syringe case disconnected, the accuracy is
not retained because of the deformation of the piston. This deformation can
decrease the time a syringe is in use before requiring replacement.
6-100 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.63 Confirm No Bubbles are on the Syringe Tip
1. Confirm that no bubbles are 3. Syringe

attached to the fluorocarbon 4. Case body
polymer tip. 5. Piston
2. Case head
NOTE
This figure illustrates the disconnected syringe case body and case head to show
the location to inspect for bubbles. Do not disconnect the syringe case body from
the case head to confirm that there are no bubbles.
Replace the Wash Syringe Type 1

If a leak, crack, or any other damage is found when the syringe is inspected, you must
replace the syringe.
syringe.
Replace the Wash Syringe Type 1 if:

• There is not smooth resistance when pulling on the piston. A worn or damaged syringe
has a pulling movement that is too hard or too loose.
• The fluorocarbon polymer tip is worn, damaged or there is evidence of the
fluorocarbon polymers flaking.
• The syringe or the syringe case leaks even after correct installation.
Replace the syringe case if the syringe case is chipped, worn, or damaged in any way.
If leaks occur around the seal assembly even though the seal assembly is not loose, replace
the seal assembly.
A98352AC 6-101
Maintenance
Materials Required:
• Wash Syringe Type 1 (R syringe)
• R syringe case
• Seal assembly
CAUTION
Do not remove the piston from a new syringe. If you remove the piston, the
performance of the syringe can be unreliable.
Figure 6.64 Wash Syringe Type 1
1. Syringe case 3. Case body

2. Case head 4. Fixing screws
Remove the Wash Syringe Type 1

2 To prime the analyzer Wash Syringes Type 1, select Home > Analyzer Maintenance >
Maintenance. The system displays the Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance tab to
replace the wash syringe in the analyzer unit.
or
To prime the ISE Wash Syringe Type 1, select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE
Maintenance. The system displays the ISE Maintenance: Maintenance tab to replace the
wash syringe in the ISE unit
3 Select the Analyzer Maintenance box to replace the wash syringe in the analyzer unit.
or
Select the ISE Maintenance box to replace the wash syringe in the ISE unit.
The system activates the maintenance operation buttons.
6-102 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
4 Select Replace Wash Syringe. The system displays the Replace Wash Syringe dialog.
For analyzer units, each Unit is checked.
Select OK.
CAUTION
Select OK before replacing the wash syringe. If you remove the syringe from the
case head before selecting OK, water leaks from the case head.
NOTE
The purpose for selecting Replace Wash Syringe and then OK is to stop the
deionized water pump. It is not necessary to select Cuvette and Times.
5 Open the left rear door of the analyzer unit to access the wash syringes on the analyzer
units or open the front door of the ISE unit to access the wash syringe on the ISE unit.
7 Pull the syringe and syringe case forward to remove them from the mounting grooves.
Figure 6.65 Location of Wash Syringe (Analyzer unit)
1. Fixing nut 5. Sample syringe

2. Syringe and syringe case 6. Tube connecting nut
3. Piston fixing screw 7. Seal assembly
4. Wash syringe
A98352AC 6-103
Maintenance
Figure 6.66 Location of Wash Syringe (ISE unit)
1. Front of ISE unit 4. Piston fixing screw

2. Fixing nut 5. Seal assembly
3. Syringe and syringe case 6. Tube connecting nut
IMPORTANT
When removing the syringe and the syringe case from the mounting grooves, hold
the bottom with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue. Do not bend the tubing
when removing the syringe and the syringe case.
8 Tilt the syringe and the syringe case upside down before removing the syringe from the
syringe case. Tilting the syringe and the syringe case prevents air from entering the
tubing lines and keeps the water from leaking into the syringe case.
Install a New Syringe, a New Syringe Case, or a New Seal Assembly (For Wash Syringe Type 1)
1 Remove the case body by turning it counterclockwise while holding the case head. Pull
the syringe from the case head.
Do not lose the O-ring, which can drop from the case head. If the O-ring remains in the
case head, carefully remove it with tweezers.
2 Obtain a new syringe, and if necessary, a new syringe case and a seal assembly.
3 To replace the syringe case, loosen the tube connecting nut, remove it from the case
head, and then connect it to the new case head.
4 To replace the seal assembly, unscrew and remove the seal assembly, and then install
the new seal assembly.
6-104 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the packing located in the screw of the new seal assembly is not loose.
If you handle the packing carelessly, the packing can fall out because the packing is
inserted into the screw and not glued.
Figure 6.67 Seal Assembly
1. Silver screw 2. Packing
5 Insert the new syringe into the case head.

6 Dry excess water from the syringe and case head to prevent condensation from forming
in the case body. Screw the case body into the case head by twisting clockwise. Do not
over tighten. Tighten the case body by 45 to 60 degrees from the position that it became
tight.
Prime the Wash Syringe to Remove the Air for Wash Syringe Type 1
1 Select Replace Sample Syringe.

The system displays the Replace Sample Syringe dialog.
For analyzer units, each Unit is checked. Remove the check if the syringe is not being
replaced on that unit(s).
For analyzer units, for Cuvette, select Inner for W1, Outer for W2 or Both.
Confirm that Times is set to 260, and then select OK.
2 Press the DIAG button on the analyzer unit or ISE unit with the new wash syringe to
initiate the prime.
3 Watch the syringe prime and confirm that it is not leaking. If the syringe is leaking,
press the DIAG button to stop the prime, and then repeat the Install a New Syringe, a
New Syringe Case, or a New Seal Assembly (For Wash Syringe Type 1) procedure.
A98352AC 6-105
Maintenance
4 Confirm that the air is primed out of the syringe. If the prime fails (air is still detected),
the system displays a Sample Syringe Prime Incomplete alarm. Repeat the prime.
If the system generates the alarm again, replace the syringe.
5 After finishing the prime, loosen the bottom piston fixing screw and the top fixing nut,
then pull the syringe and the syringe case forward to remove them from the mounting
grooves.
IMPORTANT
When removing the syringe and the syringe case from the mounting groove, hold
the bottom with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue. Do not bend the tubing
when removing the syringe and the syringe case.
IMPORTANT
Do not apply excessive force to the fixing screws when you remove the syringe and
the syringe case. Excessive force to the fixing screws damages the syringe case.
6 Slowly move the syringe piston up and down by hand. Confirm that there are no
bubbles on the syringe tip.
If bubbles are there, move the piston up and down until the bubbles are purged.
CAUTION
Do not move the piston by hand with the syringe case disconnected.
If you move the piston with the syringe case disconnected, the accuracy is not
retained because of the deformation of the piston. This deformation can decrease
the time a syringe is in use before requiring replacement.
Figure 6.68 Confirm No Bubbles are on the Syringe Tip
1. Confirm that no 2. Case head

bubbles are attached to 3. Syringe
the fluorocarbon 4. Case body
polymer tip 5. Piston
6-106 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
NOTE
This figure illustrates the disconnected case body and case head to show the
location to inspect for bubbles. Do not disconnect the case body from the case
head to confirm that there are no bubbles.
8 Close all doors and covers on the analyzer units and the ISE unit.
Log.
Replace the Wash Syringe Type 2

If a leak, crack, or any other damage is found when the syringe is inspected, you must
replace the syringe.
syringe.
Replace Wash Syringe Type 2 if there are leaks around the syringe.
If leaks occur around the seal assembly even though the seal assembly is not loose, replace
the seal assembly.
Replace the Wash Syringe Type 2 piston if there is a leak at the bottom of the syringe even
after replacing the syringe.
Materials Required:
• Seal Assembly
• Piston
A98352AC 6-107
Maintenance
Figure 6.69 Wash Syringe Type 2
1. Wash Syringe Type 2 3. Seal Assembly

2. Piston
Remove the Wash Syringe for Type 2

buttons.
4 Select Replace Wash Syringe. The system displays the Replace Wash Syringe dialog.
Each Unit is checked.
Select OK.
NOTE
The purpose for selecting Replace Wash Syringe and then OK is to stop the
deionized water pump. It is not necessary to select Cuvette and Times.
CAUTION
Select OK before replacing the wash syringe. If you remove the tube connecting
nut from the syringe before selecting OK, water sprays from the tube.
5 Open the left rear door of the analyzer unit.

6 Unscrew the tube connecting nut on the top of the syringe.
7 Loosen the bottom piston fixing screw and the top fixing nut to remove the syringe
from the mounting grooves.
8 Pull the syringe forward to remove it from the mounting grooves.
6-108 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.70 Location of Wash Syringe
1. Fixing nut 4. Wash syringe

2. Syringe 5. Sample syringe
3. Piston fixing screw
IMPORTANT
When removing the syringe from the mounting grooves, hold the bottom with a
clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue. Do not bend the tubing when removing the
syringe.
Install a New Wash Syringe and Seal Assembly (For Wash Syringe Type 2)
1 Obtain a new syringe, a new piston, and a seal assembly.

2 If necessary, unscrew and remove the seal assembly, and then install the new seal
assembly.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the packing located in the screw of the new seal assembly is not loose.
If you handle the packing carelessly, the packing can fall out because the packing is
inserted into the screw and not glued.
A98352AC 6-109
Maintenance
Figure 6.71 Seal Assembly
1. Silver screw 2. Packing
Figure 6.72
1. Piston
3 Wipe the piston with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
4 Gently insert the piston into the new wash syringe.
IMPORTANT
Do not damage the piston. If the piston is damaged, leaks from the bottom of the
syringe may occur.
5 Connect the tubing to the top of the syringe and tighten the tube connecting nut.
6 Install the syringe into the mounting groove. Align the syringe piston into the drive
shaft.
Prime the Wash Syringe to Remove the Air for Wash Syringe Type 2
1 Select Replace Sample Syringe.

The system displays the Replace Sample Syringe dialog.
6-110 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Each Unit is checked. Remove the check if the syringe is not being replaced on that
unit(s).
For Cuvette, select Inner for W1 or Outer for W2 or Both.
Confirm that Times is set to 260, and then select OK.
2 Press the DIAG button on the analyzer unit in which the syringe is replaced. The wash
syringe is primed.
TIP
The system primes deionized water through the tubing to remove air.
The sample syringe prime could take from 12 to 44 minutes to complete. The
sample syringe primes until no air is detected by pressure changes. To stop the
operation, press the DIAG button. At this time, an abort error alarm is generated.
The alarm can be cleared, and no corrective actions are required.
3 Watch the syringe prime and confirm that it is not leaking. If the syringe is leaking,
press the DIAG button to stop the prime, and then repeat the Install a New Wash
Syringe and Seal Assembly (For Wash Syringe Type 2) procedure.
4 Confirm that the air is primed out of the syringe.

5 After finishing the prime, if bubbles are still present, tap the top of the wash syringe
with your finger.
CAUTION
Do not touch the moving piston. Injury can result if your finger is caught in the
syringe component.
It is not necessary to remove bubbles around the seal assembly or small bubbles less
than 1 mm in diameter. Small bubbles have no effect on the accuracy of the syringe
dispensing.

Log.
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators

Condensation forms inside the reagent refrigerators caused by exposure to the outside air.
A98352AC 6-111
Maintenance
Keep the reagent refrigerator covers in position to diminish the amount of condensation
formed.
Clean the interior of refrigerators when a reagent is spilled, or as needed after inspection.
If you suspect bacterial contamination, or if you observe mold, contact Beckman Coulter for
the decontamination procedure.
NOTE
Avoid wiping the bar code reader glass window inside the reagent refrigerators. If the
glass window is smudged from wiping, reagent ID read errors can occur.
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators
Materials Required:

3 Remove the reagent refrigerator covers.
4 Remove the reagents along with the reagent tray from each refrigerator by lifting the
white securing pins until they unclip from the base. Lift the tray up from the center, and
gently place the tray in a safe place.
5 Wipe off the condensation and stains on the wall, bottom, and central area inside the
reagent refrigerators with a dry, clean absorbent tissue.
6 Wipe the same components again with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) to
clean the refrigerator. Then, rinse with deionized water and dry with a clean, dry, lint-
free absorbent tissue.
7 Return reagents and reagent tray to its original position for each refrigerator. Set the
tray onto the metal pin. Press down on the white securing pins to secure the reagent
tray.
8 Replace the reagent refrigerator covers.

Log.
6-112 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes

Anti-static brushes reduce the chance of static electricity affecting a sample by removing
static electricity before sampling takes place.
CAUTION
To avoid infection, always wear gloves to clean or replace the anti-static brushes. If
the solution contacts skin or clothes, rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If
the solution contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with water. Seek medical
attention. Follow your laboratory procedure.
Materials Required:
• Anti-static brushes

2 Remove the dark acrylic cover from the rack back of the rack buffer component.
Figure 6.73 Location of Anti-static Brushes
1. Anti-static brushes
3 Loosen the fixing screw at the top of the anti-static brush, and remove the anti-static
brush.
A98352AC 6-113
Maintenance
Figure 6.74 Anti-static Brushes
1. Fixing screws 2. Anti-static brushes
4 Follow the same procedure with the brush component on the other side of the rack
transport.
5 Clean any stains on the brushes with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) from
the base to the end of the bristle tips.
6 If the static discharge brushes are still stained after cleaning or indicate wear, replace
them.
7 Dispose of the old brushes in a receptacle for biohazard waste.

8 Reinstall the anti-static brushes and tighten the fixing screws on top.
9 Replace the dark acrylic cover over the back of the rack buffer component.
Log.
Replace the Sample or Reagent Probe Tubing

Replace the sample or reagent probe tubing if the tubing leaks or breaks.
Replace the sample probe or reagent probe tubing using the same procedure.
Materials Required:
6-114 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
• Sample probe tubing

• Reagent probe tubing
• (ISE) Sample probe tubing
IMPORTANT
Before disconnecting the tubing, confirm that the probe is positioned over the wash
well. Dripping from the probe can occur.

2 Lift the upper cover of the unit.
— Sample probe : Rear upper cover of each analyzer unit
— Reagent probe : Front upper cover of each analyzer unit
— ISE Sample probe : Rear upper cover of ISE unit
3 Loosen the connectors on both sides of the probe tubing to remove it.
Figure 6.75 Probe Tubing
1. Connector
4 Tighten the new tubing connectors to secure both ends of the probe tubing. Tighten the
connectors firmly so that no liquid leaks.
Or
buttons.
Or
Select the Analyzer Maintenance box or ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the
A98352AC 6-115
Maintenance
7 Select Prime Washing line for the analyzer sample and reagent probe, or select Replace
Sample Probe for the ISE sample probe. The system displays the Prime Washing Line or
Replace Sample Probe dialog.
10 Press the DIAG button. Confirm that the tubing is not leaking and that the probe is
dispensing correctly.

12 Clear the Analyzer Maintenance box or ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the
Log.
Perform a W1
If the analyzer is put into Stop mode during analysis, reagents and sample remain in the
cuvettes for longer than normal operation. A W1 cleans the entire cuvette wheel
automatically using the wash nozzle component.

3 Select W1 (F5). The system displays the W1 Start dialog.
5 Select OK. The system starts the W1. The W1 takes approximately 19 minutes. After the
W1 is complete, the system automatically updates the maintenance log.
Replace Rack ID Labels

If a rack ID label is scratched, stained, or deteriorated, an ID read error results. Replace the
rack ID label with a new one.
IMPORTANT
Rack ID labels can deteriorate with time. If a rack ID read error occurs on an older label
and the label shows no anomalies, the label is assumed to have deteriorated from
discoloration or reduction in reflectivity. If the rack ID label is deteriorated, replace all
the labels that have been used for the same time as the concerned label.
6-116 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
• The bar code label is faint, or scratched caused by abrasion or scraping.

• A label is stained or blurred caused by adhesion of foreign matters (liquid or solid).
• A label is peeled or torn.
Materials Required:
• New Rack ID labels
IMPORTANT
If it is difficult to remove a label, dampen the label with water and use a tool to scrape
it off, such as a razor blade or scissors.
Never use an organic solvent such as ethyl alcohol (ethanol). Organic solvents alter the
quality of the plastic surface on a rack.
If you use water, wipe the water off completely so that no moisture remains on the
rack.
Do not scratch the rack surface.
1 Remove the rack ID label.
Figure 6.76 Rack ID Label on a Rack
2 Attach a new rack ID label on the rack. Place the label on the beveled edge of the rack
with the numbers on the left (when looking at the rack).
A98352AC 6-117
Maintenance
CAUTION
When replacing rack ID labels, do not use labels with the same rack ID on more
than one rack. Using duplicate rack IDs can cause concordance errors between
samples.
Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes
CAUTION
Confirm that 408 cuvettes are correctly installed in the cuvette wheel. If one of the
cuvettes is missing, the mixture, reagent, or wash solution spills into the cuvette
wheel, causing a cuvette wheel overflow and preventing successful analysis.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the cuvettes when replacing cuvettes on the cuvette wheel. Never
touch the photometric surface of a cuvette. If the photometric surface is stained or
scratched, analysis data is inaccurate. Wear gloves when handling the cuvettes.
Figure 6.77 Cuvette
1. Photometric face 2. Frosted glass face
NOTE
There are cuvettes with different interior and outer dimensions. The AU5800 uses
cuvette PN MU855200 with an interior dimension of 5 mm x 4 mm. These cuvettes are
different from the other AU analyzers. Do not use a cuvette from another AU analyzer
6-118 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
on the AU5800. Use of a cuvette other than the AU5800 cuvette on the AU5800 causes
erroneous results.
Clean or replace individual cuvettes that fail the weekly photocal procedure. If only a few
cuvettes need cleaning or replacing after a cuvette wheel overflow, you can use this
procedure.
Materials Required:
• Cuvettes
• Plastic container
• Sonicator

buttons.
4 Select Replace Cuvette. The system displays the Replace Cuvette dialog.
5 Lift the upper cover of the analyzer unit.

6 Lift the cuvette wedge cover, carefully remove it from the analyzer, and set it aside.
Figure 6.78 Cuvette Wheel
1. Cuvette wedge cover
7 Press the DIAG button. The analyzer initializes the cuvette wheel and rotates the wheel
to the home position.
8 Press the DIAG button as many times as you need to rotate the cuvette wheel to reach
the cuvette to replace or clean. Each time you press the DIAG button, the cuvette wheel
A98352AC 6-119
Maintenance
rotates to the next wedge. Each wedge has a numerical label so you can identify the
cuvette number to clean or replace. Each wedge has 17 inner and outer cuvettes.
9 Insert the cotton tipped applicator stick to the bottom of the cuvette. Gently pull the
cuvette out of the wedge.
Figure 6.79 Removing the Cuvette
10 Determine if the cuvette needs replacing or cleaning.

— To replace individual cuvettes: Insert the new cuvette into the wedge. Gently push
the cuvette completely into the wedge.
— To clean individual cuvettes: Sonicate cuvettes in a 2% Wash Solution for 15
minutes. If a sonicator is not available, soak them in a 5% Wash Solution overnight.
Rinse the cuvette in deionized water. Allow the cuvettes to completely dry.
11 Replace the new or cleaned cuvette into its position. Gently push the cuvette completely
into the wedge.
12 Replace the cuvette wedge cover.

15 Select OK.
16 Press the DIAG button. Watch as the wash nozzle component moves, and confirm that
the downward motion is not inhibited.
18 Perform a photocal on the individual cuvette. For more information, refer to Perform a
Photocal.
6-120 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Clean the Cuvettes, Cuvette Wedges, and Cuvette Wheel after an Overflow
Erroneous data is generated if the cuvettes become wet on the outside (cuvette overflow).
The reaction of the sample and reagents takes place in a carefully controlled dry incubation
bath. Water on the outside of the cuvette affects the light as it passes through the cuvette.
Test results are impacted due to this change in absorbance. A "Photometry Error During
Cuvette Wash" alarm is generated when an overflow has occurred. Refer to Recovering
from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Alarm. Determine the cause for the
overflow and follow the correct procedures to recover from an overflow.
For more information, refer to Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow.
WARNING
overflow can spread over both the inner and outer cuvettes. Clean the inner and
outer cuvettes, the wedges, and the wheel.

• Cotton tip applicator
• 2% Wash Solution
• Sonicator
• Clean, dry lint-free cloth
• Large plastic containers to hold cuvette wedges
• Plastic containers to hold cuvettes in the sonicator
Remove the Cuvette Wedges and Wheel
Perform this procedure on a work surface protected with clean, dry lint-free cloth.

2 Lift the main front cover of each analyzer unit.
buttons.
5 Select Cleaning Probe. The system displays the Cleaning Probe dialog.
7 Select OK.
8 Press the DIAG button. The analyzer initializes the probes.
A98352AC 6-121
Maintenance
9 Press the DIAG button again to move the probes over the cleaning solution bottles and
away from the cuvette wheel.
Figure 6.80 Cuvette Wheel
1. Cuvette wheel cover 2. Cuvette wedge cover
10 Remove all mix bars that are over the cuvette wheel cover.
11 Loosen the silver screw on the wash nozzle component, and place the wash nozzle
component on the stand by the wash nozzle component manifolds.
12 Carefully remove the cuvette wedge cover, then the cuvette wheel cover. Avoid
bumping the probes or mix bars with the cuvette wheel cover.
13 To remove a cuvette wedge, loosen the screw then lift the cuvette wedge out of the
cuvette wheel. Remove all 12 cuvette wedges.
TIP
The cuvette wheel can be removed with the cuvette wedges; however, the wheel is
large and the cuvette wedges are fairly heavy. Removing the wedges first may
make it easier to remove the wheel.
CAUTION
— When handling cuvettes, do not scratch the cuvettes. If a cuvette is scratched, the
photometric data is inaccurate, and the cuvette must be replaced.
— To maintain correct photometric analysis, do not get fingerprints on the photometric
surface of the cuvettes. Always wear gloves when handling the cuvettes.
— Avoid mixing cuvettes when replacing or cleaning them in laboratories with multiple
Beckman Coulter analyzers other than the AU5800.
6-122 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.81 Remove a Cuvette Wedge
1. Screw 3. Cuvette wedge cover

2. Cuvette wedge
14 Remove the two large flat screws on the metal plate in the center of the cuvette wheel.
These screws are used as handles to remove the cuvette wheel from the incubation
bath.
NOTE
You can remove the cuvette wheel with cuvette wedges. Beckman Coulter
recommends you to remove the wedge first , then remove the wheel, since the
wheel is large and the cuvette wedges are fairly heavy.
15 Remove the two large flat screws on the metal plate in the center of the cuvette wheel.
These screws are used as handles to remove the cuvette wheel from the incubation
bath.
16 Attach the flat screws to the frame of the cuvette wheel. Place one of the screws into the
opening on the wheel close to cuvette number 18 and the other screw close to cuvette
number 120. Firmly tighten the screws into the cuvette wheel.
A98352AC 6-123
Maintenance
Figure 6.82 Remove the Cuvette Wheel
1. Location of flat screws 3. Positioning pin

2. Location of flat screws on frame of
cuvette wheel
17 Using the two flat screws as handles, carefully pull the cuvette wheel up off the two
metal positioning pins. It may be necessary to angle the wheel slightly to clear the mix
units. Place the cuvette wheel on a work surface protected with clean, dry lint-free
cloth.
Remove the Cuvettes from the Wedges
Perform this procedure over a protected work surface.
1 Use a finger or the reverse end of a cotton-tipped applicator stick to push each cuvette
from the bottom to remove it from the wedge. You must remove all 34 cuvettes.
6-124 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.83 Remove a Cuvette
1. Cuvette wedge 3. Photometric face

2. Cuvette 4. Frosted glass face
2 Repeat step 1 to remove all 408 cuvettes from 12 wedges.
Clean the Cuvettes, Cuvette Wedges, and Cuvette Wheel
CAUTION
When handling cuvettes, do not scratch them. If a cuvette is scratched, the

1 Submerge all cuvettes in a plastic container filled with 2% wash solution.

2 Sonicate for 15 minutes.
3 Thoroughly rinse the cuvettes in DI water, or sonicate them in DI water for 10 minutes
to remove any residual wash solution.
4 Allow the cuvettes to dry completely.
IMPORTANT
Use one of the following cuvette drying methods:

— Allow cuvettes to air dry.
— Use an oven with the heat set under 50 °C (122 °F).
— Use a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue.
A98352AC 6-125
Maintenance
5 Rinse the cuvette wedges and wheel with a sufficient quantity of DI water and
thoroughly dry them. Do not use wash solution or any detergents as this may damage
the finish on the metal.
6 Dry the incubation bath with clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissues.
7 Replace the cuvette wheel back into the incubation bath. It may be necessary to angle
the wheel slightly to clear the mix units. Align the wheel over the positioning pins. The
wheel only fits in the correct position aligned by the positioning pins.
8 Loosen the two large flat screws, and place them in the openings on the metal plate in
the center of the cuvette wheel.
9 Insert the cuvettes back into the wedges. Confirm that each cuvette is gently pushed
down completely into the wedge.
Figure 6.84 Replace the Cuvettes
1. Bottom 2. Push in
10 Replace the cuvette wedges in their original positions on the system. Align the numbers
on the wedge with the numbers on the cuvette wheel. Confirm that the cuvette wedge is
gently pushed down completely into the wheel.
11 After replacing the cuvette wedges in the cuvette wheel, confirm that all 12 cuvette
wedges are in place. Confirm that the top of each cuvette is even with the top of the
wedge and that each wedge is level within the cuvette wheel.
12 Loosen the two large flat screws, and place them in the openings on the metal plate in
the center of the cuvette wheel.
13 Replace the cuvette wheel cover, cuvette wedge cover, mix bars, and wash nozzle
component.
6-126 A98352AC
6
Maintenance

Log.
Replace the Photometer Lamp

Over time, the intensity of the photometer lamp diminishes, and results are affected.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing the photometer lamp every 1,000 hours.
Replacement of the lamp at 1,000 hours ensures continuous and reliable lamp performance
without unexpected analyzer down-time.
Replace the lamp when a cuvette displays in orange for a Lamp Check Error in the Photocal
Monitor tab, or when troubleshooting indicates the need for a new lamp, even if 1,000
hours have not passed since the lamp was replaced.
After replacing the lamp, the system requires a photocal to evaluate the quality and
intensity of the new lamp.
WARNING
To prevent electric hazards, shut down the system (End Process) before replacing the
photometer lamp. For more information, refer to System Shutdown (End Process).
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after the system completes the shutdown process. Do
not touch the lamp with your bare hands until the photometer lamp has cooled down
completely. The lamp is hot and can cause burns.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass of the photometer lamp with your bare hands. If oil from skin or
fingerprints are left on the glass, wipe them off with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent
tissue.
Materials Required:
• Photometer lamp
(End Process).
2 Allow the lamp to cool for a minimum of 5 minutes.

A98352AC 6-127
Maintenance
4 Remove the lamp cover.
IMPORTANT
Do not bump the cover against the reagent probe when removing the lamp cover.
Figure 6.85 Remove the Lamp Cover
5 Disconnect the plug.
Figure 6.86 Lamp Plug
6 Remove the lamp by turning the lamp holder counterclockwise, then pulling the lamp
from the lamp receptacle. Handle the lamp by the lead wires.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass of the photometer lamp with your bare hands. If oil from skin
or fingerprints are left on the glass, wipe them off with a clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue.
6-128 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.87 Lamp Holder
1. Lamp holder 2. Lamp receptacle
7 Remove the lamp holder and collar from the lamp and keep them for future use.
Figure 6.88 Lamp Component
1. Protrusion 5. Collar notch

2. Lamp receptacle 6. Guide key
3. Lamp holder 7. Notch
4. Collar
A98352AC 6-129
Maintenance
8 Obtain a new lamp. Handle the lamp using only the wires. If you touch the bulb, you can
damage it.
9 Slide the collar along the lead wires with the opening of the notch toward the rear of the
lamp. Align the notched collar with the notch of the guide key of the lamp.
10 Insert the lamp into the receptacle with the notches lined up on the top. Slide the
notches into the keyed protrusion of the receptacle.
11 Slide the lamp holder along the wires behind the lamp and tighten to hold it in position.
CAUTION
Confirm that the lamp holder is securely in position. If the holder is loose,
accurate analysis data is not obtained.
12 Connect the plug.

13 Replace the lamp cover.
15 Press the ON button. The system powers up and initializes.
IMPORTANT
After replacing the lamp, perform a photocal to confirm that the lamp does not
have any defects. To obtain accurate analysis data, wait 20 minutes to stabilize the
lamp after turning on the system, then perform the photocal.
16 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > Consumption.
17 Select Replacing Photometer Lamp.
18 Select Change. The system displays the Change dialog.
19 The system displays all units selected. Deselect Unit that was not replaced the lamp.
20 Select OK to indicate the lamp is replaced and reset the lamp used time.
NOTE
The system automatically saves the first photocal value after you update Replacing
Photocal Lamp in the Consumption tab. The system uses this photocal value as the
reference value in Photocal Monitor > Detail(F5) > Graph.
21 Allow the lamp 20 minutes to warm up and come to the correct intensity before
continuing to the next step.
6-130 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
23 Confirm that all cuvettes have passed the photocal.

Errors can occur after the photocal. If numerous cuvettes fail the photocal, the lamp is
incorrectly replaced or the lamp is defective. If only a few cuvettes fail the photocal, the
cuvettes are dirty or stained. Clean the cuvettes. If the system still reports an error after
cleaning, replace the cuvettes. For more information, refer to Clean or Replace
Individual Cuvettes.
24 Run QC before processing samples.

Analyze QC data, and recalibrate if necessary.
Clean the Rack

Inspect the rack before using it for analysis. If the rack is dirty or sticky, it might cause a
rack jam. Clean the rack.
Figure 6.89 Dirty Rack
If the rack ID label is peeling, it can also cause a rack jam. Replace the rack ID label. Refer to
Replace Rack ID Labels.
When the rack is damaged, or the magnet on the bottom of the rack is missing , replace the
rack.
A98352AC 6-131
Maintenance
Figure 6.90 Damaged Rack and Rack with a Missing Magnet
1. Rack without supporting metal bar 2. Rack with a missing magnet
Materials Required:
• Hot water
Wipe the racks with lint-free absorbent tissue moistened with hot water.
IMPORTANT
Handle the racks with care to keep racks clean.

— Do not fill the cup or tube completely to the top with sample. The sample surface in
the cup or tube should be lower than 15 mm from the top of the cup or tube.
— Keep clean or replace the anti-static brush if it gets dirty. Refer to Clean the Anti-static
Brushes.
— Carefully place the cups or tubes filled with sample into the racks to avoid sample
spilling from the cup or tube onto the rack. Beckman Coulter recommends using a rack
tray when the sample racks are loaded on the rack feeder unit.
— When disposing of sample cups or tubes, do not turn the rack upside down with the
cups or tubes in the rack as sample can drip onto the rack.
Clean the Rack Tray

If the rack tray is dirty or sticky, the racks on the tray might fall over.
Materials Required:
• Hot water
Wipe the rack tray with lint-free absorbent tissue moistened with hot water.
6-132 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.91 Rack Tray
Clean the Rack Transfer Lanes

If the rack transfer lanes are dirty or sticky, rack jams might occur. Beckman Coulter
recommends inspecting the rack transfer lanes periodically, and cleaning them as needed.
Materials Required:
• Hot water
Clean the Rack Loading Area
(End Process).
2 Remove the rack trays on the rack input component.
A98352AC 6-133
Maintenance
Figure 6.92 Rack Tray Loading Areas without the Rack Input Trays
1. Wipe these areas
3 Wipe the area with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) or lint-free absorbent
tissue moistened with hot water.
Clean the Rack Input Transfer Component
1 Inspect the metal parts on the rack input transfer component behind the rack input
trays. If the parts are dirty or sticky, clean the parts.
2 Wipe the following areas on the rack input transfer component with an alcohol prep
pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) or lint-free absorbent tissue moistened with hot water:
— Front and back surface of the front metal wall.
— Front surface of the back metal wall.
— Bottom surface between the front and back metal walls.
Figure 6.93 Rack Input Transfer Component
1. Wipe these areas
6-134 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Clean the Rack Buffer Component
1 Remove the dark acrylic cover from the rack buffer component.
1. Rack buffer area
2 Wipe the rack buffer area with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) or lint-free
absorbent tissue moistened with hot water.
3 Replace the cover on the rack buffer component.
Clean the Anti-static Brushes
Clean the anti-static brushes. Refer to Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes.
Clean the Analyzer and ISE Rack Transfer Lanes
1 Remove the dark acrylic covers for the rack transfer lanes on the back side of the rack
feeder unit, the ISE unit, and the analyzer units.
A98352AC 6-135
Maintenance
Figure 6.95 Location of Covers for Rack Transfer Lanes
1. Rack transfer lane cover on the rack 3. Rack transfer lane cover on the
feeder unit analyzer unit
2. Rack transfer lane cover on the ISE
unit
2 Inspect the rack transfer lanes. If the following parts are dirty or sticky, clean the parts:
— Side walls and bottom surface of each rack transfer lane.
— Primary sample transport lane
— Bypass lane
— Rack return lane
— Inside wall surfaces of the rack lane changer.
6-136 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.96 Rack Transfer Lanes
1. Bypass lane 3. Return lane

2. Primary sample transport 4. Lane changer
lane
3 Wipe the dirty parts with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) or lint-free
absorbent tissue moistened with hot water.
IMPORTANT
It is not necessary to rotate the green belt on the bottom of the rack transfer lanes
to clean them.
4 Replace the covers on the analyzer units and the ISE unit.
Save Parameters
Beckman Coulter recommends saving parameters when programming changes are made or
following your laboratory procedures.
If multiple AU5800s are in the laboratory, Beckman Coulter recommends saving the
parameter files for each AU5800 to external media.
A98352AC 6-137
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance for All Markets Except Japan
Reset the System from Stop to Standby Mode

When the system is in Stop mode to perform maintenance, reset it with the following
procedure.
or
Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
2 Select Home.
3 Select Stop/Standby. After initialization, the system enters Warm up or Standby mode.
IMPORTANT
For the Japan market, refer to Maintenance in the ISE Addendum.
ISE Tubing Block Diagram
Figure 6.97 ISE Tubing Block Diagram
1. Level sensor connector 7. Tubing between the Sample Pot,

2. Mixing motor connector Electrode Block, and T-Connector (Cell 1 :
3. Liquid level sensor Tube Set, Cell 2: Tube Set 7)
4. Nozzle 8. T-connector
5. Sample pot 9. Electrode block (inlet)
6. Mix bar 10. Electrode
6-138 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
11. REF solution tube 18. Buffer syringe

12. REF electrode block 19. ISE Buffer Solution
13. ISE Reference Solution 20. Pinch valve tubing
14. REF Electrode Blockside Drain Tube (Cell 21. Waste solution
1: Tube Set 2 labeled 6, Cell 2: Tube Set 8 22. Drain tube
labeled 8) 23. Roller pump tubing
15. MID standard roller pump 24. Mixture aspiration roller pump
16. Roller pump tubing 25. Drain well
17. ISE MID Standard Solution
NOTE
A to H: Tubing detachment locations. Refer to the specific maintenance procedure for a

detailed diagram and description.
ISE Solution Position Area
1. S-H and SEL-Na 3. U-H

2. S-L and SEL-K 4. U-L and CLEAN
Position Sample
S-H ISE High Serum Standard
S-L ISE Low Serum Standard
U-H ISE High Urine Standard
U-L ISE Low Urine Standard
SEL-Na ISE Na+ Selectivity Check
SEL-K ISE K+ Selectivity Check
CLEAN ISE Cleaning Solution
CRS- Standard serum in Japan only

H/M/L
A98352AC 6-139
Maintenance
Parts List for ISE Maintenance

Table 6.29 Daily ISE Maintenance
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Sample Probe (ISE Option) alcohol)
Clean the ISE (ISE Option) ISE Cleaning Solution
• AUH1019 (US)
US) to the ISE Addendum

Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option) ISE High Serum Standard
• AUH1015 (US)
• 66316 (Outside US)
ISE Low Serum Standard

• AUH1014 (US)
ISE Low/High Urine Standard

• AUH1016 (US)
Hitachi Cup (4 cups) MU853200
Table 6.30 Weekly ISE Maintenance

Selectivity Check for the Na and ISE Na+/K+ Selectivity Check
• AUH1018 (US)
K Electrodes
Hitachi Cup (2 cups) MU853200

Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode ISE Cleaning Solution
• AUH1019 (US)
Line
US) to the ISE Addendum
6-140 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Table 6.31 Every Other Week or 3,000 Samples ISE Maintenance

Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Liquid Level Sensors, Sample Pot, alcohol)
and Sample Pot Tubing
tissue
1% Wash solution
• ODR2000 (4x5L) or
Japan)
• MS028400 (Japan)
Deionized water -
Table 6.32 Every Other Month or Every 20,000 Samples ISE Maintenance
Inspect and Add ISE Internal ISE Internal Reference Solution
• AUH1017 (US)
Reference Solution
Table 6.33 Quarterly or Every 20,000 Samples ISE Maintenance

Replace the Mixture Aspiration Roller pump tubing MU962300
and MID Standard Roller Pump
Tubing
Replace the Tubing between the Tube Set MU538600 (for Cell 1)
Sample Pot Electrode Block and
Tube Set 7 MU857800 (for Cell 2)
T-Connector
Replace the REF Electrode Block- Tube Set 2 MU824700 (for Cell 1)
side Drain Tube and Pinch Valve
Tube Set 8 MU857900 (for Cell 2)
Tubing
Pinch Valve Tubing ZM297000 (for Cell 1 and Cell 2)
Manually Clean the Drain Well Drain Tube 3 MU858000 (for Cell 1 and Cell 2)
and, if Needed, Replace the
Drain Tube • A32319 (US)
(0.5%)
• 66039 (Outside US and
• 5% Sodium Hypochlorite Japan)
Solution diluted 1:10 (US) • Commercial item (Japan)
• Cleaning Solution diluted
(Japan)
A98352AC 6-141
Maintenance
Table 6.33 Quarterly or Every 20,000 Samples ISE Maintenance (Continued)

Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual) ISE Cleaning Solution diluted 1:10
• AUH1019 (US)
• ISE Cleaning Solution • 66039 (Outside US)
diluted 1:10 (US) • For the Japan market, refer
• Cleaning Solution diluted to the ISE Addendum.
1:10 (Outside US)
ISE MID Standard Solution

• AUH1012 (US)
Disposable pipette (that can Commercial item

collect more than 1 mL of liquid)
Table 6.34 Every 6 Months or Every 40,000 Samples ISE Maintenance

Replace the Na K or Cl Electrode Na Electrode MU919400
K Electrode MU919500
Cl Electrode MU919600
O-ring MU990000
Table 6.35 Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples ISE Maintenance
Replace the REF Electrode and REF Electrode (with the packing) MU919700
Packing
REF Electrode Packing MU920200
Table 6.36 As Needed ISE Maintenance

Replace the Sample Pot Sample Pot MU962700
Clean the ISE Electrode Block Stylet φ0.3 (diameter) ZM022700
(Inlet Side)
Manually Clean the ISE K Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Electrode tissue
Manually Clean and Replace the REF Electrode Block MU824500
ISE REF Electrode Block
2% Wash solution
• ODR2000 (4x5L) or
Japan)
• MS028400 (Japan)
Replace the ISE Mix Bar Mix bar MU962800
6-142 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
ISE Daily Maintenance
Table 6.36 As Needed ISE Maintenance (Continued)

Replace the ISE Reagents ISE Buffer Solution
• AUH1011 (US)
ISE MID Standard Solution

• AUH1012 (US)
ISE Reference Solution

• AUH1013 (US)

Perform the following procedures daily.
• Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option)
• Clean the ISE (ISE Option)
• Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option)
The analyzer maintenance section includes supplementary maintenance procedures for the
ISE. Inspections for the sample syringe, the wash syringe, the ISE buffer syringes, and the
sample probe wash solutions are in the analyzer daily maintenance section. For more
information, refer to Inspect the Syringes for Leaks and Replace the Sample Probe Wash
Solutions.
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option)
The ISE sample probe is responsible for delivering precise quantities of sample to the ISE
sample pot.
You cannot achieve a correct analysis, if the probe is clogged, bent, or otherwise damaged.
Before you begin analysis, inspect the ISE sample probe for damage or deterioration and
confirm correct operation.
Inspect the Sample Probe for Damage or Deterioration
Materials Required:
1 Visually inspect that the probe is not bent or damaged. If the probe is bent or damaged,
replace the probe. Refer to Replace a Sample Probe.
2 Confirm that the probe is free of debris. If any contaminants or crystallization adhere to
the probe, wipe the outside surface with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl Alcohol).
A98352AC 6-143
Maintenance
CAUTION
Confirm that the ISE sample probe is not bent during cleaning.
3 If there is a problem with the alignment of the probe, contact Beckman Coulter.
Figure 6.99 ISE Sample Probe
1. ISE sample probe wash well
Confirm Correct Operation of the ISE Sample Probe
1 Confirm that the analyzer is in Warm up or Standby mode.

buttons.
6 Lift the back upper cover of the ISE unit.

the probe dispenses a thin, straight stream of water, and that water flows in the wash
well.
— If the water is spraying or dispensing at an angle, clean the probe. For more
information, refer to Inspect, Clean, and Prime the ISE Sample Probe (ISE Option).
— If cleaning does not correct the problem, replace the probe. For more information,
refer to Replace a Sample Probe.
6-144 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.100 Flow of DI water from the ISE Sample Probe Tip
1. Correct flow 2. Incorrect flow
Clean the ISE (ISE Option)

Clean the sample pot and the electrode lines daily to prevent contamination and inaccurate
results. This procedure requires approximately 6 minutes to complete.
WARNING
NOTE
If the analyzer does not run continuously, clean the ISE as part of the daily shutdown.
NOTE
The system defaults to clean Cell 1 and Cell 2. Always perform the cleaning procedure
on Cell 1 and Cell 2 unless performing corrective actions on Cell 1 or Cell 2.
Materials Required:
• Hitachi Cup

A98352AC 6-145
Maintenance
3 Fill the Hitachi cup with a minimum of 1 mL of ISE Cleaning Solution.

4 Place the Hitachi cup in the CLEAN position on the ISE solution position area.
1. CLEAN position
CAUTION
Wipe up ISE Cleaning Solution spills immediately. Follow your laboratory

procedure.
6 Select Cleaning. The system displays the Cleaning dialog.
7 Select OK. The system starts the cleaning operation.
NOTE
If you need to stop the cleaning operation before completion, select STOP on the
STANDBY/STOP switch on the ISE unit. The ISE stops the cleaning and goes to STOP
mode. To return to Standby mode, select STANDBY on the STOP/STANDBY switch
on the ISE unit.
8 When the cleaning operation is complete, remove the Hitachi cup from the CLEAN
position and discard.
Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option)

Calibrate the ISE every 24 hours, following specific maintenance procedures, and when
replacing the ISE reagents.
6-146 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
NOTE
Calibrating only serum or urine requires approximately 4 minutes to complete.

Calibrating serum and urine together requires approximately 7 minutes to complete.
Materials Required:
• ISE High Serum Standard
• ISE Low Serum Standard
• ISE Low/High Urine Standard

2 Perform a total prime. A total prime is required to clear the lines of ISE Cleaning
Solution if you calibrate the ISE immediately after the Clean the ISE (ISE Option)
procedure.
a. Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system
buttons.
c. Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
d. Select OK.
f. Press the DIAG button to start the prime. The DIAG LED turns on after the priming is
complete.
g. Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.

4 Fill a Hitachi cup with approximately 500 µL of Standard Solution as required for
processing (determined by your laboratory processing serum, urine, or both sample
types).
— ISE High Serum Standard
— ISE Low Serum Standard
— ISE High Urine Standard
— ISE Low Urine Standard
5 Place the Hitachi cups into the corresponding positions on the ISE solution position
area.
A98352AC 6-147
Maintenance
1. S-H: ISE High Serum Standard 3. U-H: ISE High Urine Standard
2. S-L: ISE Low Serum Standard 4. U-L: ISE Low Urine Standard
6 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Calibration. The system
displays the ISE Maintenance: Calibration tab.
1. Calibration tab 2. Normal Range
7 Select Serum Start, Urine Start, or Serum/Urine Start depending on the sample types to
calibrate. The system displays the dialog.
8 Select OK. The system starts calibration.
9 When calibration is complete, confirm that the result for each electrode is within the
ranges for the calibrated sample types.
The system highlights acceptable results in blue and results that exceed the <Normal
Range> for the calibration slope in yellow.
To determine calibration quality, compare the current results with previous results for
consistency.
6-148 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
ISE Weekly Maintenance
10 If the ISE unit has two ISE cells, select Cell 2 to confirm the results for cell 2.
11 Remove the Hitachi cups from the ISE solution position area and discard.

Perform the following procedures weekly.
• Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes
• Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line
The analyzer maintenance section includes supplementary maintenance procedures for the
ISE.
The analyzer weekly maintenance section includes instructions for cleaning the ISE sample
probe. For more information, refer to Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars.
Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes

The Na electrode and K electrode are ion-selective electrodes. If the selectivity of the
electrodes deteriorates, ions other than Na or K can affect the electrodes, and results can be
affected.
To confirm the ion selectivity of the electrodes, perform a selectivity check of the Na and K
electrodes every week.
IMPORTANT
Do not leave the bottle of ISE Selectivity Check Solution open. The ISE Selectivity Check
Solution can become concentrated or crystallized.
Materials Required:
• ISE Na+/K+ Selectivity Check

3 Fill the Hitachi cups with approximately 500 µL of ISE Selectivity Check Solution (Na)
and 500 µL of ISE Selectivity Check Solution (K) separately.
4 Place the ISE Selectivity Check Solution (Na) in the SEL-Na position. Place the ISE
Selectivity Check Solution (K) in the SEL-K position.
A98352AC 6-149
Maintenance
Figure 6.104 Location for the ISE Selectivity Check Solutions
1. SEL-Na: ISE Na+ Selectivity Check 2. SEL-K: ISE K+ Selectivity Check

6 Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Selectivity Check. The system
displays the ISE Maintenance: Selectivity Check tab.
Figure 6.105 ISE Maintenance: Selectivity Check Tab
1. Selectivity Check tab 3. Normal Range

2. Check Start button
7 Select Check Start. The system displays the Selectivity Check dialog.
8 Select OK.
9 Confirm the selectivity check data.

For abnormal data, the background for the result is displayed in yellow. The system
judges a result more than 160 mmol/L for Na electrode and a result more than 6
mmol/L for K electrode as abnormal data.
6-150 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
If the selectivity check results are abnormal, confirm the ISE Selectivity Check Solution
(Na) and ISE Selectivity Check Solution (K) by repeating the procedure with new bottles
of ISE Selectivity Check Solution (Na) and ISE Selectivity Check Solution (K). Perform
the Selectivity Check with a valid ISE Calibration. However, if the ISE Calibration passes,
and the Selectivity Check fails, replace the relevant electrode.
For more information, refer to Replace the Na K or Cl Electrode.
10 If the system has two ISE cells, select Cell 2 to confirm the results for cell 2. Repeat step
9 for Cell 2.
11 Perform a MID/REF Prime three times to clear the electrode flowcell of any ions
remaining from the selectivity check procedure.
a. Select the Maintenance tab.
buttons.
c. Select MID/REF Prime. The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.
d. Select OK.
f. Press the DIAG button to start the priming. The DIAG LED turns on after the priming
is complete.
g. Initiate the MID/REF prime two more times by pressing the DIAG button.
h. Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
12 After completing the operation, open the front upper cover of the ISE unit, and then
remove the Hitachi cups from the ISE solution position area.
Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line

If you do not perform the ISE enhanced cleaning cycle, the flowcell can become
contaminated or results can be inaccurate.
This cleaning procedure requires 30 minutes to complete. If the ISE enhanced cleaning is
performed with the W2, both procedures complete in approximately 30 minutes. For more
information, refer to Perform a W2.
Materials Required:
• Hitachi Cup
A98352AC 6-151
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Every Other Week or Every 3,000 Samples
WARNING

3 Fill the Hitachi cup with approximately 1.5 mL of ISE Cleaning Solution.
4 Place the Hitachi cup in the CLEAN position in the ISE solution position area.
Figure 6.106 Location of the ISE Cleaning solution
1. CLEAN
6 Select Cleaning (Enhanced), and then select OK. The system starts the enhanced cleaning
operation. This process requires 30 minutes to complete.
7 After performing the enhanced cleaning operation, remove the ISE Cleaning Solution.

Perform the following procedures every other week or every 3,000 samples, whichever
comes first.
• Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Sample Pot, and Sample Pot
Tubing
6-152 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Sample Pot, and Sample Pot Tubing
To obtain accurate results and optimum system performance without unexpected analyzer
downtime, perform the following ISE maintenance procedure every two weeks or every
3,000 samples, whichever comes first. Clean according to your laboratory procedures and
after careful monitoring calibration and QC data.
For more information, refer to Figure 6.97 ISE Tubing Block Diagram.
Figure 6.107 ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, and Sample Pot
1. Mix bar 6. Mixing component knob

2. Liquid level sensor 7. ISE Buffer Solution and ISE MID Standard
3. Mixing component Solution connecting tubes
4. Level sensor connector 8. Nozzle
5. Mixing motor connector 9. Sample pot
Prepare the ISE for Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Always prepare the ISE for maintenance procedures. The preparation procedure
prevents the automatic ISE MID Standard Solution periodic (hourly) priming cycle from
dispensing ISE MID Standard Solution.

buttons.
4 Select Drain Flowcell. The system displays the Drain Flowcell dialog.
5 Select OK.
A98352AC 6-153
Maintenance
6 Press the DIAG button. The ISE sample probe moves to the CLEAN position in the ISE
solution position area.
IMPORTANT
If the ISE cover is open, the system generates an ISE Cover Open [ISE] alarm.
Select Alarm Clear to clear the audible alarm. The ISE sample probe remains at the
sample probe wash well. It is possible to continue with the next steps in the
To move the ISE sample probe to the CLEAN position on the ISE solution position
area, close the ISE cover, select the maintenance operation button again, then
press the DIAG button.

8 Open the ISE cover.
9 Press the DIAG button again. The liquid drains from the flowcell.
Clean the Nozzles, Mix Bar, and Liquid Level Sensors
Materials Required:
1 Disconnect the liquid level sensor connectors (638 (cell1), 654 (cell 2)) and mixing
motor connectors (648 (cell 1), 663 (cell 2)).
Figure 6.108 Location of Liquid Level Sensors and Mixing Motor Connectors
1. Mixing motor connector (648) for 4. Liquid level sensor connector (654)
Cell 1 for Cell 2
2. Knob 5. Mixing motor connector (663) for
3. Liquid level sensor connector (638) Cell 2
for Cell 1 6. Mixing component holder
6-154 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
2 Loosen the knob securing the mixing component. Gently lift the mixing component to
unseat it.
IMPORTANT
Do not bend or break the liquid level sensors when cleaning.
3 Use an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) to wipe the two nozzles, the liquid
level sensors, and the mix bar.
Figure 6.109 Mixing Component
1. Liquid level sensors 3. Nozzle

2. Mix bar 4. Connecting tubing
4 Place the mixing component on the mixing component holder.
IMPORTANT
Do not change the orientation position of the two nozzles attached to the mixing
component. Do not apply excess pressure to the tubing.
Clean the Sample Pot and Tubing
A98352AC 6-155
Maintenance
Figure 6.110 Sample Pot and Tubing
1. Sample pot 6. Mixture aspiration roller pump

2. Bypass tubing labeled 5 (Cell 1) or 7 (Cell 7. Tubing labeled 6 (Cell 1) or 8 (Cell 2)
2) 8. REF Electrode block outlet
3. Pinch valve 9. Electrode block inlet
4. Pinch valve tubing 10. T-connector
5. Y-connector
Materials Required:
• Freshly prepared 1% Wash solution
• Deionized water
• Sonicator
1 Loosen the retaining knob securing the sample pot, and lift the pot from the peg.
2 Hold the sample pot with one hand while removing the sample pot tubing from the
electrode block inlet.
a. Follow the bypass tubing labeled 5 (Cell 1) or 7 (Cell 2) connected to the pinch valve
tubing and remove it from the pinch valve.
b. Disconnect the pinch valve tubing at the Y-connector that is next to the mixture
aspiration roller pump.
3 Fill the sample pot tubing and bypass tubing with 1% wash solution. Use a disposable
pipette tip attached to a squeeze bottle or a syringe to fill the sample pot tubing and
bypass tubing.
a. Place the pipette tip or syringe inside the bottom of the sample pot tubing.
b. Force the wash solution through the sample pot tubing.
6-156 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
c. Place the pipette tip or syringe in the end of the bypass tubing. Force the wash
solution through it.
4 Submerge the sample pot and all attached tubing into a beaker filled with 1% wash
solution.
5 Place the beaker in the sonicator filled with deionized water and sonicate for 10
minutes.
6 Rinse the sample pot and tubing with deionized water.

a. Place the pipette tip or syringe at the bottom of the sample pot tubing.
b. Force deionized water through the sample pot tubing.
c. Place the pipette tip or syringe in the bypass tubing. Force deionized water through
it.
d. Confirm that the lines have been flushed thoroughly. Rinse the sample pot with
deionized water.
7 Use a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue to dry the sample pot and tubing before
replacement.
Reinstall the Sample Pot, Tubing, and Mixing Component
1 While holding the sample pot, connect the sample pot tubing to the electrode block
inlet.
2 Reinstall the sample pot. Align the hole on the top of the sample pot with the peg and
slide the screw post into the groove on the opposite side. Tighten the retaining knob.
3 Connect the pinch valve tubing onto the Y-connector located close to the mixture
aspiration roller pump.
4 Slide the pinch valve tubing into the top slot of the pinch valve.
5 Replace the mixing component on the two positioning pins. Tighten the knob to secure
the mixing component.
6 Reconnect the liquid level sensor connectors (638 (Cell1), 654 (Cell 2)) and mixing
motor connectors (648 (Cell 1), 663 (Cell 2)).
IMPORTANT
The connectors are specially keyed to fit each plug. To avoid damage to the pins, do
not force a connector into its plug. If the pins are damaged, the mix bar does not
rotate, or the liquid level sensors do not function.
IMPORTANT
When reinstalling the mixing component, confirm that the tubing is not pinched
between the mixing component and its stand.
A98352AC 6-157
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Every Month
7 Press the DIAG button to reprime the lines with ISE MID Standard Solution. Confirm
that liquid is correctly dispensed from the sample pot to the flowcell by confirming that
no bubbles are in the tubings labeled 6 (Cell 1) and 8 (Cell 2) coming from the flowcell.
NOTE
You might need to repeat this step five times. If bubbles are in the tubing after
priming, confirm that the electrodes and tubing are installed correctly and that the
lock lever secures the electrodes.
8 Perform a buffer prime.

During the prime, confirm that buffer is correctly dispensed into the sample pot and
flows to waste without generating alarms:
a. Select Buffer Prime. The system displays the Buffer Prime dialog.
b. Select OK.
c. Press the DIAG button to start the priming. The DIAG LED turns on after the priming
is complete.
9 Perform a total prime to prime the ISE with fresh ISE Buffer Solution, ISE MID Standard
Solution, and ISE Reference Solution.
a. Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
b. Select OK.
c. Press the DIAG button to start the priming. The DIAG LED turns on after the priming
is complete.

Log.
a calibration.
ISE Maintenance Every Month

The analyzer monthly maintenance section includes instructions for cleaning the ISE
sample probe wash well. For more information, refer to Clean the Sample Probe and
Reagent Probe Wash Wells.
ISE Maintenance Every Other Month or Every 20,000 Samples

Perform the following procedures every other month or every 20,000 samples, whichever
comes first.
6-158 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Every Other Month or Every 20,000 Samples
• Inspect and Add ISE Internal Reference Solution
Inspect and Add ISE Internal Reference Solution

Visually inspect the REF electrode. Add ISE Internal Reference Solution when it is less than
the reference line.
Figure 6.111 REF Electrode
1. REF electrode cap 3. Reference line

2. REF electrode
Materials Required:
• ISE Internal Reference Solution

4 Open the cap of the REF electrode. Add ISE Internal Reference Solution up to, but not
over the reference line.
IMPORTANT
Do not break or damage the glass REF electrode.
5 Replace the REF electrode cap.

7 Wait 15 minutes to allow the solution to equilibrate.

buttons.
9 Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
A98352AC 6-159
Maintenance
ISE Quarterly Maintenance or Maintenance Every 20,000 Samples
10 Select OK.
11 Press the DIAG button to start the prime. The DIAG LED turns on after the priming is
complete.

Log.
a calibration.

Perform the following procedures quarterly (every three months) or every 20,000 samples,
whatever comes first.
• Replace the Mixture Aspiration and MID Standard Roller Pump Tubing
• Replace the Tubing between the Sample Pot Electrode Block and T-Connector
• Replace the REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and Pinch Valve Tubing
• Manually Clean the Drain Well and, if Needed, Replace the Drain Tube
• Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual)
Replace the Mixture Aspiration and MID Standard Roller Pump Tubing
The friction of each roller pump and vibrations cause the roller pump tubing to deteriorate.
If the roller tubing is not replaced for an extended time, it can become flat or worn and
leaks can occur. Replace the roller pump tubing every 3 months or every 20,000 samples.
Figure 6.112 Roller Pump and Tubing
1. Roller pump tubing 3. Tube number

2. Roller pump 4. Tube connectors
Materials Required:
• Roller pump tubing
6-160 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Replace the Mixture Aspiration and MID Standard Roller Pump Tubing
1 Slide the ISE reagent bottle tray forward.
A98352AC 6-161
Maintenance
Figure 6.113 Mixture Aspiration and MID Standard Roller Pump Tubing
1. Connector 3. Mixture aspiration roller pump

2. MID Standard roller pump tubing tubing
2 Remove each roller pump tubing from the pump brackets.

3 Remove the MID Standard roller pump tubing and the mixture aspiration roller pump
tubing by twisting apart the connectors at each end.
4 Connect a new roller pump tubing. Turn the connectors at both ends to secure it.
5 Place the roller pump tubing on the correct roller pump, then match the tubing
connector number to their corresponding numbers on the pump bracket. Hook one end
of the tubing in the bracket, stretch the tubing around the pump, and hook the other
end in the bracket.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the tubing is not twisted on the roller pump.
6 Select Prime Bypass. The system displays the Prime Bypass dialog.
7 Select OK.
8 Press the DIAG button to start the prime. The two roller pumps are activated to prime
liquid through the ISE. The roller pumps rotate for approximately 1 minute to remove
the air from the tubing.

Log.
6-162 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Replace the Tubing between the Sample Pot Electrode Block and T-Connector
If the system analyzes certain samples (such as dialysis samples) that contain large
amounts of fibrin and protein, the fibrin and protein can accumulate close to the T-
connector between the sample pot and electrode block. Accumulation of fibrin and protein
can cause errors.
To obtain accurate results and optimum system performance without unexpected analyzer
downtime, perform the following ISE maintenance procedure quarterly or every 20,000
samples. Clean according to your laboratory procedures and after careful monitoring of
calibration and QC data.
For more information on how to clean the sample pot, tubing, and T-connector, refer to
Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Sample Pot, and Sample Pot Tubing.
Materials Required:
• Tube Set (for Cell 1)
• Tube Set 7 (for Cell 2)
Figure 6.114 Tubing Between the Sample Pot, Electrode Block, and T-Connector
1. Tubing between the sample pot and 4. T-connector

electrode block (tube set) 5. Electrode block
2. Sample pot 6. Tube joint
3. Bypass tubing labeled 5 (Cell 1) or 7 (Cell
2)
A98352AC 6-163
Maintenance
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Replace the Tubing between the Sample Pot Electrode Block and T-Connector
1 Disconnect the liquid level sensor connectors (638 (Cell 1), 654 (Cell 2)) and mixing
remove it and place it on the mixing component holder.
6-164 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
4 Follow the tubing from the bottom of the sample pot to its connection at the electrode
block inlet. Disconnect the tubing from the electrode block inlet.
5 Follow the bypass tubing (labeled 5 (Cell 1) or 7 (Cell 2)) from the T-connector to its
junction with the pinch valve tubing. Disconnect the bypass tubing from the pinch valve
tubing.
6 Unscrew the tubing connected to the bottom of the sample pot, and discard the tubing.
7 Connect the new set of tubing to the electrode block inlet, and then to the pinch valve
tubing.
8 Attach the tubing to the sample pot by screwing on the connector.
IMPORTANT
To connect the T-connector and tubing, push them completely so that each joint
does not leak. To attach the tubing to the bottom of the sample pot, finger-tighten
the connector.
11 Reconnect the liquid level sensor connectors (638 (Cell 1), 654 (Cell 2)) and mixing
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
12 Confirm that Drain Flowcell is selected.
A98352AC 6-165
Maintenance
NOTE
You might need to repeat this step five times. If bubbles are still in the tubing after

Log.
a calibration.
Replace the REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and Pinch Valve Tubing
If the REF electrode block-side drain tube and the pinch valve tubing are used for an
extended period of time, the tubing can deteriorate. Beckman Coulter recommends
replacing the REF electrode block-side drain tube and pinch valve tubing every 3 months or
every 20,000 samples.
Figure 6.115 REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and Pinch Valve Tubing
1. Tubing between the sample pot and 7. REF electrode block

electrode block (tube set) 8. Tubing connection A
2. Electrodes 9. Tubing connection B
3. REF electrode wire (green) 10. Tubing connection C
4. Pinch valve tubing 11. O-ring
5. Pinch valve
6. REF electrode block-side drain tube (Cell
1: Tube Set 2 labeled 6, Cell 2: Tube Set 8
labeled 8)
6-166 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Materials Required:
• Pinch Valve Tubing (for Cell 1 and Cell 2)
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT

A98352AC 6-167
Maintenance
Replace the REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube
IMPORTANT
Always drain the flowcell before moving the lock lever to release the electrode block. If
the ISE Reference Solution is not drained, ISE Reference Solution can flow up into the
electrodes and cause problems with the electrode measuring capability. ISE Reference
Solution only flows past the REF electrode (not Na, K, or Cl electrode) in normal
operation. ISE Reference Solution is more concentrated than the ISE MID Standard
Solution or the samples that flow through the flowcell.
1 Move the lock lever to the left to release the electrodes.

2 Disconnect the green REF electrode wire.
3 Gently lift up the REF electrode block.
4 While holding the REF electrode block, disconnect Tube Set 2 (for Cell 1) and Tube Set 8
(for Cell 2). Tube Set 2 (labeled 6) or Tube Set 8 (labeled 8) is the tubing from the REF
electrode block and connected to the pinch valve tubing. Refer to Figure 6.115 REF
Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and Pinch Valve Tubing.
5 Attach a new Tube Set 2 (labeled 6) or Tube Set 8 (labeled 8) by connecting the tubing
to the REF electrode block and the pinch valve tubing.
6 Place the REF electrode block in the original position and reconnect the green REF
electrode wire.
7 Align the electrodes in a straight stack with the electrode pegs in the holes.
8 Move the lock lever to the right to lock the electrodes in position.
Replace the Pinch Valve Tubing
1 Remove the pinch valve tubing from the pinch valve grooves by pulling out and then up.
2 Disconnect the pinch valve tubing at tubing connection A, tubing connection B, and
tubing connection C. Refer to Figure 6.115 REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and
Pinch Valve Tubing.
3 Replace the pinch valve tubing by connecting the short end to tubing connection C, the
shorter of the two remaining pieces of tubing to tubing connection A, and the longest
tubing to tubing connection B. Refer to Figure 6.115 REF Electrode Block-side Drain
Tube and Pinch Valve Tubing.
IMPORTANT
Install the shorter tubing in the bottom groove of the pinch valve (between A and C
in the tubing block diagram). Install the longer tubing in the top groove of the pinch
6-168 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
valve (between B and C in the tubing block diagram). For more information, refer to
Figure 6.97 ISE Tubing Block Diagram.
4 Insert pinch valve tubing (for tubing connections A and B) into the grooves of the pinch
valve. Confirm that the tubing is inserted completely into the groove. For Cell 1, put
tubing labeled 6 (connected to tubing connection A) in the bottom groove of the pinch
valve, and put tubing labeled 5 (connected to tubing connection B) in the top groove of
the pinch valve. For Cell 2, put tubing labeled 8 (connected to tubing connection A) in
the bottom groove of the pinch valve, and put tubing labeled 7 (connected to tubing
connection B) in the top groove of the pinch valve. For more information, refer to
Figure 6.115 REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and Pinch Valve Tubing.
no bubbles are in the tubings labeled 6 (Cell 1) or 8 (Cell 2) coming from the flowcell.
NOTE

Log.
a calibration.
Manually Clean the Drain Well and, if Needed, Replace the Drain Tube
If the system analyzes samples that contain large amounts of fibrin and protein, the fibrin
and protein can accumulate by the drain tube outlet and drain well, possibly causing errors.
Manually clean the drain well quarterly, and replace the drain tube as needed.
A98352AC 6-169
Maintenance
Figure 6.116 Drain Well and Drain Tube
1. Pinch valve tubing 4. Drain Tube

2. Mixture aspiration roller pump 5. Flow direction of waste solution
3. Tube Joint 3 6. Drain well
Materials Required:
• Drain Tube 3
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
6-170 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Manual Clean the Drain Well and if Needed Replace the Drain Tube
1 Remove the drain tube from the hook over the drain well. For more information, refer
to D in Figure 6.116 Drain Well and Drain Tube.
WARNING
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab
coats, to handle hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). If the
hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts skin or clothes,
rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the hydrochloric acid or sodium
hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with
water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more
2 Prepare approximately 50 mL of sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). For more

information, refer to Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions.
3 Pour the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) into the drain well directly from the top.
For more information, refer to H in Figure 6.116 Drain Well and Drain Tube.
4 Allow the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) to sit for approximately 10 minutes, and
then pour enough deionized water into the drain well to rinse out the sodium
hypochlorite solution.
5 Inspect the drain tube by confirming that the tubing is clear (transparent) and checking
for internal surface damage. If the drain tube is opaque or damaged, replace it with a
new drain tube.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the drain tube is securely connected to the mixture aspiration roller
pump tubing so leaks do not occur.
A98352AC 6-171
Maintenance
6 Replace the drain tube over the drain well.

NOTE

Log.
Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual)

Use this method when the ISE calibration slopes are in the mid-to-low forties, or if you find
a residue when you inspect the sample pot or T-tubing.
Materials Required:
• ISE Cleaning Solution diluted 1:10
• Pipette (that is commercially available and can collect more than 1 mL of liquid)
WARNING
IMPORTANT
6-172 A98352AC
6
Maintenance

buttons.
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual)
1 Disconnect the liquid level sensor connectors (638, 654) and mixing motor connectors
(648, 663).
2 Loosen the mixing component knob, lift the mixing component from the two
positioning pins, and place the mixing component on the mixing component holder.
3 Remove the tubing (labeled 5 and 6 for Cell1 and 7 and 8 for Cell 2) from the pinch
valve.
4 For the first 2 minutes, pipette the ISE Cleaning Solution into the sample pot while
manually turning the roller pump components located below Cell 1 and Cell 2 clockwise
until most of the ISE Cleaning Solution empties from the sample pot into the tubing.
Continue filling the sample pot with the ISE Cleaning Solution while turning the roller
pump component. Do not completely empty the sample pot before adding more ISE
Cleaning Solution. Confirm that the tubing is filled with the ISE Cleaning Solution.
A98352AC 6-173
Maintenance
Figure 6.117 Filling the Sample Pot
1. Pipette 2. Sample Pot
5 Let the ISE Cleaning Solution remain in the tubing for 5 minutes.
6 Manually turn the roller pump to clear the ISE Cleaning Solution from the tubing.
7 Pipette 10 mL of ISE MID Standard Solution into the sample pot and manually turn the
roller pump to clear the ISE MID Standard Solution. Repeat 3 times.
8 Replace the mixing component.

9 Replace the pinch valve tubing.
NOTE
Refer to the label on the back of the ISE cover for placement of the pinch valve
tubing. Install the tubing (labeled 5 and 6 for Cell 1, 7 and 8 for Cell 2) in the correct
grooves of the pinch valve.
10 Reconnect the liquid level sensor connectors (638, 654) and mixing motor connectors
(648, 663).
11 Select MID/REF Prime. The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.
12 Select OK.
13 Press the DIAG button to start the prime.
14 Repeat the MID/REF prime three times.

15 Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
16 Select OK.
17 Press the DIAG button to start the prime.

20 Calibrate and process QC on the ISE.

6-174 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
ISE Six-Month Maintenance or Every 40,000 Samples
21 If the tubing is not clean after performing this procedure, replace the tubing according
to the following procedures:
— Replace the Tubing between the Sample Pot, Electrode Block, and T-Connector
— Replace the REF Electrode Block-side Drain Tube and Pinch Valve Tubing
— Manually Clean the Drain Well and, if Needed, Replace the Drain Tube

Perform the following procedures every six months or every 40,000 samples, whatever
comes first.
• Replace the Na K or Cl Electrode
Replace the Na K or Cl Electrode

Replace the electrode when calibration or Selectivity Check results are out of range, and
troubleshooting has been performed. Replacement of the electrode at every 40,000
samples or every six months ensures continuous and reliable electrode performance
without unexpected analyzer down-time. If the electrodes have deteriorated, the system
cannot obtain accurate analysis results.
Materials Required:
• Na Electrode
• K Electrode
• Cl Electrode
• O-ring
IMPORTANT

buttons.
A98352AC 6-175
Maintenance
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode
IMPORTANT

2 Remove the three electrodes.
6-176 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.118 Na, K, and Cl Electrodes
1. K electrode 6. Na electrode wire (yellow)

2. Na electrode 7. K electrode wire (red)
3. Cl electrode 8. REF electrode
4. O-ring 9. Lock Lever
5. Cl electrode wire (blue)
3 Disconnect the lead wires from each of the electrodes.

4 Replace the failed electrode with a new one.
IMPORTANT
The system uses four O-rings in the electrode block. The O-ring attaches to the
outlet side of each electrode and the metal part that contacts the Cl electrode
(location E in Figure 6.97 ISE Tubing Block Diagram). Do not lose the O-rings when
removing the electrodes.
5 Connect the blue wire to the Cl electrode, the yellow wire to the Na electrode, and the
red wire to the K electrode.
6 Confirm that the green wire connects to the REF electrode.

7 Before installing the electrodes, wipe the electrode block with a clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue.
A98352AC 6-177
Maintenance
8 Install the three electrodes on the electrode block. Install the electrodes according to
the labels of Cl, Na, and K from the sample pot side to the REF electrode block side.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that all four O-rings are in position before using the lock lever to secure the
electrodes. The O-rings are necessary to create an airtight seal for the flowcell.
NOTE

Log.
14 The system displays the Electrode Serial No. dialog. Enter the serial number of the new
electrodes.
15 Wait at least 5 minutes after closing the covers, and then perform a calibration.
IMPORTANT
To obtain the best possible analysis data, perform two calibration measurements to
confirm the electrode stability:
Na K Cl
Difference between 1st and 2nd factors 0.020 0.045 0.025
For more information, refer to Figure 2.25 ISE Maintenance: Calibration Tab.
— If the difference in the MID Solution Factor value between the first and second
calibrations is within the values in the preceding table, the electrodes are stable.
or
If the difference between the MID Solution Factor values is not within each value in
the preceding table, or if the slope result is 0 at the first calibration:
Air can remain inside the flowcell. Perform a MID/REF prime.
6-178 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples
1. Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The
system displays the ISE Maintenance: Maintenance tab.
2. Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance
operation buttons.
3. Select MID/REF Prime. The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.
4. Select OK.
5. Press the DIAG button once. The ISE sample probe moves away.
6. Lift the front upper cover of the ISE unit.
7. Open the ISE cover.
8. Press the DIAG button to start the priming.
9. Press the DIAG button again. The liquid drains from the flowcell. The DIAG LED
turns on after the priming is complete.
10. Initiate the MID/REF prime two more times by pressing the DIAG button.
11. Close all doors and covers of the ISE unit.
12. Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation
buttons.
13. Repeat the ISE calibration two more times and compare the results to the chart.
— If the slope results are 0 for both calibrations:
The electrodes might not be set correctly. Repeat the Replace the Na, K, or Cl
Electrode procedure to make sure that you have set the electrodes correctly.

Perform the following procedures every two years or every 150,000 samples, whatever
comes first.
• Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing
Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing

Replace the REF electrode when calibration or Selectivity Check results are out of range for
Na, K, and Cl, or the Na, K, and Cl results fluctuate significantly higher or lower than the
previous measurement, and you have performed troubleshooting. Replace the electrode at
150,000 samples or 2 years, whatever comes first, to ensure continuous and reliable
electrode performance without unexpected analyzer down-time.
If all calibration measurement values of Na, K, and Cl fluctuate, higher or lower than
previous measurements, or if the system displays an alarm message after replacing the REF
electrode, contact Beckman Coulter.
For more information, refer to ISE Tubing Block Diagram.
Materials Required:
A98352AC 6-179
Maintenance
• REF Electrode (with the packing)

• REF Electrode Packing
IMPORTANT
Do not use force to install or uninstall the REF electrode. When installing or uninstalling
the electrode, do not break the electrode.
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT

6-180 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Remove the REF Electrode and Packing
IMPORTANT

2 Remove the Na, K, and Cl electrodes from the electrode block to keep these electrodes
away from the REF electrode. Any contact with the ISE Reference Solution can
deteriorate the Na, K, and Cl electrodes.
3 Disconnect the green wire from the REF electrode.

4 Gently lift the REF electrode block.
5 Carefully unscrew the REF electrode cap screw, then gently remove the REF electrode
along with the cap screw.
Figure 6.119 ISE REF Electrode and Packing
1. REF solution tube 4. REF electrode

2. REF electrode packing 5. REF electrode wire (green)
3. Cap screw
6 Remove the REF electrode packing.
A98352AC 6-181
Maintenance
Replace the REF Electrode and Packing
1 Confirm that no air bubbles are in the REF electrode tip. If air bubbles are found in the
tip, remove the bubbles by pointing the electrode tip downward while tapping it with a
finger.
2 Insert new packing into the REF electrode block.

3 Place the cap screw on the REF electrode, then place the REF electrode in the REF
electrode block so that the electrode tip is centered in the packing.
NOTE
Dampen the REF electrode tip with deionized water if you have difficulty inserting
the REF electrode into the REF electrode block.
4 Insert the cap screw into the REF electrode block and screw it in carefully. Finish
tightening the cap screw by a quarter or half turn to orient the REF electrode correctly.
5 Reinstall the REF electrode block.

6 Connect the green REF electrode wire to the REF electrode.
7 Wipe the top of the block with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue. Rinse the ISE
Reference Solution from your hands.
8 Replace the Na, K, and Cl electrodes.

10 Select MID/REF Prime. The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.
11 Select OK.
NOTE

Log.
6-182 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
16 The system displays the Electrode Serial No. dialog. Enter the serial number of the new
REF electrode.
IMPORTANT
Na K Cl
or
operation buttons.
4. Select OK.
buttons.
A98352AC 6-183
Maintenance
ISE As Needed Maintenance

• Replace the Sample Pot
• Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side)
• Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode
• Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block
• Replace the ISE Mix Bar
• Replace the ISE Reagents
Replace the Sample Pot

Replace the sample pot if contaminants accumulate and cannot be removed during the
every other week cleaning procedure. Also replace the pot if you find any cracks or flaws in
the pot.
For more information, refer to ISE Tubing Block Diagram.
Figure 6.120 Sample Pot and Mixing Component
1. Mix bar 6. Mixing component knob

2. Liquid level sensor 7. Buffer solution and MID solution
3. Mixing component connecting tubes
4. Level sensor connector 8. Nozzles
5. Mixing motor connector 9. Sample pot
Materials Required:
• Sample Pot
6-184 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Replace the Sample Pot
remove it and place it on the mixing component holder.
A98352AC 6-185
Maintenance
4 Disconnect the sample pot from the tubing by twisting the connector from the bottom
of the sample pot.
5 Reattach the tubing to the new sample pot.

IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
When reinstalling the mixing component, confirm that the mixing component and
its stand are not pinching the tubing.
NOTE

Log.
a calibration.
Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side)

Inspect the inlet side of the electrode block for contaminants that have accumulated.
Perform maintenance to clean the inlet side of the electrode block as needed.
6-186 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.121 Electrode Block
1. Electrode block (inlet side) 5. K electrode wire (red)

2. Stylet 6. Electrodes
3. Cl electrode wire (blue) 7. REF electrode wire (green)
4. Na electrode wire (yellow)
Materials Required:
• Stylet φ0.3 (diameter)
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
A98352AC 6-187
Maintenance
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side)
IMPORTANT

2 Remove the Na, K, and Cl electrodes from the electrode block.
IMPORTANT
3 Disconnect the Na, K, and Cl lead wires.

4 Remove the tubing connecting to the sample pot from the electrode block inlet.
5 Pass the stylet through the flowcell hole on the inlet side of the electrode block.
Contamination can lodge in the flowcell of the electrode block. Bind the stylet up to the
maximum thickness that can pass through the flowcell.
6-188 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
6 Remove contamination in the block by turning the stylet. When there are contaminants
on the stylet, wipe them with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue several times.
8 Install the three electrodes on the electrode block. Attach the electrodes in this order
from the sample pot side:
1. Cl
2. Na
3. K
10 Attach the tubing connecting the sample pot to the electrode block.
NOTE

Log.
a calibration.
Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode

If calibration errors, such as slope readings of 0, occur frequently for the K electrode only,
the ISE Reference Solution can contaminate the K electrode. In this situation, perform the
manual cleaning of the K electrode.
A98352AC 6-189
Maintenance
Figure 6.122 Electrode Block
1. REF electrode block 5. Cl electrode wire (blue)

2. REF solution tube 6. Na electrode wire (yellow)
3. Electrodes 7. K electrode wire (red)
4. O-ring
Materials Required:
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
6-190 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode
IMPORTANT

2 Remove the K electrode from the electrode block.
Figure 6.123 K Electrode
1. O-ring
3 Disconnect the lead wire of the K electrode.

4 Remove the O-ring of the K electrode.
A98352AC 6-191
Maintenance
5 Use a squeeze bottle to dispense deionized water to clean the O-ring and O-ring groove
of the electrode. Deionized water that gets into the electrode flowcell does not cause a
problem.
6 Wipe the side face (location F in Figure 6.97 ISE Tubing Block Diagram) of the REF
electrode block that contacts the K electrode using a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent
tissue dampened with deionized water.
7 Using a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue, dry the K electrode, O-ring, and REF
electrode block surfaces.
8 Connect the red lead wire to the K electrode.

9 Install the three electrodes on the electrode block. Attach the electrodes in this order
from the sample pot side:
1. Cl
2. Na
3. K
IMPORTANT
NOTE

Log.
6-192 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Na K Cl
or
operation buttons.
4. Select OK.
buttons.
Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block

The accumulation of contaminants or crystals, a reduction in the flow rate, or noise
interference can cause data problems. If the data indicates that it is needed, manually clean
or replace the ISE REF electrode block.
A98352AC 6-193
Maintenance
Figure 6.124 ISE REF Electrode Block
1. REF electrode block 4. Cap screw

2. REF solution tube (location G in Figure 5. REF Electrode
6.97 ISE Tubing Block Diagram) 6. REF electrode wire (green)
3. REF electrode packing
Materials Required:
• REF Electrode Block
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
6-194 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
IMPORTANT

Procedure: Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block
IMPORTANT

2 Disconnect the Na, K, and Cl lead wires, and remove all three electrodes from the
electrode block. If ISE Reference Solution contacts the electrodes, the electrodes can
become contaminated.
3 Gently lift up the block on which the REF electrode is installed.

4 Disconnect the REF electrode wire (green) from the REF electrode.
5 Loosen the cap screw on the REF electrode and gently remove the electrode along with
the cap screw. Remove the REF electrode packing in the block.
6 While holding the REF electrode block by hand, pull the drain tube (labeled 6 for Cell 1,
and 8 for Cell 2) out of the REF electrode block.
7 Remove the REF solution tube (refer to Figure 6.124 ISE REF Electrode Block)
connected to the lower side of the REF electrode block. Remove the REF electrode
block.
A98352AC 6-195
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
To prevent the REF electrode block from becoming deformed from ultrasonic
cleaning, follow these precautions. If the REF electrode block is deformed or
cracked, replace it.
— Do not perform ultrasonic cleaning for more than 10 minutes.
— Use a cleaning liquid at room temperature.
— Use a sonicator rated at 600 W or less. If the output of the sonicator is uncertain,
contact the manufacturer of the sonicator.
8 To clean the REF electrode block, sonicate for 10 minutes in 2% wash solution. If a
sonicator is not available, soak it in the 2% wash solution for more than 30 minutes.
Confirm that 2% wash solution can flow through the flow path in the REF electrode
block.
9 Thoroughly rinse the REF electrode block in deionized water, and dry with a clean, dry,
lint-free absorbent tissue. If you are replacing the REF electrode block, obtain a new
REF electrode block.
Figure 6.125 REF Electrode Block
1. REF electrode block 3. REF solution tube

2. REF electrode block-side drain tube
(Tube Set 2 labeled 6, Tube Set 8
labeled 8)
10 Attach the drain tube (labeled 6 for Cell 1 and 8 for Cell 2) and the REF solution tube
(refer to Figure 6.124 ISE REF Electrode Block) to a clean or new REF electrode block.
11 Confirm that no air bubbles are in the REF electrode tip. If you find air bubbles in the
REF electrode tip, remove the bubbles by pointing the electrode tip downward while
tapping it with a finger.
12 Insert the REF electrode packing into the REF electrode block. Confirm that the packing
is not cracked or broken. If so, replace the packing.
13 Place the cap screw on the REF electrode, then place the REF electrode in the REF
electrode block so that the electrode tip is centered in the packing.
6-196 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
NOTE
If you have difficulty inserting the REF electrode into the REF electrode block,
dampen the REF electrode tip with deionized water.
14 Insert the cap screw into the REF electrode block and screw it in carefully. Finish
tightening the cap screw by a quarter or half turn to orient the REF electrode correctly.
15 Reinstall the REF electrode block.

16 Connect the green REF electrode wire to the REF electrode.
17 Wipe the top of the block with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue. Rinse the ISE
Reference Solution from your hands.
18 Replace the Na, K, and Cl electrodes.

NOTE

Log.
a calibration.
Replace the ISE Mix Bar

If the ISE mix bar is bent or damaged, you cannot achieve correct analysis. Replace the ISE
mix bar.
A98352AC 6-197
Maintenance
WARNING
Materials Required:
• Mix bar
IMPORTANT

buttons.
5 Select OK.
IMPORTANT
6-198 A98352AC
6
Maintenance

Replace the Mix Bar
2 Loosen the knob securing the mixing component. Gently lift the mixing components to
unseat it.
Figure 6.126 Mixing Component
1. Liquid level sensors 4. Connecting tubing

2. Mix bar 5. Shaft
3. Nozzle
3 Pull the mix bar to remove it.
IMPORTANT
When removing the mix bar, hold the connecting tubing in place on the mixing
component.
4 Obtain a new mix bar.

5 Insert the new mix bar into the shaft on the mixing component. Gently push the mix bar
until it reaches the end of the shaft.
Reinstall the Mixing Component
A98352AC 6-199
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
3 Perform a total prime to prime the ISE with fresh ISE Buffer Solution, ISE MID Standard
Solution, and ISE Reference Solution.
During the prime, confirm that buffer solution and MID Standard solution are correctly
dispensed into the sample pot and flows to waste without generating alarms. Also,
confirm that the mix bar rotates without contacting the sample pot. The mix bar makes
a mechanical noise when it contacts the sample pot:
1. Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
2. Select OK.
3. Press the DIAG button to start the priming. The DIAG LED turns on after the priming
is complete.
5. Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
6. To confirm that the ISE is working correctly after the maintenance procedure,
perform a calibration.
Replace the ISE Reagents

Replace the ISE reagents when the on-board stability expires, the reagent expires, or the
quantity of reagent is insufficient. The system displays an alarm message when an ISE
reagent reaches the ISE Reagent Short notification level (5.2 cm above the bottom of the
bottle). Replace the reagent before the bottle empties.
NOTE
These are the number of samples the system can run after the alarm occurs for each
reagent:
• ISE Buffer Solution - 240 samples
• ISE MID Standard Solution - 180 samples
• ISE Reference Solution - 600 samples
For on-board stability claims for the ISE, refer to the Chemistry Information Sheet.
6-200 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
NOTE
ISE Reference Solution is highly concentrated. Prevent contact between the ISE
Reference Solution (bottle, cap, and aspiration tube) with the ISE Buffer Solution and
ISE MID Standard Solution (bottle, cap, and aspiration tube).
NOTE
Do not add new reagent to existing bottles. Adding new reagent to existing bottles can
affect results.
Materials Required:
• ISE Buffer Solution
• ISE Reference Solution

2 Lift the ISE reagent cover to replace the ISE Buffer solution or ISE MID Standard
solution, or open the front door of the ISE unit to replace the ISE Reference solution.
A98352AC 6-201
Maintenance
1. ISE MID Standard Solution 3. ISE Reference Solution

2. ISE Buffer Solution
3 Place the new bottle of reagent next to the ISE unit and remove the cap.
4 Pull out the reagent bottle to replace it.
5 Loosen the cap of the reagent bottle and remove the aspiration tube.
NOTE
Do not touch the aspiration tube.
Dispose of the old solution according to your laboratory procedure.
6 Place the aspiration tube in the new bottle and tighten the cap.
7 Place the new bottle on the ISE unit and push the bottle into position.
buttons.
6-202 A98352AC
6
Maintenance
10 Select one of the following options. If all reagents are being replaced simultaneously,
replace the reagents in the following order:
1. To replace ISE Buffer Solution, select Buffer Prime

2. To replace ISE MID Standard Solution, select MID/REF Prime
3. To replace ISE Reference Solution, select MID/REF Prime
The system displays the dialog.
11 Select OK.
12 Press the DIAG button once. The system moves the ISE sample probe away.
13 Press the DIAG button again. The system primes the reagent for approximately 90
seconds.

Log.
a calibration.
A98352AC 6-203
Maintenance
6-204 A98352AC
CHAPTER 7
Flags
Flags
The system generates flags when the system encounters a condition that can affect the
result. This condition can range from minor warnings to severe errors that require
attention immediately. Review each flag and identify the root cause, and perform the
corrective action.
Do not report any result with an unresolved or unexpected flag. When in doubt, always
consider repeating the sample analysis, and diluting or condensing the sample if necessary.
This chapter contains a list of all flags in priority order, suggestions of their cause, and
action to take.
The priority determines what flags you see if a result generates multiple flags. A maximum
of four flags can display.
Error Flags - Alphabetical Order

The following table summarizes the flags in alphabetical order:
Table 7.1 Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order)
Flag Definition
! Unable to calculate concentration
# Insufficient sample detected
$ Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction
% Clot detected
& Prozone test data is abnormal
( Shortage of cleaning solution for contamination parameters
) Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different from the lot number
used for RB/ Calibration
* Linearity error in rate method
/ Test pending or not analyzed
? Unable to calculate a result
@ OD is higher than 3.0
1Q QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level field
2Q QC data exceeds 13s control range
A98352AC 7-1
Flags
Flags
Table 7.1 Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
4Q QC data exceeds R4s control range
6Q A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of the mean
7Q Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or decreasing values
a Reagent expired
B OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range
ba No calibration data or expired
bh Results are calculated with previous successful, saved calibration or reagent
blank data because the most recent calibration or reagent blank failed
bn Mastercurve used
bz Calibration curve for Prozone data used
c Result corrected by the operator
d QC result is excluded (deleted) by the operator
D OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range
e Data edited by the operator
E Overreaction in a rate assay detected
F Result is higher than the dynamic range
fh Result is higher than the repeat run reflex range
fl Result is lower than the repeat run reflex range
Fx Result (OD) is higher than the dynamic range
G Result is lower than the dynamic range
Gx Result (OD) is lower than the dynamic range
h Result can be affected by hemolysis
H Result is higher than reference range
i Result can be affected by icterus
J Result is higher than the repeat decision range
K Result is lower than the repeat decision range
l Result can be affected by lipemia
L Result is lower than reference range
M A sample ID is read that is the same as a sample ID currently in process on the
track line or AU5800 when the AU5800 is connected to the Beckman laboratory
automation system
n LIH test not performed
7-2 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flags
Table 7.1 Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
N Negative
P Positive
ph Result is higher than the upper panic value
pl Result is lower than the low panic value
R Insufficient reagent detected
r Result has been transferred to laboratory information system through online
communication
S Sample repeated and original results replaced by repeat result
T Abnormality found in the optional calculated test check programmed in the
Checked Tests Menu
U Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last photometric read point
u Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric point low
Va Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range
Wa Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette
xQ Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other QC sample
Y Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last photometric read point
y Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric point high
Z Prozone error
Summary of Flags (Priority Order)

The following table summarizes the flags in priority order:
Table 7.2 Summary of Flags (Priority Order)
Flag Definition
d QC result is excluded (deleted) by the operator
e Data edited by the operator
( Shortage of cleaning solution for contamination parameters
Wa Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette
R Insufficient reagent detected
# Insufficient sample detected
% Clot detected
? Unable to calculate a result
M A sample ID is read that is the same as a sample ID currently in process on the
track line or AU5800 when the AU5800 is connected to the Beckman laboratory
automation system
A98352AC 7-3
Flags
Flags
Table 7.2 Summary of Flags (Priority Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
n LIH test not performed
l Result can be affected by lipemia
i Result can be affected by icterus
h Result can be affected by hemolysis
Y Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last photometric read point
U Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last photometric read point
y Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric point high
u Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric point low
@ OD is higher than 3.0
$ Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction
D OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range
B OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range
* Linearity error in rate method
& Prozone test data is abnormal
Z Prozone error
E Overreaction in a rate assay detected
Fx Result (OD) is higher than the dynamic range
Gx Result (OD) is lower than the dynamic range
! Unable to calculate concentration
) Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different from the lot number
used for RB/ Calibration
a Reagent expired
ba No calibration data or expired
bh Results are calculated with previous successful, saved calibration or reagent
blank data because the most recent calibration or reagent blank failed
bn Mastercurve used
bz Calibration curve for Prozone data used
F Result is higher than the dynamic range
G Result is lower than the dynamic range
ph Result is higher than the upper panic value
pl Result is lower than the low panic value
T Abnormality found in the optional calculated test check programmed in the
Checked Tests Menu
P Positive
7-4 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
Table 7.2 Summary of Flags (Priority Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
N Negative
H Result is higher than reference range
L Result is lower than reference range
J Result is higher than the repeat decision range
K Result is lower than the repeat decision range
fh Result is higher than the repeat run reflex range
fl Result is lower than the repeat run reflex range
Va Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range
xQ Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other QC sample
1Q QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level field
4Q QC data exceeds R4s control range
6Q A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of the mean
7Q Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or decreasing values
S Sample repeated and original results replaced by repeat result
/ Test pending or not analyzed
r Result has been transferred to laboratory information system through online
communication
c Result corrected by the operator
Flag Details
d: QC result is excluded (deleted) by the operator

Possible Cause Corrective Action
QC data has been manually excluded (deleted) No corrective action is required.
from calculation by the operator. This flag is
applied in Menu List > QC > QC Data Review.
For more information, refer to the AU5800 IMPORTANT
Reference Manual.
Before excluding any QC data,
investigate and record the cause of
the result with the flag. Follow your
laboratory procedure.
A98352AC 7-5
Flags
Flag Details
e: Data edited by the operator

Data has been edited. For more information, refer No corrective action is required.
to the AU5800 Reference Manual.
IMPORTANT
Before reporting results, review any

edited or changed data carefully.
(: Shortage of cleaning solution for contamination parameters

One or more cleaning solutions programmed in
1. Fill the cleaning solution bottles.
the Contamination Parameters screen in Positions
57 to 60 for R1 and 55 to 58 for R2 are empty. 2. Perform a reagent check on the cleaning
Contamination parameters are suspended for the solution bottles. For more information, refer
related cleaning solution. Carry-over might have to Monitor the Reagent Status.
occurred on tests that have this flag.
3. Repeat analysis for the flagged tests.
Wa: Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette

The test has been analyzed using a cuvette which
1. Identify the cuvette with the error by selecting
failed photocal criteria.
Home > Analyzer Maintenance > Photocal
Monitor.
2. Clean or replace the cuvette based on the
error.
3. Repeat the photocal.
4. Repeat the analysis.
7-6 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
R: Insufficient reagent detected

Level detection indicates reagent volume not
1. Review all results generated immediately
sufficient for analysis.
before this flag for consistency and validity (in
particular the low or high results), and repeat
analysis if necessary.
2. Place new reagent onto the system and
repeat analysis.
3. Confirm that the reagent is placed securely
and correctly on the reagent tray. Partitions
and adapters hold the reagent in the correct
position for level sensing.
4. If the flag occurs even though there is
sufficient reagent, the reagent bottle can
contain bubbles. Remove the bubbles and
perform another reagent check.
5. Dry the reagent bottle opening if it is wet.
Inspect the reagent probe, and clean or
replace as required. For more information,
refer to Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample
Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars Clean
the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash
Wells, Replace a Sample Probe, and Replace a
Reagent Probe.
6. Confirm that the reagent probe is correctly
installed and connected.
A98352AC 7-7
Flags
Flag Details
#: Insufficient sample detected

The sample probe cannot detect sufficient sample
1. Review all other results that were generated
volume.
on the same sample before generating the
• Insufficient sample volume. flag to confirm validity and consistency (no
• Malfunction of the sample level detection extremely low or high values).
system. 2. Confirm that there is enough sample in the
• Inappropriate sample cup or tube. cup or tube. Confirm that the sample cup or
tube is validated for use on the system.
Repeat analysis using a validated cup or tube
with sufficient sample volume.
You do not have to continue with the sample

probe related errors if the problem is with the
sample or sample cup or tube.
3. Wipe the probe with an alcohol prep pad (70%
Isopropyl alcohol) and inspect the probe to
confirm that it is installed and connected
correctly. For more information, refer to
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes,
Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars.
4. Replace the sample probe. For more
information, refer to Replace a Sample Probe
or Replace a Reagent Probe.
5. Confirm that the correct sample cup or tube is
in use. For more information, refer to Cups or
Tubes Specifications.
%: Clot detected
The sample probe is blocked or partially blocked
1. Review all other results that were generated
during sample aspiration.
on the same sample before generating the
flag to confirm validity and consistency (no
extremely low or high values).
2. Confirm that the sample is free of clots, and
remove any that are in the sample. If
necessary, centrifuge the sample and repeat
analysis.
3. If the error still occurs, clean or replace the
sample probe. For more information, refer to
Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars and
Replace a Sample Probe.
7-8 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
?: Unable to calculate a result

A result cannot be calculated for this sample
1. If the sample has a high concentration, the
because:
sample can be severely lipemic, icteric,
• In a rate reaction, fewer than three hemolytic or can contain excessively large
photometric readings satisfy the test criteria concentration of the analyte being tested.
specified in Specific Test Parameters. Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
• Outside of cuvette walls or the cuvette wheel 2. Confirm the reagent condition.
is wet.
3. The system generates a flag or alarm
• A mechanical error has occurred.
identifying the malfunction. Select Alarm List
for a description of the alarm and corrective
actions. When the problem is solved, repeat
analysis. If the issue persists, contact Beckman
Coulter.
4. Analyze the reaction data including those
processed immediately before and after the
flagged result. In the presence of any
abnormality, inspect the cuvettes and cuvette
wheel for a possible overflow. If the cuvette
wheel is wet, perform appropriate corrective
actions. For more information, refer to
Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow
and Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette
Wedges.
5. If the AU5800 connects to a laboratory
automation system, confirm that the system
does not have any errors. If the issue persists,
contact Beckman Coulter.
M: A sample ID is read that is the same as a sample ID currently in process on the track line or
AU5800 when the AU5800 is connected to the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system
A duplicate sample ID has been read within the
1. Confirm that the results of the samples with
samples in process.
the duplicate sample ID are correct.
2. Follow laboratory procedure.
n: LIH test not performed

The LIH test has not been performed for tests with
1. Examine the sample and repeat if necessary.
LIH Influence Check set to Yes in Specific Test
Parameters > General. 2. Confirm the LIH reagent.
A98352AC 7-9
Flags
Flag Details
l: Result can be affected by lipemia

The result can be affected by lipemia or samples Follow laboratory procedure for lipemic samples.
are turbid.
i: Result can be affected by icterus

The result can be affected by bilirubin. Follow laboratory procedure for icteric samples.
h: Result can be affected by hemolysis

The result can be affected by hemolysis. Follow laboratory procedure for hemolytic
samples.
Y: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last photometric read point
Reagent blank OD is higher than the Reagent OD
1. Inspect the reagent expiration and on-board
Limit range defined for the last photometric point.
The Reagent OD Limit range is programmed in expiration date.
Menu List > Parameters > Specific Test 2. Confirm that the reagent was prepared
Parameters > General. correctly.
3. Confirm the Reagent OD Limit range
This could be caused by:
programmed in Specific Test Parameters is
• Reagent expired. correct.
• Reagent contamination. 4. Replace the reagent and repeat analysis.
• Incorrectly prepared reagents.
• Incorrect range programmed.
7-10 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
U: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last photometric read point
Reagent blank OD is lower than the Reagent OD
Limit range defined for the last photometric point.
The Reagent OD Limit range is programmed in expiration date.
Menu List > Parameters > Specific Test 2. Confirm that the reagent was prepared
Parameters > General. correctly.
3. Confirm the Reagent OD Limit range
This could be caused by:
programmed in Specific Test Parameters is
• Reagent expired. correct.
• Reagent contamination. 4. Replace the reagent and repeat analysis.
y: Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric point high

The first photometric point OD of the reagent
blank or the OD at P0 of normal analysis is higher
than the Reagent OD Limit range defined for the expiration date.
first photometric point. Reagent OD Limit is 2. Confirm that the reagent was prepared
programmed in Menu List > Parameters > correctly.
Specific Test Parameters > General. 3. Confirm the Reagent OD Limit range
This could be caused by: programmed in Specific Test Parameters is
correct.
• Reagent expired.
4. Replace the reagent and repeat analysis.
• Reagent contamination.
u: Reagent blank or routine (patient) OD at first photometric point low

The first photometric point OD of the reagent
blank or the OD at P0 of normal analysis is lower
than the Reagent OD Limit range defined for the expiration date.
first photometric point. The Reagent OD Limit 2. Confirm that the reagent was prepared
range is programmed in Menu List > Parameters correctly.
> Specific Test Parameters > General. 3. Confirm the Reagent OD Limit range
This could be caused by: programmed in Specific Test Parameters is
correct.
• Reagent expired.
4. Replace the reagent and repeat analysis.
• Reagent contamination.
A98352AC 7-11
Flags
Flag Details
@: OD is higher than 3.0

An abnormally high value. A reaction OD has
1. Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
exceeded 3.0. In a dual wavelength measurement,
an error occurs if either of the two wavelengths 2. Confirm that the cuvette wheel is not wet. If
exceed 3.0 OD. the cuvette wheel is wet, perform appropriate
corrective actions. For more information,
This error occurs if one of the following three refer to Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel
conditions is met: Overflow and Clean the Cuvettes and the
• Primary wavelength is over the limit (3.0) Cuvette Wedges.
• Secondary wavelength is over the limit (3.0) 3. Perform a photocal to assess the condition of
• Reaction wavelength is over the limit (3.0) the lamp. Replace the lamp if the results are
out of range. For more information, refer to
This error only occurs on END or FIXED reaction Perform a Photocal or Replace the
methods, not on RATE reaction methods. Photometer Lamp.
• Sample quality. The sample is severely
lipemic, icteric, hemolytic or can contain
excessively large concentration of the analyte
being tested.
• Faulty photometer lamp.
• Cuvette overflow.
$: Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction

Fewer than three read points of a RATE reaction
1. If the sample has a high concentration, the
are within the acceptable optical density range
specified. To calculate a RATE reaction correctly, a sample can be severely lipemic, icteric,
minimum of three readings must be taken before hemolytic or can contain excessively large
reaching maximum or minimum optical density. If concentration of the analyte being tested.
these optical density limits are exceeded, the Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
reaction might go into substrate depletion caused 2. Confirm that the probes and syringes are
by a high concentration or a problem with the functioning correctly. For more information,
condition of the reagent. Linearity calculations are
refer to Inspect the Syringes for Leaks and
not made when this flag occurs.
Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes,
Reagent Probes and Mix Bars.
3. Analyze the reaction data including the
reaction data processed immediately before
and after the flagged result. In the presence of
any abnormality, inspect the cuvettes and
cuvette wheel for a possible overflow. If the
cuvette wheel is wet, perform appropriate
refer to Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel
Overflow and Clean the Cuvettes and the
Cuvette Wedges.
7-12 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
D: OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range

The OD of a RATE or FIXED reaction does not meet
• If this flag is only generated on one or a few
the maximum OD criteria programmed in OD Limit
samples, inspect the sample quality:
in Specific Test Parameters:
— If the sample has a high concentration,
• A specified read point FST+2 (first the sample can be severely lipemic,
photometry point plus two) in a positive icteric, hemolytic or can contain
RATE reaction method: High concentration. excessively large concentration of the
• A specified read point LST-2 (last photometry analyte being tested. Dilute the sample
point minus two) in a negative RATE reaction and repeat analysis.
method: Low concentration. — If the sample has a low concentration,
• A photometry read point in a positive FIXED no reaction occurs in the cuvette.
reaction method: High concentration. Confirm that there is enough sample
• A photometry read point in a negative FIXED volume in the tube.
reaction method: Low concentration. • If this flag is only generated on one reagent,
inspect the reagent quality and for reagent
contamination:
— Inspect the reagent expiration, onboard

expiration, and reagent blank
expiration.
— Confirm that the reagent was prepared
correctly.
— Confirm that fixed reagents are in the
correct position.
• If this flag is generated randomly on several
samples and several different tests:
— Confirm that the cuvette wheel is not

wet. If the cuvette wheel is wet,
perform appropriate corrective actions.
For more information, refer to
Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel
Overflow and Clean the Cuvettes and
the Cuvette Wedges.
— Perform a photocal to assess the
condition of the lamp. Replace the lamp
if the results are out of range. For more
information, refer to Perform a Photocal
or Replace the Photometer Lamp.
A98352AC 7-13
Flags
Flag Details
B: OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range

The OD of a RATE or FIXED reaction does not meet
• If this flag is only generated on one or a few
the minimum OD criteria programmed in OD Limit
samples, inspect the sample quality:
in Specific Test Parameters:
— If the sample has a high concentration,
• A specified read point FST+2 (first the sample can be severely lipemic,
photometry point plus two) in a negative icteric, hemolytic or can contain
RATE reaction method: High concentration. excessively large concentration of the
• A photometry read point in a negative FIXED analyte being tested. Dilute the sample
reaction method: High concentration. and repeat analysis.
• A photometry read point in a positive FIXED — If the sample has a low concentration,
reaction method: Low concentration. no reaction occurs in the cuvette.
Confirm that there is enough sample
volume in the tube.
• If this flag is only generated on one reagent,
inspect the reagent quality and for reagent
contamination:
— Inspect the reagent expiration, onboard

expiration, and reagent blank
expiration.
— Confirm that the reagent was prepared
correctly.
— Confirm that fixed reagents are in the
correct position.
• If this flag is generated randomly on several
samples and several different tests:
— Perform a photocal to assess the

condition of the lamp. Replace the lamp
if the results are out of range. For more
information, refer to Perform a
Photocal. When the photocal
completes, check results and clean or
replace the cuvettes based on the errors
detected.
7-14 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
*: Linearity error in rate method

The system generates the * flag when the rate of a
1. Dilute the sample and repeat analysis or
reaction varies by more than the defined %
perform a diluted repeat analysis.
variance, as defined in Menu List > Parameters
> Specific Test Parameters > General and is 2. Replace reagent if contamination is suspected,
therefore deemed non-linear, or the reverse reagent is expired or on-board expired.
reaction check on a RATE reaction method failed. 3. Clean all mix bars and inspect them for
• Unusually high result. damage. For more information, refer to
• Contaminated reagent. Inspect ,Clean, and Prime the Sample Probes
Reagent Probes and Mix Bars. Replace any
• Dirty or defective mix bars.
that have scratches or chips in the fluororesin
• Defective cuvettes.
coating. For more information, refer to
• Deteriorated lamp.
Replace the Mix Bars.
• Reagent or sample probe alignment problem.
4. Confirm that the sample probe and reagent
• Outer cuvette walls or the cuvette wheel is
wet. probe alignment. If the probe is bent, replace
the probe. For more information, refer to
• The concentration is near zero for toxicology
analysis using the RATE reaction method. Replace a Sample Probe or Replace a Reagent
Probe.
5. Confirm that the cuvette wheel is not wet. If
the cuvette wheel is wet, perform appropriate
Overflow and Clean the Cuvettes and the
Cuvette Wedges.
6. Perform a photocal to assess the lamp and
cuvette integrity. Replace the lamp or
cuvettes as required and perform another
photocal. For more information, refer to
Replace the Photometer Lamp, Clean or
Replace Individual Cuvettes, or Perform a
Photocal.
7. No action required. If the method is RATE, the
reverse reaction check is performed. If the
concentration is near zero, the reaction curve
is flat and triggers the * flag. Confirm that
there is no other cause for the * flag before
reporting the result.
&: Prozone test data is abnormal

The data for prozone judgement is abnormal. Dilute the sample and repeat analysis. If the issue
persists, contact Beckman Coulter.
A98352AC 7-15
Flags
Flag Details
Z: Prozone error
The data check equation for any one of logic check Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
1, 2 or 3 is satisfied. This is often caused by an
abnormally high concentration of analyte in a
sample.
E: Overreaction in a rate assay detected

In the rate assay, the result is judged as an error by Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
checking an overreaction in which the reaction
was finished in an excessively short time.
• An abnormally high concentration of analyte

in a sample.
Fx: Result (OD) is higher than the dynamic range

No concentration could be calculated. The OD of Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
the sample exceeded the OD of the upper limit of
the dynamic range.
Gx: Result (OD) is lower than the dynamic range

No concentration could be calculated. The OD of
1. Review the result in the clinical context of the
the sample is lower than the OD of the low limit of
the dynamic range. patient and repeat if necessary.
2. Confirm the correct operation of the reagent
probes.
3. Confirm that the reagent bottles are in the
correct position.
4. Inspect the reagents for bubbles.
7-16 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
!: Unable to calculate concentration

The system has failed to calculate a result.
1. If the flag is a single sample issue, repeat and
dilute if necessary.
2. If multiple samples are affected, review all
operating parameters such as:
— Reagent quality
— Calibration
— Sample integrity
— General system issues
3. Analyze the reaction data including the
reaction data processed immediately before
and after the flagged result. In the presence of
any abnormality, inspect the cuvettes and
cuvette wheel for a possible overflow. If the
cuvette wheel is wet, perform appropriate
Overflow, Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette
Wedges and Recovering from a Photometry
Error During a Cuvette Wash Alarm.
4. If the flag is generated on Na, K, or Cl, repeat
enough samples which preceded the
appearance of the ! flag in order to confirm
that the system did not report incorrect
results. It is possible that air in the flowcell
affected samples before the system generated
the ! flag.
— To confirm that there are no

obstructions in the flowcell path,
perform a MID/REF Prime and confirm
that no bubbles are in the tubing at the
bottom of the flowcell.
— Confirm that all tubing is connected
correctly.
A98352AC 7-17
Flags
Flag Details
): Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different from the lot number used for RB/
Calibration
The reagent lot number does not match the
1. Calibrate the reagent used for the test that
calibrated reagent lot number.
generated the flag.
2. Process QC.
3. Repeat analysis or recalculate the results
manually by selecting Menu List > Routine >
Sample Manager > Main. Select
Recalculate Data (F5).
a: Reagent expired
The reagent has either expired or has been on Replace the reagents and perform a reagent check
board beyond the period defined in Specific Test and a calibration if necessary.
Parameters.
ba: No calibration data or expired

No reagent blank or calibration data, or the data is
1. Perform a calibration. For more information,
expired.
refer to Calibrate Tests.
2. Review calibration in Menu List >
Calibration > Calibration Monitor.
3. Carefully review any results generated with
this flag and repeat if necessary.
bh: Results are calculated with previous successful, saved calibration or reagent blank data
because the most recent calibration or reagent blank failed.
The most recent reagent blank or calibration failed
or is expired. Results can be erroneous and should
not be reported. refer to Calibrate Tests.
2. Review calibration in Menu List >
Calibration > Calibration Monitor.
3. Repeat samples using a valid calibration.
7-18 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
bn: Mastercurve used

Calibration has either not been performed, or was
not successful. The system has used the master
curve to generate the result. Review calibration in refer to Calibrate Tests.
Menu List > Calibration > Calibration Monitor. 2. Repeat samples using a valid calibration.
Results can be erroneous and should not be

reported.
bz: Calibration curve for Prozone data used

The system has used a calibration curve affected Carefully review any results generated with this
by prozone to generate the result, and the result is flag and repeat the analysis with dilution.
invalid. Only use the result as a reference to
estimate the dilution rate for repeat analysis.
F: Result is higher than the dynamic range

The concentration of the sample is above the
1. Confirm that the correct dynamic range is
dynamic range high limit, programmed in Menu
programmed in Specific Test Parameters.
List > Parameters > Specific Test Parameters >
General. 2. Dilute the sample and repeat analysis. Dilute
samples so that they yield a value in the
middle of the analytical measuring range.
G: Result is lower than the dynamic range

The concentration of the sample is below the
1. Confirm that the correct dynamic range is
dynamic range low limit, programmed in Menu
programmed in Specific Test Parameters.
List > Parameters > Specific Test Parameters >
General, or the reagent was not dispensed 2. Review the result in the clinical context of the
correctly. patient and repeat if necessary.
• Incorrect dynamic range is programmed. 3. Confirm the correct operation of the reagent
probes.
• The clinical context of the patient.
• Insufficient reagent dispensing. 4. Confirm that the reagent bottles are in the
• Insufficient sample dispensing correct position.
5. Inspect the sample for bubbles.
A98352AC 7-19
Flags
Flag Details
ph: Result is higher than the upper panic value

The result is higher than the upper panic value This flag denotes that the result is outside
programmed in Menu List > Parameters > operator-defined panic ranges. Follow laboratory
Specific Test Parameters > Range. procedure for abnormal results.
pl: Result is lower than the low panic value

The result is lower than the low panic value This flag denotes that the result is outside
programmed in Menu List > Parameters > operator-defined panic ranges. Follow laboratory
Specific Test Parameters > Range. procedure for abnormal results.
T: Abnormality found in the optional calculated test check programmed in the Checked Tests
Menu
A result exceeds the range specified in Menu List
1. Repeat analysis.
> Parameters > Misc. > Checked Tests.
2. Follow laboratory procedure for abnormal
results.
P: Positive
Qualitative result: Sample result exceeds the Follow laboratory procedure.
upper value programmed in Menu List >
Parameters > Specific Test Parameters >
Range. Select Flag in the Value/Flag to enable
programming in the Level High field. Results over
the Level High generate the P flag.
N: Negative
Qualitative result: Sample result is lower than the Follow laboratory procedure.
low value programmed in Menu List >
Range. Select Flag in the Value/Flag to enable
programming in the Level Low field. Results
under the Level Low generate the N flag.
7-20 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
H: Result is higher than reference range

Sample result is higher than the high value Follow laboratory procedure for abnormal results.
programmed in Specific Ranges in Menu List >
Range. For more information, refer to the AU5800
Reference Manual.
L: Result is lower than reference range

Sample result is lower than the low value Follow laboratory procedure for abnormal results.
programmed in Specific Ranges in Menu List >
Range. For more information, refer to the AU5800
Reference Manual.
J: Result is higher than the repeat decision range

The result is higher than the repeat decision range Follow laboratory procedure.
programmed in Menu List > Parameters >
Repeat Parameters > Repeat Specific.
K: Result is lower than the repeat decision range

The result is lower than the repeat decision range Follow laboratory procedure.
programmed in Menu List > Parameters >
Repeat Parameters > Repeat Specific.
fh: Result is higher than the repeat run reflex range

The result is higher than the operator specified Follow laboratory procedure.
reflex range, programmed in Menu List >
Parameters > Repeat Parameters > Repeat
Specific.
A98352AC 7-21
Flags
Flag Details
fl: Result is lower than the repeat run reflex range

The result is lower than the operator specified Follow laboratory procedure.
reflex range, programmed in Menu List >
Parameters > Repeat Parameters > Repeat
Specific.
Va: Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range

The precision of replicates for the reagent blank or
1. Perform the corresponding maintenance:
calibration exceeds the allowable range
programmed in Menu List > Parameters > — Inspect the syringes. For more
Calibration Parameters > Calibration Specific, information, refer to Inspect the Syringes
then select Allowable Range Check. for Leaks.
— Inspect the sample probes. For more
information, refer to Inspect, Clean, and
Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent
Probes, and Mix Bars.
2. Confirm the correct sample material was used
for the reagent blank or calibration.
3. Inspect for evidence of system contamination.
xQ: Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other QC sample

If one of two QC samples processed in pairs falls If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
out of range using QC Multi-rules, the other QC investigate the cause before deciding whether to
sample result is flagged. The range is programmed report patient results. If any trends or sudden
in Menu List > Parameter > QC Parameters > shifts in values are detected, review all operating
QC Specific. For more information, refer to the parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
AU5800 Reference Manual. of-range QC results such as:
• Repeat with fresh QC samples.

• Perform calibration as required.
• Perform maintenance as required.
7-22 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
1Q: QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level field
One point of QC data exceeds the SD defined in If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
the Single Check Level in Menu List > investigate the cause before deciding whether to
Parameters > QC Parameters > QC report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Specific>Check. For more information, refer to shifts in values are detected, review all operating
the AU5800 Reference Manual. parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
of-range QC results such as:

2Q: QC data exceeds 13s control range

One point of QC data exceeds the ±3SD limit If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
defined in the Multi Check Level in Menu List > investigate the cause before deciding whether to
Parameters > QC Parameters > QC Specific > report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Check. For more information, refer to the AU5800 shifts in values are detected, review all operating
Reference Manual. parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
of-range QC results such as:


Two contiguous QC data points exceed the ±2SD If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
limit in the same direction. The data points are investigate the cause before deciding whether to
programmed in Multi Check Level in Menu List > report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Parameters > QC Parameters > QC Specific> shifts in values are detected, review all operating
Check. For more information, refer to the AU5800 parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
Reference Manual. of-range QC results such as:

A98352AC 7-23
Flags
Flag Details
4Q: QC data exceeds R4s control range

One of the two consecutive high and low If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
concentration QC data points exceeds the +2SD investigate the cause before deciding whether to
limit and the other exceeds the -2SD limit, or the report patient results. If any trends or sudden
difference between the two QC samples exceeds 4 shifts in values are detected, review all operating
SD. The QC rule is selected in Multi Check Level in parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
Menu List > Parameters > QC Parameters > of-range QC results such as:
QC Specific> Check. For more information, refer
to the AU5800 Reference Manual.

Four consecutive QC data point results have If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
exceeded the 1SD limit. The QC rule is selected in investigate the cause before deciding whether to
Multi Check Level in Menu List > Parameters > report patient results. If any trends or sudden
QC Parameters > QC Specific> Check. For more shifts in values are detected, review all operating
information, refer to the AU5800 Reference parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
Manual. of-range QC results such as:

6Q: A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of the mean
Results for a preset number (7 to 10) of If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
consecutive data points fall either above or below investigate the cause before deciding whether to
the mean. The setting is programmed in Multi report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Check Level in Menu List > Parameters > QC shifts in values are detected, review all operating
Parameters > QC Specific> Check. For more parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
information, refer to the AU5800 Reference of-range QC results such as:
Manual.
7-24 A98352AC
7
Flags
Flag Details
7Q: Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or decreasing values

Results for a preset number (4 to 10) of If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
consecutive data points are increasing or investigate the cause before deciding whether to
decreasing. The setting is programmed in Multi report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Check Level in Menu List > Parameters > QC shifts in values are detected, review all operating
Parameters > QC Specific> Check. For more parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
information, refer to the AU5800 Reference of-range QC results such as:
Manual.
S: Sample repeated and original results replaced by repeat result

A test has been repeated and this repeat result has No action required.
replaced the previous result to become the final
result.
/: Test pending or not analyzed

The test was not performed, even though it was Review all results generated immediately before
ordered (requisitioned) (generally because of a this flag for consistency and validity (especially low
reagent shortage), or the testing is still in process. or high results) and repeat if necessary.
1. If the reagent is empty, place new reagent

onto the system and repeat analysis.
2. Confirm that fixed reagents are in the correct
position.
3. Inspect the reagent probe and clean or
replace as required. For more information,
refer to Inspect, Clean, and Prime the Sample
Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars,
Replace a Sample Probe, or Replace a Reagent
Probe.
4. Confirm that the reagent probe is correctly
installed and connected.
r: Result has been transferred to laboratory information system through online communication
No action required.
A98352AC 7-25
Flags
Application of Flags (F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N) During Calculation of Final Result Flowchart
c: Result corrected by the operator

Data has been corrected. For more information, Follow laboratory procedure. Review any edited or
refer to the AU5800 Reference Manual. changed data carefully before reporting.
Application of Flags (F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N) During Calculation of Final Result

Flowchart
This flowchart shows the calculations that occur to obtain the final concentration result,
and when the system applies the flags.
Figure 7.1 Application of F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N flags
Beckman Coulter programs Factor for Maker, and the system displays the setting in Specific
Test Parameters. A is a multiplication factor and B is an addition and subtraction factor.
In the Test Requisition and Repeat Order (Requisition) menus, Sample Dilution (F7) allows
input of a dilution rate when making a manual dilution of the sample for the original or
repeat run.
A calculation is made for Pre-Dilution Rate defined in Specific Test Parameters, as well as
Pre-Dilution Rate defined in Repeat Specific for Repeat with diluent and Repeat with
condense.
7-26 A98352AC
7
Flags
A calculation is made based on the sample and reagent volume defined in Specific Test
Parameters and Repeat Specific.
The Correlation Factor is programmed in Specific Test Parameters. A is a multiplication

factor and B is an addition or subtraction factor.
Figure 7.2 Examples with F flag: Dynamic Range is 1 to 500
Example 1
A final result of 300 without an F or a G flag.
Example 2
A final result of 600 without an F flag because the dynamic range check occurs (in range),
then the concentration is multiplied by 2 for a manual dilution.
Example 3
A final result of 300 with an F flag because the dynamic range check occurs (over range),
then a Correlation Factor A of 0.5 is applied.
A98352AC 7-27
Flags
7-28 A98352AC
CHAPTER 8
Error Messages
Error Messages
The system displays the following error messages after selecting the Start button. This
chapter describes the cause of the error message and corrective actions to perform if the
system has an error.
Table 8.1 Error Messages
Error Messages Possible Cause Corrective Action
24 hours have elapsed since RB was
1. Order (requisition) the required test for
analyzed. Please open Calibration
Requisition menu and requisition the test. reagent blank in the Calibration screen.
2. Perform a reagent blank.
After checking printer, resume printer in The printer status is

1. Confirm that the printer is turned on, and
Analyzer Status menu. abnormal.
correct any errors with the printer.
2. Select Home > Analyzer Status.
3. Select Printer Control (F4), then
Resume or Cancel.
Calibration stability is expired. Open Calibration data has

Calibration Requisition menu and expired.
requisition the test. (Unit:1,2,3,4) reagent blank in the Calibration screen.
2. Perform a calibration.
Calibration stability will expire soon. (Unit: Calibration data is

1,2,3,4) close to expiration.
reagent blank in the Calibration screen.
Conc Waste tank is full. (Unit:1,2,3,4) The tank is full of Contact Beckman Coulter.
concentrated liquid
waste.
Consumption item expired. Please change. There is a consumable Replace the expired consumable item.
item over its service
life.
Currently communicating with HOST. The analyzer is Review the analyzer for the status of
communicating with communication with the laboratory
the laboratory information system in the Analyzer Status
information system. screen.
A98352AC 8-1
Error Messages
Error Messages
Table 8.1 Error Messages (Continued)

Cuvette Error found. Please check error in One or more cuvettes
the User Maintenance menu. (Unit:1,2,3,4). have failed the
1. Inspect the cuvette status in Home >
photocal. Analyzer Maintenance > Photocal
Monitor. Inspect each Unit and the
Inner and Outer cuvettes to identify the
cuvettes with an error.
2. Take corrective action based on the
failure. For more information, refer to
Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette
Wedges, Clean or Replace Individual
Cuvettes or Replace the Photometer
Lamp.
3. Repeat the photocal on any cuvettes that
failed the photocal. For more information,
refer to Perform a Photocal.
Daily Calibration is not performed. Perform ISE calibration in Home > Analyzer
(Cell1:NN...NN, Cell2:NN...NN) Maintenance > ISE Maintenance >
Calibration.
Deionized Water Overflow. Please check Overflow of deionized
1. Confirm that the deionized water float
the tank. (Unit:1,2,3,4) water.
sensor connector is plugged in correctly. If
it is not connected correctly, plug in the
connector.
2. If no abnormality is found in the deionized
water float sensor, contact Beckman
Coulter.
Diluent short. Please perform reagent The deionized water or

1. Replace the deionized water or diluent in
check. (Unit:1,2,3,4) diluent in the
predilution bottle is the pre-dilution bottle.
insufficient. 2. Perform a reagent check.
8-2 A98352AC
8
Error Messages
Error Messages

Diluted Wash Sol. Overflow. Please check Overflow of diluted
1. Confirm that the diluted wash solution
the tank. (Unit:1,2,3,4) wash solution.
float sensor connector is plugged in
correctly. If it is not connected correctly,
plug in the connector.
2. Check the float sensor is plugged in. -If it is
not plugged in select End Process or EM
Stop (not sure which is more appropriate).
— Plug in the float sensor.

— Select START or Reset/START
(based on End Process or EM Stop
used)
— Once the system is in Warm Up,
confirm that the error is corrected.
— If the error persists, contact
Beckman Coulter.
A98352AC 8-3
Error Messages
Error Messages

Diluted Wash Solution short. (Unit:1,2,3,4) The diluted wash
1. Confirm that the diluted wash solution
solution is insufficient.
float sensor connector is plugged in
correctly. If it is not connected correctly,
plug in the connector.
2. Inspect the liquid level in the diluted wash
solution tank, wash solution tank
(analyzer unit), deionized water tank, and
master wash solution tank (rack feeder
unit).
— If all liquid levels are sufficient,

— If the liquid level in the diluted wash
solution tank is insufficient:
— Check the liquid level in the

wash solution tank (analyzer
unit). If the level in the wash
solution tank (analyzer unit) is
insufficient, check the liquid
level in the master wash
solution tank (rack feeder unit).
If the wash solution in the
master wash solution tank is
insufficient, replenish the wash
solution. Refer to Replenish the
Wash Solution. If the level in
the wash solution tank
(analyzer unit) is sufficient,
deionized water tank. If the
liquid level in the deionized
water is insufficient, check the
deionized water supply. If there
is not a problem with the
deionized water supply, contact
Beckman Coulter.
Incorrect parameter is found. Please open A programming error Inspect the Parameters screen or tab listed in
[MM...MM/NN...NN] menu and check the exists in Parameters. the error message. The system displays the
parameters. screen or tab name instead of [MM...MM/
NN...NN] in the error message.
ISE BUF Solution short. (Cell:1,2) Replace the ISE Buffer Solution bottle. For
more information, refer to Replace the ISE
Reagents.
8-4 A98352AC
8
Error Messages
Error Messages

ISE Detergent Short. Add the ISE sample probe detergent (2% wash
solution) and perform a reagent check for the
ISE sample probe detergent (2% wash solution)
in the Reagent Management screen.
ISE Detergent unchecked. Perform a reagent check for the ISE detergent
in the Reagent Management screen.
ISE MID Solution short. (Cell:1,2) Replace the ISE MID Standard Solution bottle.
For more information, refer to Replace the ISE
Reagents.
ISE REF Solution short. (Cell:1,2) Replace the ISE Reference Solution bottle. For
more information, refer to Replace the ISE
Reagents.
ISE selectivity check not performed. (Cell: Perform a Selectivity Check. Refer to
1,2) Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes.
ISE selectivity error (Cell1:Na, Cell2:Na,
1. Perform a Selectivity Check. For more
Cell1:K, Cell2:K)
information, refer to Selectivity Check for
the Na and K Electrodes.
2. If the error is not resolved, replace the Na
or K electrode. For more information,
refer to Replace the Na K or Cl Electrode.
ISE slope is over (under) the range

1. Calibrate the ISE. For more information,
[Cell1:MM, NN...NN, Cell2:MM, NN...NN]
refer to Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option).
2. If the error is not resolved, replace the
corresponding electrode. For more
information, refer to Replace the Na K or
Cl Electrode.
NOTE
The system displays the ISE test

name and sample type instead of
[MMMMMM, NN...NN] in the
Error Message.
A98352AC 8-5
Error Messages
Error Messages

ISE slope is zero [Cell1:MM, NN...NN,
1. Calibrate the ISE. For more information,
Cell2:MM, NN...NN]
refer to Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option).
2. If the error is not resolved, replace the
corresponding electrode. For more
information, refer to Replace the Na K or
Cl Electrode.
NOTE
The system displays the ISE test

name and sample type instead of
[MMMMMM, NN...NN] in the
Error Message.
ISE Status is stop. (Cell:1,2) ISE is in Stop mode. Press the Stop/Standby switch on the ISE unit
to reset the ISE to Standby mode.
Liquid is remained in vacuum tank. (Unit: Liquid waste exists in Contact Beckman Coulter.
1,2,3,4) the vacuum tank.
Maintenance item expired. Please perform The maintenance
1. Review the Maintenance tab.
maintenance. procedure expired.
2. Perform necessary maintenance.
Maintenance item will expire soon. Please The maintenance

1. Review the Maintenance tab.
check it. procedure is close to
expiration. 2. Perform necessary maintenance.
Master Curve is not scanned. Please check A new lot of reagent in

the Reagent Management menu. (Unit: the reagent
1. Review the details in Home > Reagent
1,2,3,4) refrigerator has no Management > Details.
master curve because 2. Use the hand scanner to scan the 2-D bar
the 2-D bar code to code on the reagent.
create a master curve
has not been scanned. 3. Perform a reagent check.
No deionized water. Please check water The deionized water

1. Inspect the water outlet valve on the
supply valve. (Unit:1,2,3,4) tank is empty.
deionized water system.
2. If no abnormality is found in the deionized
water system, contact Beckman Coulter.
No Diluent. Please check in the Reagent The deionized water or

1. Replace the deionized water or diluent in
Management menu. (Unit:1,2,3,4) diluent in the
predilution bottle is the pre-dilution bottle.
empty. 2. Perform a reagent check.
8-6 A98352AC
8
Error Messages
Error Messages

No ISE Wash Sol. The ISE sample probe Replenish the ISE sample probe wash solution,
wash solution is and perform a reagent check for the ISE
empty. detergent in the Reagent Management screen.
No Photocal Data. Please perform Photocal No Photocal data Perform a Photocal. Refer to Perform a
in the User Maintenance menu. (Unit: exists. Photocal.
1,2,3,4)
No R Probe Wash Sol. in the Reagent The cleaning solution
Management menu. (Unit:1,2,3,4) for contamination
1. Select Home > Reagent Management >
parameters in the Details to determine which bottle of
cleaning solution cleaning solution is empty.
bottle is empty. 2. Replace the cleaning solution for
contamination prevention in the CLN-1 or
CLN-2 bottle located by the reagent
refrigerators.
3. Perform a reagent check.
No Reagent. Please check the Reagent Analysis cannot be

Management menu. (Unit:1,2,3,4) performed because
1. Select Home > Reagent Management
the required reagent is to determine which bottle of reagent is
empty or missing. empty.
2. Place the required reagent in the reagent
refrigerator.
No S Probe Wash Sol. (Unit:1,2,3,4) The 2% Wash Solution

1. Replace the 2% Wash Solution in the
in the sample probe
wash solution bottle is sample probe wash solution bottle.
empty. 2. Perform a reagent check.
Onboard Stability is expired. Replace the One or more reagents

reagent in the refrigerator and perform a have exceeded the
reagent volume check. (Unit:1,2,3,4) onboard stability Details to determine which bottle of
expiration date. reagent has exceeded the onboard
stability expiration date.
2. Replace the reagent bottle with a new
reagent bottle.
Onboard Stability will expire soon. Please One or more reagents

check in the Reagent Management menu. are close to the
(Unit:1,2,3,4) onboard stability Details to determine which bottle of
expiration date. reagent is close to the onboard stability
expiration date.
2. Replace the reagent bottle with a new
reagent bottle.
A98352AC 8-7
Error Messages
Error Messages

Please perform Reagent Check. (Unit: Reagent status is
1,2,3,4) Unchecked because
1. Select Home > Reagent Management.
the reagent 2. Perform a reagent check.
refrigerator cover was
opened, or a
parameter was
changed.
R Probe Wash Sol. Short. Please perform The cleaning solution
reagent check. (Unit:1,2,3,4) for contamination
parameters in the Details to determine which bottle is
cleaning solution running short of cleaning solution.
bottle is insufficient. 2. Replace the cleaning solution for
contamination prevention in the CLN-1 or
CLN-2 bottle located by the reagent
refrigerators.
Rack Collection area is full or No Tray is The trays on the rack

1. Remove racks from the trays on the rack
present. output component are
full with racks, or there output component.
are not any trays on 2. Place an empty tray on the rack output
the rack output component.
component.
RB stability is expired. Please open Reagent blank data has
Calibration Requisition and requisition the expired.
test. (Unit:1,2,3,4) reagent blank in the Calibration
Requisition menu.
RB stability will expire soon. (Unit:1,2,3,4) Reagent blank data is

close to expiration.
reagent blank in the Calibration screen.
Reagent error found. Please check the An error has been

Reagent Management menu. (Unit:1,2,3,4) found with a reagent
bottle. Detail and review the Comment column
for the error.
2. Confirm the reagent bottle position.
8-8 A98352AC
8
Error Messages
Error Messages

Reagent is expired. Please check Reagent The reagent has
Management and replace new reagent in expired.
the refrigerator. (Unit:1,2,3,4) Details to determine which bottle of
reagent has expired.
2. Replace the bottle of expired reagent with
a new reagent bottle.
Reagent will expire soon. Please check the The reagent is close to
Reagent Management menu. (Unit:1,2,3,4) expiration.
Details to determine which bottle of
reagent is expiring.
2. Replace the bottle of expiring reagent
with a new reagent bottle.
Remaining samples for the index become Less than 3,000 Create a new index in the Start Condition
less than 3000. Please create a new index. samples can be screen.
processed in the
current index.
S Probe Wash Sol. Short. Please perform The 2% Wash Solution
1. Replace the 2% Wash Solution in the
reagent check. (Unit:1,2,3,4) in the sample probe
wash solution bottle is sample probe wash solution bottle.
insufficient. 2. Perform a reagent check.
Temperature of the incubator bath is over The temperature of Confirm that the cover is on the cuvette
(under) the normal range. (Unit:1,2,3,4) the cuvette wheel is wheel. If the problem continues, contact
out of specification. Beckman Coulter.
Temperature of the refrigerator is over The reagent Confirm that the cover is on the reagent
(under) the normal range. (Unit:1,2,3,4) refrigerator refrigerator. If the problem continues, contact
temperature is out of Beckman Coulter.
specification.
Test has no Calibration Data. Please open No calibration data
Calibration Requisition and requisition the exists or calibration
test. (Unit:1,2,3,4) analysis failed. calibration in the Calibration screen.
Test has no RB Data. Please open No reagent blank data

Calibration Requisition menu and exists or reagent blank
requisition the test. (Unit:1,2,3,4) analysis failed. calibration in the Calibration screen.
A98352AC 8-9
Error Messages
Error Messages

Test(s) are set as “Disabled” in Start One or more tests are
Condition. (Unit:1,2,3,4) programmed to
disabled (unavailable)
in the Start Condition
screen. The disabled
(unavailable) test is
not analyzed for any
patient samples.
The lane error found. Please check the lane. An error occurred on
1. Identify the lane where the error occurred
(Unit No.) the primary sample
transport lane, bypass in the Analyzer Status screen.
lane, or return lane. 2. When analysis is complete, remove racks
from the primary sample transport lane,
bypass lane, or return lane.
3. Select Stop/Standby. The system
displays the Warmup/Standby dialog with
a Reset Analyzer and Transfer
to Standby mode? message.
4. Select OK. The system initializes, then
goes to Standby mode.
The printer is currently in use. Batch print or real- Review the printer status in the Analyzer
time print is being Status screen.
performed in Standby
mode.
The volume has reached the Alarm volume. The remaining reagent
Please perform reagent check. (Unit: shots (tests) have
1,2,3,4) reached the Alarm Details to determine which bottle is
Shots programmed in running short of reagent.
Parameters > Common 2. Add a new reagent bottle.
Test Parameters.
There is an illegal rack on the rack transfer During the inspection Remove the rack(s) on the rack unloader unit.
unit. process after Start is
selected, a rack was
detected on the rack
unloader unit that
connects to the
laboratory automation
system.
8-10 A98352AC
8
Error Messages
Error Messages

Wash Sol. Overflow. Please check the tank. Overflow of wash
1. Confirm that the wash solution float
(Unit:1,2,3,4) solution.
sensor connector is plugged in correctly. If
it is not connected correctly, plug in the
connector.
2. If no abnormality is found in the system,
Wash Solution short. (Unit:1,2,3,4) The wash solution in

1. Confirm that the wash solution float
the wash solution tank
on the analyzer unit is sensor connector is plugged in correctly. If
insufficient. it is not connected correctly, plug in the
connector.
2. Inspect the liquid level in the wash
solution tank (analyzer unit) and master
wash solution tank (rack feeder unit).
— If the liquid level in the wash solution

tank (analyzer unit) is sufficient,
— If the liquid level in the wash solution
tank (analyzer unit) is insufficient:

master wash solution tank (rack
feeder unit). If the wash
solution in the master wash
solution tank is insufficient,
replenish the wash solution.
Refer to Replenish the Wash
Solution. If the level in the
master wash solution tank is
sufficient, contact Beckman
Coulter.
Waste tank is full. (Unit:1,2,3,4) The waste tank is full Contact Beckman Coulter.
of liquid waste.
A98352AC 8-11
Error Messages
Error Messages
8-12 A98352AC
CHAPTER 9
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Regular preventative maintenance is essential for optimum system performance. Many
problems outlined in this chapter are caused by neglecting to perform preventative
maintenance and required care.
For each aspect of troubleshooting, you can find useful information by referring to the
corresponding section of the maintenance chapter.
For more information, refer to Maintenance.
Reagent Blank Data
1 Review printout and look for any flags.

2 Review the Alarm List for RB Data Error alarms.
3 A reagent blank is a confirmation of the reagent system.

The reagent system includes reagents, the reagent probes, and the reagent syringes.
4 Review reagent blank data in Menu List > Calibration > Calibration Monitor > RB History
and RB Detail.
Calibration Data
1 Review the Alarm List for any calibration alarms.
2 Review the printout.

3 Look at the precision of the replicates for each test.
The OD readings should have a similar value.
4 Look for separation between calibrators for a multi-point calibration.

5 Calibration is a confirmation of the sampling system.
The sampling system includes calibrators, the sample probes, the sample syringes, and
the wash syringes.
6 If calibration replicates are 0 or close to 0, the problem can be:
A98352AC 9-1
Troubleshooting
QC Data
— Wrong calibrator used

— Sample did not dispense into cuvette (probe or syringe problem)
— Reagent
7 Review calibration data in Menu List > Calibration > Calibration Monitor > Calibration
History and Calibration Detail.
QC Data
1 Review the Alarm List for QC alarms.
2 Review the printout for QC flags 1Q to 7Q.

3 Review the daily QC charts:
— QC validates calibration.
— If all QC is increasing or decreasing (one direction only), the QC problem can be
related to the calibration factor and indicates calibration problems.
— If you perform QC on multiple tests from the same QC sample, but QC is only out of
range for a specific test, confirm the QC test parameters, reagent, and calibration.
— If tests from only one level of QC are out of range, confirm that you put the correct
QC sample into the cup.
4 Repeat with fresh QC samples.
Troubleshooting Reagents, Calibrators, Quality Control, and Samples.
Reagent Blank Issues and Corrective Actions

• Inspect the reagent system including the reagents, reagent probes, and reagent
syringes. For more information, refer to Reagent Blank Corrective Actions.
• Review the printout and look for flags.
— Flag u or y if the RB data of the first read point of the test fails.
— Flag U or Y if the RB data of the last read point of the test fails.
— Limits are programmed in Menu List > Parameters > Specific Test Parameters >
General.
— Review the Alarm List for RB Data Error alarms that the system generates if the
reagent blank fails.
Reagent Blank Corrective Actions

• Reagent
— Inspect the reagent expiration date.
— Inspect the reagent on-board expiration date.
— Confirm the correct reagent preparation.
9-2 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
— Confirm that fixed reagents are in the correct position.

— Put on a new bottle of reagent and perform a reagent blank or calibration.
— Confirm that a bar code labeled reagent is not in a position fixed for a different
test.
• Reagent Probes
— Inspect the reagent probes. For more information, refer to Inspect, Clean, and
Prime the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars.
— Clean the reagent probes. For more information, refer to Clean the R1 or R2
Reagent Probes.
— Clean the reagent probe wash wells. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Wells.
— Replace the reagent probes. For more information, refer to Replace a Reagent
Probe.
• Reagent Syringes
— Inspect the reagent syringes. For more information, refer to Inspect the Syringes
for Leaks.
— Replace the reagent syringes. For more information, refer to Replace the Sample,
Reagent, ISE Sample, or ISE Buffer Syringe.
Calibration Issues and Corrective Actions

• Inspect the sampling system including the calibrators, the sample probes, the sample
syringes, and the wash syringes. For more information, refer to Calibration Corrective
Actions.
• Review the Alarm List and printout:
— If the calibration factor range programmed in Parameters > Calibration >
Calibration Specific is exceeded, the system generates Calibration Factor
High/Low and Calibration Error alarms.
— Inspect for precision of the OD replicates on the printout.
— Confirm that the calibrator OD is not almost zero, indicating a possible calibrator
aspiration or dispense issue.
Calibration Corrective Actions

• Calibrator
— Confirm that the correct calibrator was poured for the calibration.
— Confirm the integrity of the calibrator: preparation (if required), expiration date,
open-bottle stability, time at room temperature, and contamination.
— Confirm that the calibrator is in the correct position in the yellow rack.
— Confirm that the calibrator lot number in use and lot number concentration
programmed in Parameters > Calibration > Calibration Specific are the same.
• Sample Probe
— Inspect the sample probe. For more information, refer to Inspect, Clean, and Prime
the Sample Probes, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars.
— Clean the sample probe. For more information, refer to Clean the Sample Probes
and Mix Bars.
— Clean the sample probe wash wells. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Wells.
A98352AC 9-3
Troubleshooting
— Replace the sample probe. For more information, refer to Replace a Sample Probe.
• Sample Syringe and Wash Syringe
— Inspect the sample syringe and wash syringe. For more information, refer to
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks.
— Replace the sample syringe and wash syringe. For more information, refer to
Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE Sample, or ISE Buffer Syringe.
QC Related Issues and Corrective Actions

• Perform QC on the system to validate the calibration. Inspect for a reagent, calibration,
or QC issue. For more information, refer to Corrective Actions.
— Reagent problem
— Calibrator problem
— QC problem
• Review the Alarm List and printout:
— The system generates a QC [test name] over or under alarm if the QC range
programmed in Parameters > QC Parameters > QC Specific is exceeded.
— Review the printout for QC flags 1Q to 7Q.
Corrective Actions
• Review all Reagent Blank Issues and Corrective Actions.
• Review all Calibration Issues and Corrective Actions.
• Confirm the QC Sample:
— Confirm that the correct QC sample was poured for the QC analysis.
— Confirm the integrity of the QC sample: preparation (if required), expiration date,
open-bottle stability, time at room temperature, and contamination.
— Confirm that the QC sample was placed in the correct position in the green rack.
— Confirm that the lot number of the QC sample is in use and range programmed in
Parameters > QC Parameters > QC Specific are correct.
— Repeat with fresh QC samples.
Sample Related Issues

The following two items cause most data problems:
• Sample evaporation - Sample evaporation can cause unusually high results. Store
samples correctly, and keep sample caps closed tightly if they need to be stored for a
short period before analysis.
• Incorrect sample handling - Refer to the relevant Instructions for Use supplied with
reagents to find the correct procedures for sample collection, handling, and storage.
Note the following sample requirements:
• This system analyzes serum, urine, and other fluids. If problems are encountered when
analyzing a specific test, or when using a specific reagent, refer to the relevant reagent
IFU or contact Beckman Coulter.
9-4 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
• Use serum or plasma that is adequately separated from cells, and urine that is free of
suspended matter, to prevent the sample probe from becoming blocked, and adversely
affecting analysis.
• Confirm that blood samples are sufficiently coagulated before serum separation.
Remove any suspended fibrin before placing serum on the system.
• If there is any suspended matter present in urine to be tested, centrifuge the sample
before testing.
• If a sample requires pretreatment depending on the analysis test, refer to the relevant
reagent IFU.
• A minimum quantity of sample is required for analysis. Confirm that a sufficient
quantity of sample is available for analysis. For more information, refer to Sample
Preparation.
• To prevent sample evaporation, do not leave samples uncovered for an extended time.
Evaporation can cause biased results being observed.
• Bubbles on the surface of samples, QC, and calibrators can cause level sensing
problems or erroneous results. Confirm that all bubbles are removed from the surface
of the sample before placing onto the system.
• Confirm that the sample cups and racks are set correctly. For more information, refer
to Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in the Rack.
• Inspect the serum for the extent of hemolysis, lipemia, bilirubin, and other sample
quality issues according to your laboratory procedure.
• If the sample has evaporated or deteriorated, or if the QC sample was incorrectly
prepared, obtain a new sample or correctly prepare the QC sample and repeat analysis.
Wash Solution Related Issues

Wash solution is the only approved detergent for use on the system. Inspect the following if
the wash solution causes data problems.
• If wash solution is not in the master wash solution tank under the rack feeder unit,
refer to Replenish the Wash Solution.
• Confirm that the handle on the diluted wash solution tank in each analyzer unit is in
the open position. Refer to Inspect the Handle on the Diluted Wash Solution Tank is in
the Open Position.
• Inspect the diluted wash solution tank in each analyzer unit. If the tank is dirty or the
diluted wash solution does not seem like it is being used on the system, contact
Beckman Coulter.
Deionized Water Related Issues

Inspect the following if the deionized water causes data problems:
• Confirm if the deionized water supply system needs servicing for the deionized water
quality.
• If the deionized water tank is contaminated, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
• If the deionized water filter is dirty, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
A98352AC 9-5
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
Items in Common on the AU5800 that can Aid in Troubleshooting

If you do not perform scheduled maintenance or maintenance is overdue, abnormal data
can result. Perform all scheduled maintenance along with regular preventative
maintenance. For more information, refer to Maintenance.
• Determine if analysis on the inner or outer cuvettes affected the tests.
— If the affected tests are analyzed from both the inner and outer cuvettes on the
cuvette wheel, inspect the lamp on the analyzer unit. For more information, refer
to Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or Photometer Component.
— If the affected tests are analyzed from either the inner or outer cuvettes on the
cuvette wheel, inspect the sample probes, reagent probes, syringes, mix bars, and
wash nozzles used for the inner or outer cuvette positions that affected the tests.
• Incoming water quality (purity, temperature, and conductivity) and ambient air
temperature and humidity can affect the analysis results. For more information, refer
to System Specifications or contact Beckman Coulter.
• This system uses the specific sample probe, reagent probe, and cuvettes supplied by
Beckman Coulter. Use only genuine Beckman Coulter parts.
• If a mosquito coil or insecticides are close to the system, it can affect the cholinesterase
(CHE). If you experience an abnormality, replace the sample cups, reagents, and
reagent bottles. Clean the sample probes, reagent probes, mix bars, and cuvettes. For
more information, refer to Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars, Clean the R1 or R2
Reagent Probes, and Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wedges.
Mechanical Problems
Syringe Problems
Inspect for:
• Water leaking at syringes: Tighten the case body and the case head of the sample and
reagent syringes.
Also, confirm that there is no damage to sample and reagent syringes, and the abrasion
status of pistons. For more information, refer to Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE
• Bubbles in the tubing connected to the syringe: Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance.
Then select Prime Washing-line and press the DIAG button to start removing air from
the tubing. For more information, refer to Replace the Sample, Reagent, ISE Sample, or
ISE Buffer Syringe.
• General Syringe Troubleshooting:
— Confirm that the top and bottom screws are tightened.
— Confirm that the bottom screw is finger tight against the piston. Over-tightening
damages the syringe.
— Confirm that there is a smooth resistant pull.
— Confirm that the correct size syringe (sample or reagent) is in the correct position.
— Confirm that only one O-ring is being used and that it is not flattened or damaged.
— Confirm that the syringe is installed on the system correctly.
— Inspect the tubing connected to the syringe head for scratches, bending, or leaks.
9-6 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
— Confirm that the creases in the fluorocarbon polymer tip of the syringe do not
have any buildup or flaking of the fluorocarbon polymer tip.
— Confirm that the probes are not blocked. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probes and Mix Bars and Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes. If the probes
are blocked, syringe operation is affected.
Probe Problems
Inspect for:
• General Probe Troubleshooting:
— Confirm that water dispenses in a straight stream.
— Confirm that the metal screw cap for the probe connection is tight.
— Confirm that the probe tubing does not have bubbles.
• The reagent or sample probe is leaking from loose probe connectors: Tighten the
probe connectors. Confirm that the tubing is firmly connected.
• The reagent or sample probe is blocked: For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probes and Mix Bars and Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes.
• The reagent or sample probe is bent or damaged: Replace the probe. For more
information, refer to Replace a Sample Probe or Replace a Reagent Probe.
• The sample aspiration position of the sample probe is incorrect: The sample probe
moves down to aspirate sample. The maximum distance the probe can move
downward is defined in the system software, but a service engineer can change the
programming. If the sample probe downward distance is programmed incorrectly, the
probe might hit the bottom of the sample cup or tube. Contact Beckman Coulter.
• The reagent probe is not aligned over the refrigerator: If the R1 or R2 reagent probe is
hitting the reagent bottle or refrigerator cover, examine the reagent probes for
abnormalities. If the probe is bent, replace it. For more information, refer to Replace a
Reagent Probe. If the probe is not bent, and the reagent aspiration position is still not
correct, contact Beckman Coulter.
• The sample probe or reagent probe is not aligned over the cuvette: If the sample probe
or reagent probe is contacting the cuvettes, examine the sample probe or reagent
probe for abnormalities. If a probe is bent, replace it. For more information, refer to
Replace a Sample Probe or Replace a Reagent Probe. If the probe is not bent but still
not aligned correctly, contact Beckman Coulter.
• Abnormal wash position of the reagent probe and sample probe: If the probe is hitting
the wash well, examine the probe. If a probe is bent, replace it. For more information,
refer to Replace a Sample Probe or Replace a Reagent Probe. If the probe is not bent,
but the probe wash position is still abnormal, contact Beckman Coulter.
• Basic troubleshooting for the reagent transfer components and sample transfer
component: Confirm that no drops remain on the path of the transfer component. If
drops are on the path of the sample or reagent transfer component, contact Beckman
Coulter.
• The sample contains a significant amount of fibrin and protein.
— Remove fibrin or filter the sample.
— Inspect whether any other contaminant is mixed in the sample.
— Remove any clots from the sample probe. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probes and Mix Bars.
A98352AC 9-7
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
Abnormal Data Caused by Cuvette Wheel (Cuvette Wedge) or Wash Nozzles

• Scratches, fingerprints, stains, or foreign matter on the cuvettes: Clean the cuvettes. If
abnormal data is not corrected after cleaning, replace the cuvettes with new ones. For
more information, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wedges or Clean or
Replace Individual Cuvettes.
• The outside of the cuvette or the cuvette wheel (cuvette wedge) is wet or flooded:
Inspect the wash nozzle joints on the wash nozzle and tighten if they are loose. The
wash nozzles can clog. Clean the wash nozzles.
— For more information on how to clean the wash nozzles, refer to Clean the Wash
— Clean any cuvettes and the cuvette wheel where it is wet. For more information,
• The deionized water or wash solution is dripping from the wash nozzles: Inspect the
wash nozzle joints on the wash nozzles and tighten if they are loose. The wash nozzles
can clog. Clean the wash nozzles. For more information, refer to Clean the Wash Nozzle
Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints.
• After washing the cuvettes, a large amount of water remains in the cuvettes: Inspect
the wash nozzle joints on the wash nozzles and tighten if they are loose. The wash
nozzles can clog. Clean the wash nozzles.
— For more information on how to clean the wash nozzles, refer to Clean the Wash
— Remove the excess water from inside the cuvettes, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and
the Cuvette Wedges.
• The tube in the wash solution tank floats: Straighten the tube, then insert it toward the
tank bottom so that it does not contact the tank opening.
• The system has trouble with the float sensor in the wash solution tank or the diluted
wash solution tank: Connect the float sensor connector firmly, and move the float
sensor and tube in the tank so that they do not contact each other. If these changes do
not correct the problem, contact Beckman Coulter to replace the float sensor.
• Some cuvettes are contaminated with foreign matter: Clean the cuvettes. If abnormal
data is not corrected after cleaning the cuvettes or if any cuvettes are broken, replace
those cuvettes. For more information, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette
Wedges or Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes.
• The cuvette wheel was removed from the analyzer for an extended time, then placed
on the analyzer: Do not use the analyzer immediately. It is necessary to leave the
cuvette wheel in the dry bath incubator for a minimum of an hour for the cuvettes to
stabilize to temperature specifications of 37 °C ± 0.3 °C.
Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or Photometer Component

• The quality of the photometer lamp has deteriorated: Inspect the record of photocal
measurement results for abnormal data. If there is abnormal data, replace the
photometer lamp.
— For more information on the photocal measurement result record, refer to
Perform a Photocal.
— For more information on replacing the Photometer Lamp, refer to Replace the
Photometer Lamp.
• The photometer lamp is not stable: Perform the photocal measurement twice to
confirm the difference between two sets of measurement data. If there is a significant
9-8 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
difference between the measurements, the photometer lamp can be defective. Replace
the lamp. For more information, refer to Replace the Photometer Lamp.
Mixing Problems
• The mix bars are contaminated: Clean the mix bars. For more information, refer to
Clean the Sample Probes and Mix Bars.
• The fluororesin coating on the mix bars is chipped: Replace the mix bars. For more
information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
• The mix bar component malfunctions, and there is abnormal noise from the system
during the mixing motion: If there is an audible abnormal noise coming from the mix
bar component, inspect for bent mix bars. If the mix bar is bent, replace the mix bar.
For more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars. If the mix bars are not bent,
• The wash water and wash solution are not correctly drained from the mix bar wash
wells: Contact Beckman Coulter.
• The mix bars are not positioned correctly causing contact between the mix bars and
the mix bar wash well or the cuvettes: If the mix bar is bent, replace the mix bar. For
more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars. If the mix bar is not bent, contact
Beckman Coulter.
• The mix bars are not correctly installed on the mix bar component, causing insufficient
mixing of the sample and reagents: Install the mix bars correctly. For more
information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
Deionized Water Tank Problems

• The deionized water tank is contaminated or dirty: If there are indications of
particulate contamination on the interior of the tank, clean the tank thoroughly. For
more information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter,
and Sample Probe Filter.
• Residual sodium hypochlorite solution remains in the deionized water tank after
cleaning: Clean the tank again and rinse thoroughly with deionized water. For more
information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Sample Probe Filter.
Deionized Water or Filter Problems

Confirm the water quality by assessing the following:
• Deionized water supply: Determine if the water supply meets the required
specifications. For more information, refer to Table A.90 Water Supply.
• Dirty, stained or blocked filters: Clean the deionized water filter and the sample probe
filter. Replace filters if data continues to be abnormal after cleaning. For more
information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Sample Probe Filter and Inspect and, if Needed, Replace the Deionized Water Filter,
Sample Probe Filter, and Replace the O-ring.
• Tap water below 5 °C used: The water supply to the deionizer must be above 5 °C. For
more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
A98352AC 9-9
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
Incubation Temperature Problems

• Confirm that there is adequate space surrounding the system for air to circulate
effectively. Confirm that this space meets Beckman Coulter recommendations. For
more information, refer to System Specifications.
• Do not fill adjoining space around analyzers with boxes or other equipment. Space left
at installation is required for correct air circulation.
• Clean the air filters. For more information, refer to Clean the Air Filters.
• Confirm that the room temperature is between 18 °C and 32 °C, and the acceptable
range of temperature fluctuation is within 4 °C during analysis. Failure to regulate
room temperature causes more required calibration events.
• If the cuvette wheel was removed from the analyzer for an extended time, then placed
on the analyzer, do not use the analyzer immediately. It is necessary to leave the
cuvette wheel in the dry bath incubator for a minimum of an hour for the cuvettes to
stabilize to temperature specifications of 37 °C ± 0.3 °C.
Tubing and Pump Problems

The filters are dirty or clogged: Clean the deionized water filter and the sample probe filter.
If abnormal data is not corrected after cleaning filters, replace the filters.
• For more information on how to clean the deionized water filter, refer to Clean the
Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
• For more information on how to clean the sample probe filter, refer to Clean the
Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
• For more information on how to replace the deionized water filter, refer to Inspect
and, if Needed, Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and Replace
the O-ring.
• For more information on how to replace the sample probe filter, refer to Inspect and, if
Needed, Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and Replace the O-
ring.
Reagent Refrigerator Problems

If the reagent refrigerator temperature is out of range:
1 Select Home > Analyzer Status and inspect the coolant temperature for the reagent
refrigerator.
2 Open the reagent refrigerator and confirm that the reagent bottles are cool.
3 If the problem persists, contact Beckman Coulter.
Rack Problems
Inspect for the following general problems:
• Confirm that the rack is clean and that the surface is not sticky. Refer to Clean the Rack.
• Inspect bar code label positioning.
— For more information on attaching the bar code label to the sample rack, refer to
the AU5800 Reference Manual.
9-10 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
System Problems
— For more information on placing the sample cups or tubes in the rack, refer to
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in a Rack.
• Confirm that the rack was loaded correctly.
For more information on loading racks, refer to Placing a Rack on the Rack Input Tray.
• Confirm that the correct number of magnets are in the bottom of the rack. Compare the
configuration of magnets on the underside of the rack with the magnets on another
rack of the same color. The configuration for the two racks should be identical. Discard
the rack if a magnet is missing.
• If a rack jam occurs, refer to Rack Jams.
Figure 9.1 Rack Magnet Positions
1. Magnets in rack positions 1, 2, or 3

(to the right of the arrow)
Table 9.1 Magnets in Rack Positions 1, 2 or 3
Rack Color Magnet Position (1 to 3)
White Position 1
Yellow Positions 1 and 2
Green Position 3
Orange Positions 1, 2, and 3
Red Position 2
Blue Positions 1 and 3
System Problems
A98352AC 9-11
Troubleshooting
System Problems
Alarm for Reagent Refrigerator Temp

• If there is a problem with the reagent refrigerator, confirm that there is adequate
space surrounding the system for air to circulate effectively. For more information on
installation environment precautions, refer to System Specifications.
• Confirm that the room temperature is from 18 °C to 32 °C. If the room temperature is
over 32 °C, the reagent refrigerator temperature is over 12 °C. If the problem persists,
Abnormal Sound from Inside the System

• Air bubbles trapped in the tubing: Inspect the deionized water filter. If the filter is
damaged, replace it. Inspect the sample probe filter for placement of the filter. For
correct positioning of the filter, refer to Figure 9.2 Sample Probe Filter Replacement.
Figure 9.2 Sample Probe Filter Replacement
• Deionized water tank empty alarm: The ion-exchange capability of the deionizer can
be insufficient. Replace the deionizer if it does not meet required specifications.
Inspect the deionized water filter. If it has become dirty or blocked, clean or replace it.
— For more information on cleaning the Deionized Water Filter and the Sample
Probe Filter, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Sample Probe Filter.
— For more information on replacing the Deionized Water Filter and the Sample
Probe Filter, refer to Inspect and, if Needed, Replace the Deionized Water Filter,
Sample Probe Filter, and Replace the O-ring.
• For all other sources of noise, contact Beckman Coulter.
Alarm for Deionized Water

• The deionizer is turned off: Turn on the deionizer. Shut down the system (End
Process), and then turn on the system.
• The ion exchange capability of the deionizer is insufficient: Confirm that the deionizer
meets specifications. If the deionizer does not meet the specification, replace it. For
detailed information, consult the deionizer manufacturer.
• The deionized water filter is clogged: Use your finger to determine if the deionized
water filter is slimy. If the filter surface is slimy, the filter can be clogged. Clean the
deionized water filter. For more information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
9-12 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
System Problems
Bar Code Label Errors

• Reagent bar code reader dirty: Wipe the bar code reader window with a clean,
deionized water dampened, lint-free absorbent tissue to remove any particles on the
read window. If necessary, follow up with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue to dry
the reader so there are no smear marks left to cause errors.
• Bar code labels on sample tubes or racks are damaged and discolored: Replace any
sample or rack bar code labels that are worn or damaged. For labels on sample cups,
refer to Apply Bar Code Labels to Sample Tubes in the AU5800 Reference Manual. For
labels on racks, refer to Replace Rack ID Labels.
• Bar code labels on reagent bottles are damaged: If the reagent ID is damaged, the
operator can edit the reagent ID and still use the bottle of reagent. For more
information, refer to Edit a Reagent ID.
WARNING
Never look directly into the bar code readers. The laser light can cause serious eye
damage.
Leaks from the Bottom of the System

• Wash line obstructed: Inspect for obstructions in the wash wells for the sample probe
and reagent probes. Clean the wells if any obstructions exist. For more information,
refer to Clean the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Wells.
• Waste line not installed correctly: If the waste line is leaking or if the tubing is too long,
• Any leaks from the bottom of the analyzer are potentially dangerous: If the source is
not clearly visible (for example a leaking syringe), contact Beckman Coulter.
No Wash Solution to Mix Bar Wash Wells

• The deionized water filter can be clogged. Confirm the last time the deionized water
tank and filter were cleaned.
• After performing maintenance on the sample probe filter and/or deionized water tank,
confirm that the grey quick disconnects are installed correctly. You should hear a
distinct click.
• Determine if the interior of the deionized water tank has slick or slimy buildup by
sliding your gloved hand on the gray float sensor in the bottle or the side of the tank.
This buildup can cause the deionized water and sample probe filters to become
clogged. Clean both the deionized water and sample probe filters, and the deionized
water tank.
Refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe
Filter.
Reagent Alarm when Sufficient Reagent Remains in Bottles

The liquid level sensor could be faulty. Select Alarm List for the cause and corrective actions.
• Inspect the reagent bottle for bubbles that occur from replacing reagents or for a bottle
that is not correctly placed in the reagent refrigerator. Refer to Replace the Reagents
and Add Adapters to the Reagent Tray.
A98352AC 9-13
Troubleshooting
System Problems
• Perform a reagent check to confirm that the alarm is still occurring.

• Contact Beckman Coulter.
Sample Alarm when Sufficient Sample Remains

When there is a sample alarm and sufficient sample remains, there is a possibility that the
sample probe did not move down to the liquid level of the sample. Refer to Sample
Preparation. Incorrect detection of the height of the cup can cause this error. Confirm that
the correct tube or cup is used and placed correctly in the rack. Inspect for bubbles in the
sample cup. If an error still occurs, contact Beckman Coulter. For more information, refer to
the AU5800 Reference Manual.
No Sample Cup Alarm when Sample Cup is in the Rack

Unspecified cup used: Confirm that the specified sample cups are in each rack. For more
information, refer to Cups or Tubes Specifications.
Liquid Leaking from the Reagent Probe or Sample Probe

Confirm that the reagent probe or sample probe is installed correctly:
1 Confirm that the probe connectors are tight.

buttons.
4 Select Prime Washing Line. Make a unit selection (or leave default) and then select OK.
5 Press the DIAG button to dispense water from the reagent probe and sample probe. If
the deionized water does not dispense normally, a reagent probe or sample probe
might be incorrectly installed. Inspect the reagent probe or sample probe installation. If
it is necessary to replace the probe, refer to Replace a Sample Probe or Replace a
Reagent Probe.
Reagent Probe or Sample Probe not Aligned over the Cuvette

Inspect if the reagent probe or sample probe is bent: Examine the probe and replace it if it
is bent. For more information, refer to Replace a Sample Probe or Replace a Reagent Probe.
If the probe is not bent but still aligned incorrectly, contact Beckman Coulter.
Flag [#] (Sample Level Detection Error) Generated during the Sample Dispense Operation
Determine if the sample volume is too low: Confirm that there is sufficient sample for the
ordered (requisitioned) tests. Consider the dead volume for the different cups. For more
information, refer to Cups or Tubes Specifications.
9-14 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
Data Processor Problems
TEMP DIL Alarm for the Wash Water Heater

The water temperature is not within the specified range. Contact Beckman Coulter for
assistance.
Rack Jams
Inspect for:
• Contamination on the rack: Confirm that nothing has fallen onto the rack and that the
rack ID bar code label, or sample ID bar code labels have not peeled off, causing the
rack to jam. Refer to Rack Problems.
• Confirm that the rack tray is clean and not sticky. If it is dirty or sticky, clean the rack
tray. Refer to Clean the Rack Tray.
• Confirm that the rack transfer lanes are clean and not sticky. If dirty or sticky, clean the
rack transfer lanes. Refer to Clean the Rack Transfer Lanes.
• Object attaching to the magnet on the bottom of a rack: Inspect for small metal objects
such as staples or paper clips on the magnets on the bottom of a rack. If foreign matter
attaches to the magnet, remove it from the magnet.
Printer Problems
Refer to the printer manual for assistance with all printer troubleshooting.
• Printer is disconnected. Inspect the plug and socket and connecting lead.
• The power to the printer is not turned on. Confirm that the power to the printer is
turned on.
• Printer toner is empty and requires replacement.
• Confirm that the online button is on.
• Confirm that paper is loaded correctly.
Menu Cannot be Selected

• Function is inaccessible: Menu items which are not available are inaccessible because
of the programmed settings.
• System software crashes, to reset the system:
— Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete together.
— Select Shutdown, and then OK.
— After the PC shuts down, press EM STOP and wait 5 seconds before pressing
RESET, and then wait another 5 seconds before pressing ON.
— The software and analyzer synchronize and load at the same time.
— The system displays the System Start dialog with a Program Down Load to
Analyzer message.
— The System Start dialog displays a message to confirm database retrieval. Select
OK.
— The system displays a New Index dialog prompting the operator to create a new
index. If the operator wants to remain in the current index, select Index. If a new
index is necessary, select New Index.
A98352AC 9-15
Troubleshooting
— The analyzer goes into Warm up mode for 90 minutes. If the analyzer has been
down longer than 5 minutes, then allow the 20-minute warm up. The operator can
then select Home > Analyzer Maintenance, and select Stand By (F4). The analyzer
bypasses Warm up to Standby.
TIP
The incubator remains red in the Analyzer Status screen until the
temperature returns to 37 °C ± 0.3 °C.
• If you are unable to recover from a software crash, contact Beckman Coulter.
Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work

Num Lock is not selected: Press the Num Lock key and then confirm that the LED light over
Num Lock on the keyboard is on.
Keyboard Not Responding

Possible causes:
• Keyboard cable: Confirm that the cable connector is in the correct socket in the back of
the computer (color-coded).
• System crash: For more information, refer to Menu Cannot be Selected.
• System busy: The system might be saving data or performing a series of tasks
simultaneously. Wait for a few minutes until the system is ready. If this error occurs
frequently, contact Beckman Coulter.
• Data processing, such as data saving, is executing: Wait until data processing is
complete.
• Electrical Noise: If you hear a buzzing noise, unplug the keyboard and then firmly plug
in the cable connector.
Results Do Not Print Automatically

Inspect for:
• Realtime output is not set: Set the realtime output of reports from Menu List > System
> Format > List Format > Basic Condition, select Edit (F1), and then select Realtime List
(F5).
• Printer is not available during analysis (out of paper, printer is turned off, or the
printer is offline): Turn on the printer, confirm that the printer is online, and add paper
as needed.
— Select Home > Analyzer Status.
— Select Printer Control (F5).
— Select Resume to start printing the analyzed data.
Online Auto-Output by Laboratory Information System Not Executed

Inspect for:
9-16 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
Recovering from an Emergency Stop or Power Loss
• Interface cable to the laboratory information system disconnected: Connect the cable.
• Interface cable defective: Contact Beckman Coulter.
• Laboratory information system I/O settings incorrectly modified: Set the correct I/O
settings in System > Online.
Recovering from an Emergency Stop or Power Loss

If there is a power failure or an emergency stop, the main power is turned off immediately.
Power to the incubator and reagent refrigerator is also turned off.
CAUTION
If an emergency stop or power failure occurs during Measure mode, any data that is
not complete is lost and you must reanalyze the samples.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
If the system is without power for a lengthy time after a power loss or an emergency
stop, inspect the reagent integrity before resuming analysis.

An emergency stop turns off power immediately to the analyzer and ISE unit.
1 Press the EM STOP button. All power to the analyzer and ISE unit turns off immediately.
The computer remains on. To turn off the computer, press [Ctrl] + [ALT] + [Delete]. The
computer displays a Windows Security dialog. Select Shut Down.
2 Remove all racks from the rack lanes.
Return to Standby Mode After an Emergency Stop
database.
A98352AC 9-17
Troubleshooting
RTWB Troubleshooting Overview Flowchart
3 Select OK.
4 In the New Index dialog, select Current Index to continue analysis in the current index.
5 The system is in Warm up mode for 1.5 hours. After the required 20-minute lamp warm
up time, wait until the temperature of the cuvette wheel is 37 °C, and then select Home
> Analyzer Maintenance. Select Stand By (F4) to return to Standby mode.

The flowchart shows an overview of errors and corrective actions for monitoring the
automatic RTWB check function while the system is in operation.
9-18 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
Figure 9.3 RTWB Troubleshooting Overview Flowchart
A98352AC 9-19
Troubleshooting
Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Alarm
Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Alarm

Inspect the cuvettes to determine if a cuvette overflow occurred when the system
generated a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash alarm. The recovery
procedures are different if a cuvette overflow occurred, or if unstable photometry caused
the error.
The analyzer goes to Stop mode immediately after the system generates a Photometry
Error During a Cuvette Wash alarm.
Inspect the Cuvettes to Determine if an Overflow Occurred

To confirm that a cuvette overflow has occurred, remove the cuvette wheel cover after
initializing system. The cuvettes are frosty or white. If the cuvettes are dark, black, or are
wet when removed, a cuvette overflow has occurred. In addition, remove the cuvette
number identified in the Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash alarm.
WARNING
overflow can spread over both the inner and outer cuvettes. Inspect both the inner
and outer cuvettes.
NOTE
Photometric Error During Cuvette Wash (A,B,C) [unit x]
A, B: Cuvette numbers with a photometric error. There is a 41 cuvette number interval

because the RTWB check is performed every 41 cuvettes. If the error is detected on
two successive cuvettes, the Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash alarm is
generated.
C: 1 indicates the inner cuvettes on the cuvette wheel. 2 indicates the outer cuvettes
on the cuvette wheel.
X: Unit number with a photometric error.
Visually inspect the cuvette to determine if it is wet. If the cuvette is wet on the outside,
refer to Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow and perform all system recovery
procedures. If the cuvette is not wet on the outside, refer to Recovering from an Unstable
Photometry Error and perform the required system recovery procedures determined by
the cause of the error.
For more information on how to remove the cuvette wheel, refer to Clean the Cuvettes,
Cuvette Wedges, and Cuvette Wheel after an Overflow.
9-20 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting

The following procedure explains what can cause an overflow and how to recognize and
recover from a cuvette wheel overflow.
Performing scheduled maintenance reduces the chances of a cuvette wheel overflow. For
more information about maintenance for each system component, refer to Maintenance.
Overflow Causes
The following can cause a cuvette wheel overflow:
• A wash nozzle is clogged or partially clogged. When the wash nozzle is clogged, liquid
is not aspirated from the cuvette completely and eventually liquid spills over the side.
A clogged wash nozzle can occur when the wash nozzles are not cleaned correctly, or
when particles such as glass are aspirated into the nozzle.
• A wash nozzle is bent or damaged.
• Damaged or missing O-rings inside the water supply tube mounting joint.
• The reagent probe is bent. A bent probe could be dispensing outside of the cuvette.
• The sample probe is bent. A bent probe could be dispensing outside of the cuvette.
• Cuvettes are chipped or cracked caused by alignment problems with the reagent
probes or wash nozzles.
• The wash nozzle tubing is not connected to the nozzle.
Recognizing an Overflow
The system generates a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash alarm. The
overflow could have occurred 60 minutes before the system generated the alarm. Results
obtained during the 60 minutes before the alarm are invalid and need reanalysis. The 60-
minute timeframe is the time the analyzer was in Measure mode. For detailed instructions,
refer to Identifying and Reanalyzing Samples after a Cuvette Overflow.
The flags *, ?, @, $, D, B, and ! can indicate a cuvette wheel overflow. The data, alarms, or
flags vary depending on the severity of the overflow. An overflow can affect one or all tests.
Items to inspect:
• QC flags or alarms
• Reagent blank flags
• Analyzer not performing as normal operation
• Numerous cuvettes fail after a photocal
Lift the cuvette wheel cover. The cuvettes are frosty or white. If they are dark, black, or wet
when removed, the cuvette wheel has overflowed.
A98352AC 9-21
Troubleshooting
Recovering from an Unstable Photometry Error
Items to Confirm when Recovering from an Overflow
WARNING
Perform corrective actions for an overflow immediately. If nothing is done to correct

the problem, the wheel continues to overflow. Contact Beckman Coulter for
assistance with performing these procedures.
• Align the wash nozzle component over the cuvettes. Visually inspect and confirm the
wash nozzles are centered over the cuvettes and inspect the alignment.
• Sonicate and clean the wash nozzles with a stylet to remove any debris.
• Inspect the reagent and sample probes to confirm the probes are correctly aligned.
Rotate the sample and reagent probes over the cuvette wheel.
• Inspect for chipped or cracked cuvettes. Replace them if necessary. For more
information, refer to Clean the Cuvettes, Cuvette Wedges, and Cuvette Wheel after an
Overflow.
• Confirm that the wash nozzle tubing connections are secure.
• Confirm that the O-rings inside the water supply tube mounting joint are in position
and not damaged.
After the Overflow is Corrected

After you correct the cuvette wheel overflow, refer to Clean the Cuvettes, Cuvette Wedges,
and Cuvette Wheel after an Overflow.

When the system generates a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash alarm, and
a cuvette overflow did not occur, unstable photometry causes the alarm. Incorrectly placed
cuvettes in the cuvette wheel, an insufficient amount of wash solution being supplied to
clean the cuvettes, bubbles in the bottom of the cuvettes, dirty or scratched cuvettes, or a
deteriorating lamp can cause unstable photometry.
Perform the following procedures in this section. After the error is identified and corrected,
perform a photocal. For more information, refer to Perform a Photocal. If the error still
occurs, contact Beckman Coulter.
Inspect the Cuvette Placement

Inspect the cuvette identified by the Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash
alarm to determine if it is placed in the cuvette wheel correctly. Push the cuvette down into
the cuvette wheel until the top of the cuvette is even with the cuvette wheel.
9-22 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
Figure 9.4 Incorrect and Correct Cuvette Placement
1. Incorrect cuvette placement 2. Correct cuvette placement
Inspect the Cuvette Condition
1 Inspect the cuvettes identified by the Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash
alarm to determine if there is sufficient wash solution in the cuvette.
If the remaining wash solution volume is insufficient or empty, there is a possibility of
system malfunction. Contact Beckman Coulter.
Figure 9.5 Wash Solution Level in Cuvette
1. Sufficient: OK 3. Empty: Not Good

2. Insufficient: Not Good
2 Inspect the cuvette to determine if there are any bubbles at the bottom of the cuvette.
A98352AC 9-23
Troubleshooting
Figure 9.6 Bubbles in Cuvette
1. Not good 2. Not good
3 If bubbles exist in the cuvette, inspect the water and wash solution supply tubing on the
wash nozzle component to determine if there are bubbles. The aspiration tubing has
bubbles in normal operation.
4 If bubbles exist in the water and wash solution supply tubing on the wash nozzle
component, tighten the tube mounting joints and remove the bubbles by performing a
W1 or Prime Wash Nozzle.
For more information, refer to Perform a W1 and Replace the O-rings in the Water
Supply Tube Mounting Joints.
Figure 9.7 Tube Mounting Joint Manifolds
1. Water supply tube mounting joint 2. Wash nozzle tube mounting joint
manifolds (Each contains a total of manifolds
six O-rings) 3. Wash nozzle component
9-24 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the Beckman Coulter Laboratory Automation System Connection
Figure 9.8 Water Supply Tubing
1. Inspect water supply tubing for

bubbles
5 Inspect the cuvette to determine if it is dirty or scratched. Clean or replace the cuvette
as required. For more information, refer to Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes.
Inspect the Lamp

Select Home > Analyzer Maintenance > Consumption.
Confirm the number of hours the lamp has been in use. If the lamp has been in use for over
1,000 hours, replace the lamp.
For information on how to replace the photometer lamp, refer to Replace the Photometer
Lamp.
Recovering from Rack Jams at the Rack Loader and Rack Unloader Units
When a rack jam occurs at the rack loader unit, the analyzer moves to Measure 2 mode and
generates one of the following alarms:
• LA rack carry-in procedure Error
• Rack Jam at carry-in from LA
1 Remove the rack(s) from the rack loader unit.

2 Select Start. Racks start moving from the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation
system to the AU5800 again.
A98352AC 9-25
Troubleshooting
3 Place the rack(s) that are removed on the retrieval lane of the connection unit.
IMPORTANT
Repeat analysis for all samples on the racks removed from the rack jam.
When a rack jam occurs at the rack unloader unit, the analyzer moves to Pause mode and
generates one of the following alarms:
• LA rack carry-out procedure Error
• Rack Jam at carry-out to LA
1. Remove the rack(s) from the rack unloader unit.
2. Select Start.
The system initializes the rack unloader unit and restarts analysis. When the Beckman
Coulter laboratory automation system can receive racks, the racks are returned to the
Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system. When the Beckman Coulter laboratory
automation system is not in operation, the racks are returned to the rack output
component.
3. Place the rack(s) that are removed on the retrieval lane of the connection unit.
TIP
The retrieval lane of the connection unit is part of the Beckman Coulter laboratory
automation system.
Recovering from Mechanical Errors

When any mechanical error occurs, the system moves to Stop mode.
1 Remove all the racks from the system.

2 Select STOP/STANDBY. The system initializes and then moves to Standby mode.
3 Select Start. The system starts analysis.

If the error occurs again, contact Beckman Coulter.
Operating the AU5800 when the Beckman Coulter Laboratory Automation System is Down
The AU5800 can be operated independently if the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation
system is not in operation.
1 Load the racks on the rack input component or priority rack input component.
2 Select Start.
9-26 A98352AC
9
Troubleshooting
For more information, refer to Add Racks Directly to the System in the AU5800
Laboratory Automation Connecting Kit addendum.
A98352AC 9-27
Troubleshooting
9-28 A98352AC
APPENDIX A
System Specifications
This section summarizes AU5800 information such as size, required clearances, power
requirements, and temperature requirements. For more information on other
configurations, contact Beckman Coulter.
Placement
To operate this system safely and accurately, confirm that the installation room:
• Is not subject to direct sunlight.
• Is not excessively dusty or subject to large amounts of airborne particles. This system
withstands up to pollution degree 2 as defined by IEC and UL standards.
• Is level, with a gradient less than 1/200.
• Is not subject to vibration.
• Has a floor that can support the weights listed below. This weight includes the
personal computer attached to the system. If the ISE unit is used, add 150 kg (330
pounds) to the weight of each system.
— 920 kg (2,030 pounds) for one-unit system
— 1,520 kg (3,350 pounds) for two-unit system
— 2,120 kg (4,670 pounds) for three-unit system
— 2,720 kg (6,000 pounds) for four-unit system
• Is located less than 6,561 feet or 2,000 meters above sea level.
• Contains no corrosive gases.
Electrical and Noise Conditions

Prepare the power source before system delivery.
• Have a power connector within 33 feet, or 10 meters of the location of the system.
• Have the following capacity of the circuit breaker on the power switchboard:
— 30 A (for one-unit system)
— 50 A (for two-unit system)
— 50 A (for three-unit system)
— 60 A (for four-unit system)
• Have a power source with maximum voltage fluctuations (± 10%) and transient
overvoltage less than 2,500 V.
A98352AC A-1
NOTE
To avoid electrical damage to the system caused by uneven current, use an

uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to connect the system to electrical power. For
more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
• Confirm that the system is always grounded. The grounding terminal is be less than
100 Ω of grounding resistance defined in the technical standards for electrical
facilities.
• Do not locate this system near equipment that generates extreme levels of
electromagnetic or electrical noise.
• Do not use mobile or cordless telephones and transceivers in the room where the
system is installed.
• Do not use medical equipment that can be susceptible to malfunctions caused by
Electric Magnetic Field (EMF) near the analyzer Data Processing Module (DPR) or the
monitor.
WARNING
Connect all the grounding terminals provided on the system and distribution panel to
ground. Failure to ground the terminals can cause electric shock and system
malfunction.
Figure A.1 Crimp Terminal Hole
1. Crimp terminal hole diameter 5.4 mm
CAUTION
Only a Beckman Coulter Representative can connect the power cable.

• When connecting the power cables to the system, connect the grounding terminal first.
To disconnect the cables, disconnect the grounding terminal last.
• Connect the power cables to the distribution panel.
A-2 A98352AC
A
Figure A.2 Distribution Panel
1. Gray 8. Connect these terminals to the power

2. White source specified for this system
3. Green 9. Connect this terminal to a grounding
4. Terminal board terminal that measures less than 100 Ω
5. Black 10. Green (All markets except Europe), or
6. White (All markets except Europe), or Yellow/Green (Europe market)
Blue (Europe market) 11. White (All markets except Europe), or
7. Green (All markets except Europe) or Blue (Europe market)
Yellow/Green (Europe market) 12. Black
For Europe, Black/Blue/Yellow Green is required for Live/Neutral/Ground.
For all markets except Europe, Black/White/Green is required for Live/Neutral/Ground.
Clearance
The system includes the rack feeder unit, analyzer unit (1, 2, 3, or 4), and ISE unit
(optional).
This system requires space of a minimum of 500 mm (20 inches) from the wall around it
for safe installation and maintenance.
A98352AC A-3
Figure A.3 System Dimensions and Clearance Requirements
1. Rack Feeder unit 3. Analyzer unit

2. ISE unit (optional) 4. FRONT
A-4 A98352AC
A
Dimensions
Table A.1 Unit Dimensions
Unit Dimensions
Length Height Depth Weight
mm mm mm kg
Analyzer Unit 1,060 1,260 1,580 600
Rack Feeder Unit 1,090 1,600 1,500 320
ISE Unit 450 1210 1,140 150
Table A.2 System Dimensions

System Dimensions
Length Height Depth Weight
mm mm mm kg
1 Unit 2,600 1,600 1,580 1,070
2 Units 3,600 1,600 1,580 1,670
3 Units 4,720 1,600 1,580 2,270
4 Units 5,780 1,600 1,580 2,870
System with separate DPR (option): 1,350 height
System without ISE unit (option): -450-mm length, -150-kg weight
A98352AC A-5
Figure A.4 System Connections
1. Power cable (10 m) 8. Printer cable

2. Back of rack feeder unit 9. TCP/IP cable or RS232C cable
3. Water supply equipment connector 10. Water supply hose (10 m)
4. Water supply equipment (option) 11. Exhaust air hose (10 m)
5. To main water valve 12. Washing waste liquid hose (10 m)
6. 1.5 m or less 13. Concentrated waste liquid hose (10 m)
7. Drain hole
CAUTION
The printer should use a power outlet located in the facility and not a system power
outlet located on the system. Use of a system outlet could trip the system circuit
breaker interrupting power.
A-6 A98352AC
A
Water Supply
Specification Requirement
Deionized water conductivity 2.0 µS/cm or less (water transmitted through a
filter of 0.5 µm or less)
Water pressure 0.49×105 to 3.92×105 Pa (or 7 to 57 psi)
Water consumption Average water consumption (50 Hz/60 Hz):
• 62 L/hour (for one-unit system)

• 124 L/hour (for two-unit system)
• 186 L/hour (for three-unit system)
• 248 L/hour (for four-unit system)
• 2 L/hour (for an ISE unit with one or two
flowcells)
Maximum water demand (50 Hz/60 Hz):
• 2.5 L/minute (for one-unit system)

• 3.5 L/minute (for two-unit system)
• 4.0 L/minute (for three-unit system)
• 5.0 L/minute (for four-unit system)
Deionized water temperature 5 to 28 °C (41 to 83 °F)

Water-supply facility More requirements for the water supply:
• The system is located within 10 m (33 feet) of

the deionized water outlet.
• Deionized water supplied to the system does
not contain excessive air bubbles.
The system includes the following tubing:
• Water supply hose: Braided hose 12 mm (ID) x

18 mm (OD), L=10 m (33 feet), 1 piece.
CAUTION
If the tap water temperature exceeds the optimal temperature range for the
deionizer, consult the deionizer manufacturer. When using the existing water supply
tubing and deionizer, confirm that it is micro-organism free.
NOTE
The water pressure for this system operates at a range from 0.49 x 105 to 3.92 x 105 Pa.
For the correct water pressure for the deionizer, contact the deionizer manufacturer.
Beckman Coulter recommends use of a reverse osmotic membrane as the deionizer.
For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
A98352AC A-7
Drainage and Exhaust

Table A.4 Drainage and Exhaust
Concentrated waste solution hose, diluted waste Braided hose 15 mm (ID) x 22 mm (OD), L=10 m
solution hose (33 feet), 2 pieces
Exhaust hose Braided hose 12 mm (ID) x 18 mm (OD), L=10 m
(33 feet), 1 piece.
WARNING
Follow your laboratory procedure for disposal of all liquid and infectious waste.
The system discharges waste liquids by forced drain and moist air containing the
components of waste liquids.
• Condensed waste liquid: Compound liquid of sample and reagent retrieved from
cuvettes and wash solution.
• Diluted waste liquid: Waste liquid used for washing cuvettes, mix bars, and so on.
Requirements:
• Place the drain hole within 10 m (33 feet) from this system.
• Connect the drain to an infectious waste collection tank as required by law.
• The drain must be located no higher than 1.5 m and the exhaust no higher than 0.1 m
above the system installation floor.
• Keep the ends of exhaust air hoses and the waste liquid hoses, which are inserted into
the drain, above the liquid level of the drain.
• Confirm that the liquid waste hoses are not bent or crushed.
• Drainage capability for concentrated and diluted liquid waste is:
— Concentrated waste liquids (reagent + sample + wash solution):
— 24 liters /hour (for one-unit system)
— 48 liters/hour (for two-unit system)
— 72 liters/hour (for three-unit system)
— 96 liters/hour (for four-unit system)
— 2.5 liters/hour (for an ISE unit with one flowcell)
— 3 liters/hour (for an ISE unit with two flowcells)
— Diluted waste liquid (washing water):
— 38 liters/hour (for one-unit system)
— 76 liters/hour (for two-unit system)
— 114 liters/hour (for three-unit system)
— 152 liters/hour (for four-unit system)
Environmental Requirements
Temperature and Humidity Conditions When in Use
Heat output by the system during operation:
A-8 A98352AC
A
• Approximately 16227 kJ/h (15381 BTU) for one-unit system

• Approximately 21856 kJ/h (20717 BTU) for two-unit system
• Approximately 29804 kJ/h (28250 BTU) for three-unit system
• Approximately 35160 kJ/h (33327) BTU) for four-unit system
When the specified room temperature and humidity ranges fluctuate, the system data can
not be reliable. When the system is in operation, confirm that the following requirements
are met.
Confirm that the system is not exposed to direct airflow from air conditioners.
Table A.5 Temperature and Humidity
Temperature 18 to 32 °C (64 to 90 °F)
Acceptable range of temperature fluctuation Within 4 °C (7.2 °F) during analysis
Humidity 20 to 80% RH (without condensation)
CAUTION
The installation site must be well ventilated. For more information, refer to
Clearance.
Temperature and Humidity Conditions When Not in Use

• The temperature is between 5 °C (41° F) and 40 °C (104° F).
• The humidity is between 15% RH and 90% RH.
Power Requirements
Table A.6 Power Requirements
Voltage, Frequency
AC 208 V 50/60 Hz (USA)
AC 230 V 50/60 Hz (Europe)
AC 220 V 50/60 Hz (Asia)
AC 240 V 50/60 Hz (Australia)
AC 200 V 50/60 Hz (Japan)
Maximum rated power consumption

6 kVA (for one-unit system)
8 kVA (for two-unit system)
10 kVA (for three-unit system)
12 kVA (for four-unit system)
A98352AC A-9
General Specifications
Bar Code Reader

Table A.7 Sample ID Bar Code Reader Specifications
Item Specification
Wave length 650 nm
Maximum output 85 μW
Beam divergence 60 degrees
Pulse width 112 μS
Scan rate 500 Hz
Class 2
Hand Scanner
Table A.8 Hand Scanner Specifications
Item Specification
Wavelength 630 to 680 nm
Output 1.0 mW
Class 2
Regulatory Compliance
This system complies with IEC60825-1: 2007.
General Specifications
Method of Analysis
Discrete method
Configuration
Rack Feeder Unit
Analyzer Unit
Data Processor
Option
ISE
Printer
PROService kit
Hand scanner
Water supply equipment
External storage device
Laboratory Automation Connecting kit
A-10 A98352AC
A
Cups or Tubes Specifications
Type of Sample
Serum, plasma, urine, or other fluids with viscosities in the same range as serum
Maximum Number of Simultaneous Analytes

One-unit system (including ISE): 57 analytes
Two-unit system (including ISE): 111 analytes
Three-unit system (including ISE): 120 analytes
Four-unit system (including ISE): 120 analytes
Maximum Throughput
One-unit system: 2000 tests/hour
Two-unit system: 4000 tests/hour
Three-unit system: 6000 tests/hour
Four-unit system: 8000 tests/hour
ISE (1 flowcell): 900 tests/hour
ISE (2 flowcells): 1800 tests/hour
Data Input Methods

Touch screen
Keyboard
Mouse
Online (RS232C and TCP/IP)
Hand scanner
CD
Data Output Methods

Monitor display
Printer (option)
Online (RS232C and TCP/IP)
External storage device (option)
PROService (option)
Internal hard disk
NOTE
BD indicates a Becton Dickinson PN. The BD tube or its equivalent can be used.
A98352AC A-11
CAUTION
Beckman Coulter adjusts the sample probes for optimal dispensing with the cup or
tubes selected for use by each laboratory at installation. If you change the cup or
tubes in use on the system, contact Beckman Coulter so any required adjustments
can be made.
Table A.9 Cup or Tube Available for Racks

Cup or Tube Size PN Dead Volume (µL)
Hitachi cup 2.0 mL MU853200 70
Auto aliquot tube 13 mm 2910034 90
Serum Separator Tube 13 x 100 mm BD 367986 4 mm above the non-
sample (cells or gel)
layer
Serum Separator Tube 16 x 100 mm BD 367988 4 mm above the non-
sample (cells or gel)
layer
Lithium heparin with gel 13 x 75 mm BD 367960 4 mm above the non-
separator (light green sample (cells or gel)
top) layer
Lithium heparin with gel 13 x 100 mm BD 367962 4 mm above the non-
separator (light green sample (cells or gel)
top) layer
Lithium heparin (green 13 x 75 mm BD 367884 4 mm above the non-
top) sample (cells or gel)
layer
Lithium heparin (green 13 x 100 mm BD 367886 4 mm above the non-
top) sample (cells or gel)
layer
Primary tube (red top) 13 x 75 mm BD 366668 140
Primary tube (red top) 13 x 100 mm BD 367815 140
Table A.10 Cup Nested (Inserted) in Tube Available for Racks

Cup, Size PN Tube PN Dead Volume (µL)
DxC cup, 2.0 mL 652730 DxC transfer 979272 70
Access 2 cup, 2.0 81902 DxC transfer 979272 70
mL
Access 2 cup, 1.0 81915 13 x 75 mm 140
BD 367960
mL
BD 367884
BD 366668
A-12 A98352AC
A
Sampling Specifications
Table A.10 Cup Nested (Inserted) in Tube Available for Racks (Continued)
Cup, Size PN Tube PN Dead Volume (µL)
Access 2 cup, 1.0 81915 13 x 100 mm 140
BD 367962
mL
BD 367886
BD 367815
Hitachi cup, 2.0 mL MU853200 SST 16x100 mm BD 367988 70

EZ Nest cup 1270013000 13 x 75 mm 50
BD 367960
BD 367884
BD 366668
EZ Nest cup 1270013000 13 x 100 mm 50

BD 367962
BD 367886
BD 367815
EZ Nest cup 1270016000 16 x 75 mm BD 364976 80

EZ Nest cup 1270016000 16 x 100 mm BD 367988 80
IMPORTANT
You can only use nested cups on racks supplied by the rack input tray or priority rack
input component.
Sampling Specifications
Sample Capacity
Maximum 400 samples (40 racks)
Maximum 200 samples (20 racks) when the AU5800 connects to a laboratory
automation system
Sample Dispensing System

Micro-syringe system
The system is provided with the following functions:

• Liquid level detection
• Clot detection
• Collision detection
• Pre-dilution
A98352AC A-13
Reagent Specifications
Sample Volume
Table A.11 Sample Volume
Pre-Dilution Rate Dilution (μL) Sample Volume (μL) in 1.0 μL
increments
3 or 5 0 1.0 to 8.5
10 1.0 to 3.5
Other than 3 or 5 0 1.0 to 17.0
10 1.0 to 7.0
Rack Type
NE racks are required on the system. For more information on NE racks, refer to Place the
Sample Cups or Tubes in a Rack.
• Blue rack
• Yellow rack
• Green rack
• White rack
— White rack with or without black adapters (without a laboratory automation
system)
— White rack with light blue adapters (with a laboratory automation system)
• Red rack
• Orange rack
CAUTION
Supply only the white racks with the light blue adapters to the Beckman Coulter
laboratory automation system.
Rack Jam errors can occur if racks other than white racks with light blue adapters are
supplied to the Beckman Coulter laboratory automation system.
Reagent Specifications
Storage Capacity
Table A.12 Storage Capacity
Component Capacity
R1 refrigerator 54 with serial reagent bottle capability
R2 refrigerator 54 with serial reagent bottle capability
Refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 4 to 12 °C (39.2 to 53.6 °F)
A-14 A98352AC
A
Reaction System Specifications
Reagent Setting Method

• Turn table method
Type of Reagent
• Normal concentration reagent
• Highly concentrated reagent
Reagent Dispensing System

Micro-syringe with collision detection function for the probe
Number of Reagent Steps

Maximum 3 steps
Reagent Volume Setting Range

Table A.13 Reagent Volume
Reagent Volume
Normal dispensing 10 to 170 µL in 1.0 µL increments
R1 volume: ≤170 µL
R2 volume: ≤170 µL
Total reagent volume (R1 + R2): ≤270 µL
For 3 steps reagent

R1-1 + R1-2 ≤170 µL
Total reagent volume (R1-1 + R1-2 + R2): ≤270 µL
Dilution dispensing 10 to 170 µL in 1.0 µL increments
R1 volume including dilution water: ≤ 170 µL

R2 volume including dilution water: ≤ 170 µL
Total reagent volume including dilution water: ≤ 270 µL
Dilution water volume: 10 to 160 µL
Reaction System Specifications
Reaction Incubation Method

Dry bath system
Reaction Temperature
Dry bath: 37± 0.3 °C (98.6± 0.5 °F)
Reaction Solution Amount

• 80 to 287 µL
A98352AC A-15
Analytical Method Specifications
Reaction Time
Maximum 8 minutes 40 seconds
Mixing System
Rotative mixing bar system
Reaction Cell
Glass square cuvette (optical path length: 5 mm)
Reaction Line
Rotary disk system: 204 cuvettes x 2 lines
Analytical Method Specifications
Photometric points
28
Type of Measurement
• End point assay
• Rate assay
• Fixed point assay
• Electrode method (ISE) (option)
Optical System Specifications
Photometer
Multi-wavelength diffraction grating spectrophotometer
Photometric Modes
Monochromatic or bichromatic
Wavelengths
340 to 800 nm (13 steps of 340, 380, 410, 450, 480, 520, 540, 570, 600, 660, 700, 750, and
800 nm)
Photodetector
Silicon photodiode array
Light Source
Halogen lamp 12 V/100 W
A-16 A98352AC
A
Data Processing Specifications
Measurable Absorbance Range

0 to 3.0 Abs (converted in units of 10 mm of optical path length)
Photometric resolution
0.0001 Abs
Data Processing Specifications
Storage Capacity
Table A.14 Data Storage Capacity
Data Hard Disk Storage Capacity
Patient Samples
100,000 samples
9999 samples/index
Maximum 300 indexes
Reaction Monitor data: A maximum of 40,000

tests per index and a maximum of 400,000 tests in
multiple indexes
QC Samples
999 samples/index
Maximum 300 indexes
Data Processing Configuration

• Hard disk: 150 GB or more
• Memory capacity: 2 GB or more
• Keyboard: 101 to 109 keyboard
• Touch-panel monitor
• CD-R drive
• Printer (option)
Calculation Processing Specifications
Calculation
• Calibration
— Analytical method
— End point assay
— Rate assay
— Fixed point assay
— Electrode method (ISE)
A98352AC A-17
Input and Output Specifications
— Calibration method
— ACAL AA
— ACAL AB
— ACAL 2AB to ACAL 7AB
— 4 MC to 10 MC
— MCAL MB
— MCAL 2MB to MCAL 7MB
— Calibration curve type
— Straight line
— Polygonal line
— Quadratic expression
— Tertiary expression (2 types)
— EIA-TYPE 1 to 4
— Spline
• Correction
— Water blank correction
— Reagent blank correction
— Sample blank correction
— Data correction
Quality control (QC)

• QC samples
— Maximum 10 types/test
— Maximum 100 types in total
• Quality control method
— Shewhart day-to-day management (Levey-Jennings method)
— Multi-rule control (Westgard method)
— Twin-plot control
Input and Output Specifications
Worksheet
• Routine sample worksheet
• Emergency sample worksheet
• Repeat sample worksheet
• QC sample worksheet
• Calibration worksheet
Data Input and Output

• Test requisitions: Keyboard entry, real-time online, batch online
• Analysis result output: Real-time, batch online
A-18 A98352AC
A
ISE Specifications
Input and Output To and From an External Device

• Online input and output
— RS232C and TCP/IP
• Offline output
— CD-R
— External storage device (HD) (option)
ISE Specifications
Reagents
• ISE Buffer Solution: 2L bottle
• ISE MID Standard Solution: 2L bottle
• ISE Reference Solution: 1L bottle
Measurement Method
Indirect (diluted) ion-selective electrode
Measurement Items
Na, K, and Cl ions in serum or urine
Throughput
One flowcell: 300 samples per hour
Two flowcells: 600 samples per hour
Sample Volume
20 µL plus 10 µL deionized water
Dilution Ratio
32.4 times (deionized water 10 µL, ISE Buffer Solution 618 µL)
Measuring Range (mmol/L)

Table A.15 Measuring Range (mmol/L)
Test Serum Urine
Na 50 to 200 10 to 400
K 1.0 to 10.0 2.0 to 200
Cl 50 to 200 15 to 400
Calibration Curve
Automatic calibration curve:
A98352AC A-19
ISE Specifications
Measures the high concentration ISE Standard Solution and low concentration ISE Standard
Solution to create a two-point calibration curve.
Data Correction
Enables manual calibration chart correction (MCAL) and automatic calibration chart
correction (ACAL, 3-point regression CAL).
Drift Correction
Automatic correction:
Measures the electrical potential of ISE MID Standard Solution for each sample to perform
drift correction.
Types of Consumables and Approximate Consumption

Table A.16 Types of Consumables and Approximate Consumption
Name Approximate Daily Consumption
ISE Buffer Solution Approx. 900 mL (based on 1,000 serum samples
per day)
ISE MID Standard Solution Approx. 1,300 mL (based on 1,000 serum samples
per day)
ISE Reference Solution Approx. 175 mL (based on 1,000 serum samples
per day)
ISE Cleaning Solution Approx. 1 mL (based on 1,000 serum samples per
day)
A-20 A98352AC
Glossary
ACAL (Auto Calibration) — The AB type Cuvette — A glass vessel the system uses
(or ACAL) uses calibrator material to as the reaction vessel, containing the
calculate a calibration factor sample and reagent.
automatically and create a calibration
curve each time the system calibrates. Dead Volume (Reagent) — Reagent
The calibration types are defined in volume that the reagent probe cannot
parameters as AB (single point), AA, or aspirate, and remains in the bottle. The
2AB-7AB (multi-point) for each test. dead volume depends on the size of the
reagent bottle.
Alarm Shots (Tests) — The Alarm Shots
(Tests) function enables the operator to Dead Volume (Sample) — Sample
set the quantity of remaining reagent volume that the sample probe cannot
tests (shots) which, when reached, aspirate, and remains in the tube or
prompts a reagent short alarm. cup. The dead volume depends on the
type of cup or tube.
Advanced Calibration — The system can
calibrate a maximum of 5 bottles or lot Deciding Test — Generates an automatic
numbers of the same reagent before repeat order (requisition) for the
the system uses the reagent. Related Test when resulting in a repeat,
fl, or fh flag. The system also orders
Auto Power On — Allows the operator to (requisitions) the Deciding Test with a
set a date and time when the system repeat flag, but does not order
automatically powers on the analyzer. (requisition) it with a fh or fl flag. You
can program a maximum of 10 tests as
Calibration Curve — A curve calculated Deciding Test.
from the absorbance and concentration
of the calibrator. The system then Deionized Water (DI Water) — Deionized
calculates the analyte concentration for water, also known as demineralized
a sample using the calibration curve. water, is water that has had its mineral
ions removed, such as ions from
Calibration History — The system saves a sodium, calcium, iron, copper, and
maximum of 100 points of calibration anions such as chloride and bromide.
data per sample type per test. View
calibration data and status in the Disabling (a Test) — Prevents the system
Calibration Monitor screen. from performing ordered
(requisitioned) tests during analysis.
Calibrator — Material with a known value Use this function when the preceding
that the system uses to establish the calibration or QC has failed for a test for
measurement relationship. samples that are loaded on the rack
Consumable — Analyzer parts replaced supply component. Only tests for
by the operator if they are damaged or patient samples can be disabled
on a periodic basis to maintain (unavailable). Tests for reagent blank,
optimum performance of the analyzer. calibration, or QC cannot be disabled
Includes photometer lamps, probes, (unavailable).
and syringes.
A98352AC Glossary-1
Glossary
result with a flag must be reviewed and

Dynamic Range — The range the analyzer have corrective actions performed
can measure for a reagent. If the range before reporting results.
is exceeded, the system generates an F
(over) or G (under) flag. Group — An operator-defined group of
tests that are selected in the Start
End Point Assay (END) — The three types Condition screen. The tests in the
of end point assays: selected Group have reagents on-board
• 1-point assay is a general end- the analyzer and are available to
point assay that determines the perform analysis. You can program
optical density of the reaction three Groups in Menu List >
mixture from the optical density Parameters > Common Test
measured at a specified Parameters > Group of Tests. For
photometric measuring point. example, designate the tests frequently
• 2-Point assay (self-blank method) used for routine analysis to Group 1,
provides sample blank and the tests used for specific analysis
adjustment. The optical density to Group 2. Perform routine analysis
values before dispensing reagent under Group 1 and switch to Group 2
are eliminated as the sample
for specific analysis as required.
blank. This optical density value
is then subtracted from the Index — A data file identified by date and
values calculated after dispensing time, used to retrieve reagent blank,
the second reagent. Any
calibration, QC, and patient results.
contribution to the final reaction
optical density from the sample LAG_TIME Check — If a reaction is
(turbidity, icterus, and so on) is terminated too quickly, effective data
removed to improve
at two points or more may not be
measurement reliability.
acquired. In this situation, the system
• Sample blank correction measures
the blank item and then subtracts can be set up to calculate the analysis
the value from the measured result using the data in the lag phase.
optical density, to calculate the Used for tests in the rate assay method.
optical density of the reaction. Refer to the individual method
This method requires an extra parameters to determine the correct
blank. setting for the test.
END1 does not use the reagent blank LIH Testing - Serum Index — Evaluates
absorbance as the reference for and performs test of lipemia (L), icterus
measurement data at each (I), and hemolysis (H) in serum and
photometric point. plasma. LIH is the symbol used for
testing lipemia (L), icterus (I), and
Fixed Point Assay (FIXED) — A method of hemolysis (H).
calculation that determines the
Linearity — Ability of a measuring
difference between the optical
method to generate results that are
densities at two specific time points
proportional to the analyte
within a reaction. FIXED1 does not use
concentration in a sample.
the reagent blank absorbance as the
reference for measurement data at MCAL (MB) — A type of calibration that
each photometric point. does not use any calibrator material. A
preset MB factor has been determined
Flag — Symbols that display on analysis
and is entered per the chemistry setting
results, indicating that a problem or an
sheet provided for this type of test.
error has occurred during analysis. A
Glossary-2 A98352AC
dispensing reagent 2 is
Optical Density (OD) — The subtracted from the value
measurement of the amount of light calculated after dispensing the
absorbed by a solution in the cuvette second reagent.
with the use of a photometer. The
higher the optical density the lower the RATE1 does not use the reagent blank
transmittance. absorbance as the reference for
measurement data at each
Panic Value — An operator-defined photometric point.
critical range. If the range is exceeded,
the system generates a ph (high) or pl Reagent Blank (RB) — In routine analysis,
(low) flag. If the panic range is the reagent blank serves as the
exceeded, the system also generates an reference value for the reagents at each
audible alarm. photometric point of individual analysis
Photocal Measurement — Evaluates the tests. It also becomes the Y-intercept of
integrity of the cuvettes used to obtain calibration curves created by ACAL.
accurate analysis results. Confirm the Reagent — A combination of chemicals
photocal data obtained from a photocal that react with the target analyte in the
measurement from Home > Analyzer sample. The AU5800 uses either one
Maintenance > Photocal Monitor. For (R1) or two reagents (R1 and R2) per
more information, refer to Perform a analyte.
Photocal.
Reagent ID — The analyzer identifies
QC Monitor — The QC Monitor gives an reagents placed on-board the analyzer
instant visual summary of QC analysis using the bar code label.
results.
Reflex Testing — A function to generate a
QC Sample — Material used to confirm repeat order (requisition) automatically
the performance characteristics of an in for the Related Test by linking the
vitro diagnostic medical device. Related Test to the Deciding Test.
Quality Control (QC) Analysis — The Reflex testing occurs when the Deciding
process of analyzing samples with Test has resulted in a repeat, fl, or fh
known concentrations of analytes to flag.
test the quality of reagents, calibrators, Related Test — The system automatically
analyzer, and procedures. orders (requisitions) the test for repeat
Rate Assay (RATE) — when the Deciding Test has resulted in
a repeat, fl, or fh flag. A maximum of
• Normal rate assay measures the five tests can be programmed as
variation in the rate of Related Test in combination with a
absorbance per minute by Deciding Test.
calculating the average change in
absorbance between two Rerun — A process whereby the analyzer
photometric points, using the tests the samples again, either manually
least squares method. or automatically.
• Double rate assay determines the
rate of absorbance variation per Sample Diluent — Solution the system
minute by calculating the average uses for a manual or automatic dilution
of the absorbance variations of samples.
between two measuring points,
using the least squares method. Sample ID — An alphanumeric code
The rate of absorbance before assigned and used to identify each
A98352AC Glossary-3
Glossary
sample. The system reads the sample

bar code label attached to the sample
cup to identify the sample ID.
Sample Number (Sample No.) — A 4-digit
number the analyzer generates and
uses to identify each sample. The
system displays a sample data prefix in
front of the sample number indicating
the sample type and repeat.
Standard Deviation — Measurement of
statistical dispersion. In multiple
measurements of the same sample, the
standard deviation measures how
spread out the values are.
Test Order (Requisition) — An instruction
to perform tests on a sample. When a
sample is placed on the analyzer, the
system uses the test order (requisition)
information to link the sample to the
required tests.
Twin Plot — Determines whether the
analyzer causes a problematic variation
in QC or if the variation is a random
error. Perform QC analysis using two
controls: normal and abnormal. The
twin plot function displays the first
control on the x-axis of a 2-dimensional
plot and the second control on the y-
axis.
W1 — A maintenance procedure that
automatically cleans cuvettes using the
wash nozzle component before and
after analysis in routine operation. For
more information, refer to Perform a
W1.
W2 — A maintenance procedure that
automatically cleans cuvettes, the
sample probe, reagent probes, and mix
bars using either sodium hypochlorite
solution (0.5%) or 1N hydrochloric acid.
After performing the W2, perform a
photocal. For more information, refer
to Perform a W2.
Glossary-4 A98352AC
www.beckmancoulter.com
© 2015 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions for Use

AU5800 Chemistry Analyzer

Find us on the World Wide Web at:

Beckman Coulter do Brasil Com e Imp de Prod de Lab Ltda

This document was created to:

A98352AB, October 2012

Software version 4.11

This document was created to:

Software version 2.06

The customer is responsible for routine preventive maintenance procedures. Repairs

Alerts for Warning, Caution, Important, Note, and Tip

Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

Important indicates important information to follow.

Note indicates notable information to follow.

Tip indicates information to consider.

Bar Code Reader

Use of control or adjustments or performance of procedures other than these specified

Biohazardous and Chemical Materials

Clean spills of biohazardous or other potentially hazardous substances on the system

AU5800 Hardware Labels

Safety Electric Shock Label

High Temperature Danger Label

Laser Radiation Label

Personal Injury Label

For the Japan Market:

C-Tick Mark Label

This system uses a HFC (hydro fluorocarbon) cooling medium.

HFC chemicals cannot be discharged indiscriminately. When the system is discarded,

Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Labels

RoHS Caution Label

RoHS Environmental Label

For In Vitro Diagnostic Use Label

This symbol is for an in vitro diagnostic medical device.

AU5800 System Display and Labels

Figure 2 Off Switch

Figure 3 Ground Terminal

Figure 4 AU5800 Labels

1. Placed inside the cover

Revision History, iii

Startup Procedure, 2-1

CHAPTER 4: Sample Programming and Processing, 4-1

Review Alarms, 5-17

Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution

Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes, 6-118

Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode, 6-189

!: Unable to calculate concentration, 7-17

Application of Flags (F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N) During Calculation of

Liquid Leaking from the Reagent Probe or Sample Probe, 9-14

Reagent Specifications, A-14

Hardware Component Overview

Figure 1.1 Hardware Overview (Top and Front View)

1. Analyzer units 9. R1 refrigerator component

Figure 1.2 Hardware Overview (Top and Back View)

1. Breaker and fuses 5. Sample transfer component

Breakers and Fuses

Figure 1.3 Breakers on the Rack Feeder Unit

Figure 1.4 Subbreakers on Back of Analyzer Unit

Figure 1.5 Subbreaker on the Back of ISE Unit

Figure 1.6 Operation Buttons

Table 1.2 Priority Rack Input Component